JP2020075165A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of producing a novel game content.SOLUTION: In an estimation conversation performance, a question to a player is displayed on a symbol display device 61. The question is stored a sound/light-side ROM 94. The sound/light-side ROM 94 stores a plurality of types of questions and stores a plurality of types of answers corresponding to each question. One question of the plurality of types of questions is selected by a lottery and displayed on the symbol display device 61. An answer time is set for the player to answer the question. The answer time is selected and determined from a plurality of types of time lengths by a lottery. After a lapse of the answer time selected in that manner, one comment corresponding to the question is displayed on the symbol display device 61. The comment is also selected from a plurality of types of comments stored in the sound/light-side RAM 94 and displayed thereon.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 16

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, a configuration is generally used in which an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  Specifically, for the pachinko machine, for example, lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered a ball entry portion provided in the game area, and the variable display of the pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed. It is known that, when the winning result is obtained, the combination of the specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and the special game state advantageous to the player is entered. When the special game state is entered, for example, opening and closing of a ball entrance device or the like provided in the game area is started, and a game ball is paid out based on the ball entered into the ball entrance device. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2009-261415, A

  Here, novel game contents are required in the game machines as illustrated above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of providing novel game contents.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the invention according to claim 1 is a specific information providing means for providing specific information to a player,
Process execution means for executing a corresponding process corresponding to at least one of the specific information and the reaction of the player to the specific information;
Setting means for setting a waiting possible period that allows the player to perform a reaction corresponding to the specific information after the specific information is provided and before the corresponding processing is executed,
Period determining means for determining the waiting period from a plurality of types of periods,
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a novel game content.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main composition of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main composition of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing a configuration of a game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of (a)-(j) symbol display device. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display device. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the said imaging substrate and its periphery for explaining the imaging substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for win / win lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation | variation start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU on the sound-light side. It is a flow chart which shows the processing by the side command in the sound-light side MPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for performing image pickup control of an image pickup substrate and various controls using an image pickup result. (A), (b) is an explanatory view for explaining a reference for determining whether or not a signal received by an image pickup device of an image pickup substrate is used for calculating distance data in a signal processing circuit. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state in case the radio wave got prevention sheet is not attached, (b) Explanation for demonstrating the state in case the radio wave got prevention sheet is attached. It is a figure. It is a flowchart which shows the reference switch monitoring process in the sound-light side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows signal processing in a signal processing circuit. It is a flow chart which shows imaging control processing in a sound-light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distance image storage area of sound-light side RAM. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating recognition corresponding distance. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the phenomenon of the monitoring object in (a), (b) monitoring process for cancellation. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring process for cancellation in the sound-light side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state in which the distance data below monitoring distance was stored in several unit storage areas of a distance image storage area, (b) Explains the historical data storage area of sound light side RAM. It is explanatory drawing for doing. 7 is a time chart showing how abnormality notification is executed based on cancellation monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for face authentication in the sound-light side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows attestation processing at the time of return operation in a sound-light side MPU. 6 is a time chart showing how face recognition is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st situation monitoring process in MPU on the sound and light side. It is a time chart which shows a mode that the 1st situation monitoring is performed. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd situation monitoring processing in MPU on the sound-and-light side. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of (a)-(h) conversation production. It is the table which shows the expectation degree of the big hit and the word which is indicated in the design indicator in the conversation production. It is a lottery table for selecting a reply comment in conversation production. It is a time chart showing how a conversation production is performed. It is a time chart showing how a conversation production is performed. It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing at the time of a big hit in sound-light side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the lottery processing at the time of disengagement in the sound and light MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the 2nd effect in the sound-light side MPU. It is a base data table for conversation effect stored in the sound-light side ROM. 9 is a table for explaining how feature points are extracted from a face image. It is an explanatory view for explaining a method of grasping the inclination of a player's face. It is a table for explaining the characteristics of the shape of the lip region when the five vowels are pronounced. It is a flowchart which shows the process for conversation production in the sound-light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the question display process in the sound-light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the comment display process in MPU on the sound-light side. It is a flowchart which shows the image determination process in the sound-light side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the direction recognition processing of the face in sound side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the character recognition process in MPU on the sound-light side. It is a flowchart which shows the recognition character storage process in MPU on the sound-light side. It is a flowchart which shows the answer recognition process in MPU on the sound-light side. It is a flowchart which shows the character number recognition process in MPU on the sound-light side. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of conversation failure in the sound-light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the conversation failure cause identification process in MPU on the sound-light side. It is a flow chart which shows conversation production end processing in sound-light side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the processing for the 2nd conversation effect in the sound-light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of (a)-(d) selection production. It is a time chart showing how a selection effect is performed. It is a time chart showing how the super reach effect is performed in the selected effect. It is a time chart showing how a normal long reach effect is performed in the selected effect. It is a base data table for selection effects stored in the sound-light side ROM. It is a flow chart which shows processing for selection production in a sound-light side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows command transmission processing for super reach production in sound-light side MPU. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the continuous conversation production in 2nd Embodiment. It is a table showing the relationship between the expectation of the effect and the comment of the notice in the second embodiment. It is a time chart which shows a mode that a continuous conversation production in a 2nd embodiment is performed. It is a time chart which shows a mode that a continuous conversation production in a 2nd embodiment is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process for continuous conversation production performed by the sound-light side MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a base data table for continuous conversation production stored in the sound-light side ROM in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for continuous conversation production performed by the sound-light side MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the answer grasping process performed by the sound-light side MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st conversation production post-process performed by the sound-light side MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd conversation production post-processing which is performed by the sound-light side MPU in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command transmission process for advice performed by the sound-light side MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the post-process for the game time return performed by the sound side MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows a mode that the presumed conversation production in a 3rd embodiment is performed. It is a flow chart which shows the lottery processing for presumed conversation production performed by the sound-light side MPU in a 3rd embodiment. It is a table which shows the question and comment displayed on a design display device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a base data table for estimated conversation production stored in the sound-light-side ROM in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing for presumed conversation production performed in a sound-light side MPU in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the image judgment processing of the presumed conversation production performed by the sound side MPU in a 3rd embodiment. It is a time chart which shows a mode that a prediction conversation production in a 4th embodiment is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process for prediction conversation production performed by the sound-light side MPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for prediction conversation production performed by the sound-light side MPU in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the comment insertion production in 5th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows a mode that a comment insertion effect performed by a sound-light side MPU in a 5th embodiment is performed. It is a flow chart which shows processing for comment insertion production performed by a sound-light side MPU in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows position information storage processing performed by a sound-light side MPU in a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the front direction confirmation processing performed by the sound-light side MPU in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for comment insertion performed by the sound-light side MPU in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the comment insertion process performed by the sound-light side MPU in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process of the player performed in the sound-light side MPU in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the attention degree determination process performed in the sound-light side MPU in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notice table selection process performed by the sound-light side MPU in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flag change process A performed by the sound-light side MPU in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flag change process B performed by the sound-light side MPU in 6th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing a main configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in a developed manner. Note that, in FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in a forward direction. .. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plate members to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a ball lending device (for example, a CR unit) Y is provided on the side of the outer frame 11. A bill entrance H1 and a medium entrance H2 are provided on the front side of the ball lending device Y. By inserting a bill into the bill entrance H1, it becomes possible to rent as many game balls as the bill. Also, by inserting a card-type storage medium into the medium entrance / exit H, it becomes possible to rent out a number of game balls corresponding to the information stored in the storage medium. It should be noted that what is inserted into the ball lending device Y when the game ball is rented is not limited to a card, and may be a coin in which cash information is stored. Further, the storage medium is returned via the medium entrance / exit H by performing the return operation in the situation where the information on the number of usable game balls remains. By inserting the storage medium into the medium entrance / exit H of the ball lending device Y provided in the pachinko machine 10 or another pachinko machine 10, the number of game balls corresponding to the information stored in the storage medium is lent. It becomes possible.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the gaming machine main body 12 includes a main body frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the main body frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the main body frame 13. It has and. A main body frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. In detail, the body frame 13 is rotatable forward when the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the main body frame 13, and can be turned forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side in front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the main body frame 13, and in a front view, the back pack unit 15 is rotated backward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side. It is possible to move.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating front end portion, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 in a locked state, and The door frame 14 has a function of locking the main body frame 13 so that the door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  Next, the front door frame 14 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the main body frame 13. A window portion 21 is formed on the front door frame 14 so that almost the entire game area described later can be visually recognized. The window portion 21 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a transparent window panel 22 is fitted therein. The window panel 22 is unitized in a state where two colorless and transparent glasses are arranged to face each other in the front and rear. Note that, as the window panel 22, a colorless and transparent synthetic resin plate may be used instead of the colorless and transparent glass.

  A display light emitting portion 23 is provided above the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14. The display light-emitting unit 23 has a light-emitting body such as an LED built-in, and is lit or blinked in accordance with the contents of the effect at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and at the time of a predetermined abnormality, an abnormality occurs. Lighting or blinking is performed in this manner. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 24 are provided on the left and right corner sides in the upper region of the front door frame 14. From the speaker unit 24, a sound or voice corresponding to the content of the effect is output, and at the time of a predetermined abnormality, a sound or voice corresponding to the occurrence of the abnormality is output.

  Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulge portion 31 and a lower bulge portion 32 which bulge toward the front side are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower plate 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side described later while aligning them in a line. The lower plate 34 has a function of storing the excess game balls in the upper plate 33.

  A ball lending operation device 26 is provided in the upper bulging portion 31. The ball lending operation device 26 is provided with a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a frequency display unit 29. In a situation in which information on game balls that can be used based on the insertion of banknotes or a storage medium into the ball lending device Y is stored, information on the ball lending operation, the returning operation, and the number of usable game balls through the ball lending operation device 26. You can check the frequency corresponding to. That is, the ball lending button 27 is operated to obtain a lending ball, and the lending ball is paid out as long as there is information on the number of usable game balls. The return button 28 is operated when requesting the return of the storage medium in which the information corresponding to the number of usable game balls is stored. The frequency display unit 29 displays the frequency, which is information corresponding to the number of usable game balls.

  In the lower bulging portion 32, a discharging operation portion 35 that is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the lower tray 34 to a ball receiving box (not shown) arranged below the lower bulging portion 32. Is provided. The discharge operation portion 35 is provided so as to be able to open and close a ball removal hole 36 formed in the bottom portion of the lower tray 34. In the situation where the discharge operation portion 35 is arranged in the closed position, the ball hole 36 is closed, the discharge of the game balls from the lower plate 34 is blocked, and in the situation where the discharge operation portion 35 is arranged in the open position. The ball removal hole 36 is opened, and the game balls are allowed to be discharged from the lower plate 34. An electric actuator is not provided for the discharge operation part 35, and it is necessary to manually operate the discharge operation part 35 in order to move the discharge operation part 35 between the closed position and the open position. Further, although the discharge operating portion 35 is biased toward the closed position, the discharge operating portion 35 is opened to the open position by utilizing the engagement relationship between the discharge operating portion 35 and the lower bulging portion 32. It has a structure that can be held in. In addition, when the holding state is released, the discharge operation portion 35 returns to the closed position.

  On the right side of the lower bulge 32, a firing operation device 37 is provided so as to project to the front side. By operating the firing operation device 37, the game ball firing mechanism, which will be described later, is drive-controlled, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 33 are fired. The firing operation device 37 includes an operation base portion 37a that is provided so as to project forward, and an operation handle 37b that is provided rotatably supported by the operation base portion 37a. By doing so, the launch strength of the game ball from the game ball launching mechanism is adjusted. Further, in the firing operation device 37, a touch sensor 37c for detecting that the operation handle 37b is touched by a player, a variable resistor 37d for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 37b, A stop switch 37e that is operated to stop the firing of the game ball even when the operation handle 37b is operated by the player is provided. When the operation handle 37b is placed at the initial position, the stop switch 37e is automatically turned on by the operation handle 37b. When the touch sensor 37c detects that the operation handle 37b is being touched and the stop switch 37e is not ON, both are detected by the variable resistor 37d. A game ball is launched with a launch intensity according to the amount of turning operation that is present.

  Next, the body frame 13 will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the main body frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 41 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 43 is formed in the center of the resin base 41. A game board 51 is detachably attached to the resin base 41. The game board 51 is made of plywood, and the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 51 is exposed to the front surface side of the body frame 13 through the window hole 43 of the resin base 41.

  The structure of the game board 51 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 51.

  An inner rail portion 51a and an outer rail portion 51b are attached to the game board 51 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 51a and the outer rail portion 51b guide the guiding means. The guide rail as is configured. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 45 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window 43 in the resin base 41 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

  The game ball launching mechanism 45 is provided on the launch rail 46, a launch rail 46 extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 47 for feeding the game balls stored in the upper plate 33 onto the launch rail 46, and the launch rail 46. It is provided with a solenoid 48 which is an electric actuator for firing a game ball toward a guide rail. By rotating the firing operation device 37 provided on the front door frame 14, the ball feeding device 47 is drive-controlled to supply one game ball on the firing rail 46, and the solenoid 48 is drive-controlled. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PA.

  The game board 51 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 52, a special electricity winning device 53, a first operating opening 54, a second operating opening 55, a through gate 56, a symbol display unit 60, a special drawing unit 62, a universal drawing unit 63, etc. are provided in each opening. ing.

  Even if the ball enters the through gate 56, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when a ball enters any of the general winning opening 52, the special electric winning device 53, the first operating opening 54 and the second operating opening 55, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Regarding the number of the award balls, specifically, 10 balls are paid out when a ball enters the general winning opening 52, and 15 when a ball enters the special electric prize winning device 53. When the payout of one award ball is executed and the ball enters the first operating port 54, the three award balls are executed, and when the ball enters the second operating port 55. Pays out one prize ball.

  The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the second operation port 55 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operation port 54, but the specific number of prize balls may be different from that described above. The number of prize balls in the second operating port 55 may be larger than that in the first operating port 54.

  In addition, an out port 58 is provided at the bottom of the game board 51, and game balls that have not entered the various winning ports or the like are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 58. Further, on the game board 51, a large number of nails 59 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening portion, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening portion, but also the game area PA after passing through the opening portion. A mode in which the flow of the game area PA is continued without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to be clearly distinguished from entering a game ball into the outlet 58, a general winning opening 52, a special electricity winning device 53, a first operating opening 54, a second operating opening 55, and a through gate 56. Entering a game ball into is also referred to as a prize.

  The first operating port 54 and the second operating port 55 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 51. Both the first operating port 54 and the second operating port 55 are open upward. Further, the two operating ports 54 and 55 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operating port 54 faces upward. The second actuating port 55 is provided with a universal utility article 55a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the universal electric part 55a, the game ball cannot win the second operating port 55, and when the general electric substance 55a is in the open state, the winning of the second operating port 55 becomes possible.

  A through gate 56 is provided on the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball with respect to the second operation port 55. The through gate 56 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 56 flows down in the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 56 can enter the second operating port 55.

  Based on the winning of the through-gate 56, the general electric accessory 55a of the second operating port 55 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is triggered by the winning of the through-gate 56, and a general-purpose display of the general-purpose drawing unit 63 provided in the lower right corner of the game area PA where the game ball does not pass. The variable display of the pattern is performed in the section 63a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electric power combination opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the general map display portion 63a is ended, the general electric power open state is entered. In the general electric open state, the general electric accessory 55a is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The general-purpose display unit 63a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light-emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device are provided. , A CRT, a dot matrix display, or other type of display device. Further, as the pattern variably displayed on the public figure display portion 63a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

  In the universal figure unit 63, a universal figure hold display section 63b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal figure display section 63a. The maximum number of game balls that have won in the through gate 56 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the universal figure reservation display portion 63b.

  A winning lottery is carried out with the winning of the first operating opening 54 or the second operating opening 55 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through the display effect on the symbol display device 61 of the special drawing unit 62 and the symbol display unit 60.

  More specifically, the special drawing unit 62 is provided with a special drawing display portion 62a. The display area of the special figure display portion 62a is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 61. In the special figure display portion 62a, a variation display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed by a winning lottery triggered by a winning of the first operating port 54 or a winning of the second operating port 55. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The special figure display portion 62a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , A CRT, a dot matrix display, or other type of display device. As the picture displayed on the special figure display portion 62a, a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors are displayed. A configuration in which is displayed is considered.

  In the special figure unit 62, a special figure reservation display section 62b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 62a. The maximum number of game balls that have won in the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the special figure reserved display portion 62b.

  In detail about the symbol display device 61, the symbol display device 61 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 61 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. May be.

  In the symbol display device 61, when the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is performed on the special symbol display portion 62a based on the winning of the first operating port 54 or the winning of the second operating port 55, the symbol is displayed in accordance with it. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. In addition, in the symbol display device 61, not only the display effect triggered by the winning of the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55, but also the display effect in the opening / closing execution mode to be described later that is shifted after the winning is won, etc. Is done.

  Display contents when the variable display of the symbols is performed on the symbol display device 61 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing individually the symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 61, and FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the display surface of the symbol display device 61.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (j), a design, which is a kind of design, is composed of nine types of main designs to which the numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached and a shell-shaped design. It is composed of sub-patterns. More specifically, the numbers of "1" to "9" are respectively added to nine types of character designs such as octopus to constitute the main design.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of the upper stage, the middle stage and the lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine kinds of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending order of the numbers and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol column Z2, nine kinds of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged, and one sub-symbol is arranged between these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and configured by 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, the symbols of these symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (b), on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are displayed. It is supposed to be stopped. Further, on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, as shown in FIG. 6A, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right downward line L4, and a right upward line L5. It is set.

  When the variable display of the symbols is performed on the display surface of the symbol display device 61 based on the winning in the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55, the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined periodicity. The variable display is started so as to scroll in the direction. Then, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and ended. .. In addition, when the variable display of the symbols ends, if the result of the internal lottery is one of the low-probability jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result, which will be described later, the same symbol combination will appear on any activated line. It is formed. Further, in the case of an explicit high certainty jackpot result which will be described later, although the same symbol combination is not formed on any of the activated lines, a predetermined symbol combination is formed on any of the activated lines.

  It should be noted that, based on the winning of any one of the operation ports 54, 55, the display is started on the special figure display portion 62a and the symbol display device 61, and a predetermined result is displayed and ended until the game time is 1 Equivalent to times. Further, the manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 61 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol columns, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the picture variably displayed on the picture display device 61 is not limited to the above-mentioned picture, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the picture.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 4, when the big hit is won in the winning lottery based on the winning in the first working opening 54 or the winning in the second working opening 55, it is possible to win the special electricity winning device 53. Switch to open / close execution mode. The special electric prize winning device 53 has a big winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 51, and an opening / closing door 53a for opening and closing the big winning opening. The open / close door 53a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 53a is normally in a closed state in which the game balls cannot be won, and when the game is transferred to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery, the game balls can be switched to the open state in which the game balls can be won. It has become. By the way, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted when a winning result is obtained. It should be noted that in the closed state, the winning is not impossible, but the winning state may be less likely to occur than in the open state.

  Next, the center frame 65 of the symbol display unit 60 will be described.

  The center frame 65 includes a roof unit 66 surrounding the upper and left and right sides of the symbol display device 61, and a stage unit 67 arranged below the symbol display device 61. A ball entrance 66a is formed in the left frame portion of the roof unit 66, and the game ball entering the ball entrance 66a is guided onto the stage unit 67 through a warp passage (not shown).

  The stage unit 67 has on its upper surface a rolling surface 67a on which a game ball can roll. The rolling surface 67a has a width dimension in the front-rear direction of about two game balls, and has a smooth streamline shape that is substantially symmetrical in the lateral direction about the center. Specifically, the rolling surface 67a has a mountain portion 67b whose central portion rises upward, and left and right thereof are valley portions 67c recessed downward, and both left and right ends are higher than the central portion. Located in.

  The valley portion 67c has a shape inclined downward toward the front. The game ball that has reached the valley portion 67c in a sufficiently decelerated state is guided by the inclination of the valley portion 67c, and is discharged below the stage unit 67 from the front edge of the valley portion 67c. A front guide path extending in the front-rear direction and having a shape inclined downward toward the front is integrally formed at the top of the mountain portion 67b. The game ball that has reached the mountain portion 67b in a sufficiently decelerated state is guided by the inclination of the front guide path, and is discharged from the front edge of the rolling surface 67a below the stage unit 67. Since the mountain portion 67b is present vertically above the first operating port 54, the game ball discharged downward from the forward guide path of the mountain portion 67b can easily enter the first operating port 54. ..

  The movable object unit 38 is provided on the upper part of the center frame 65, that is, on the upper part of the game area PA. The movable object unit 38 operates at the time of notification effect described later. The contents of the movable object unit 38 will be described later in detail.

  An imaging substrate 71 is provided below the center frame 65. By the way, since the lower part of the center frame 65 exists at or near the center of the pachinko machine 10 in the vertical direction, the imaging substrate 71 should exist at or near the center of the pachinko machine 10 in the vertical direction. Becomes FIG. 7 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the imaging substrate 71 and its periphery for explaining the imaging substrate 71.

  As shown in FIG. 7, a light emitting device 72 and an imaging device 73 are provided on one plate surface of the imaging substrate 71. A plurality of light emitting devices 72 are arranged side by side in the lateral direction, and each light emitting device 72 can irradiate a measurement object with near infrared rays as projection light. The image pickup device 73 can receive the reflected light of the near-infrared rays at each of a large number of pixels provided as a large number of light receiving units, and uses the photoelectric effect to output an image pickup signal having an intensity corresponding to the light reception result. Then, the imaging substrate 71 uses a so-called TOF (Time of Flight) technique to derive the distance from the imaging device 73 to the measurement target based on the imaging signal. Specifically, the propagation time of the light to the measurement target is calculated based on the information of the projection light emitted from the light emitting device 72 and the information of the reflected light received by the imaging device 73, and the calculation result and the known value are known. The speed of light is used to derive the distance from the imaging device 73 to the measurement target. Further, since the distance is derived for each of a large number of pixels of the image pickup device 73, the distance to the measurement target can be derived for each pixel. By the way, in the case of such an imaging method, since it is unlikely to be affected by the optical property of the surface of the measurement target, the applicable range of the measurement target for which the distance data can be acquired is wide.

  The imaging substrate 71 is arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the stage member 68 that causes the rolling surface 67a in the stage unit 67. Specifically, the stage member 68 is formed by bulging toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 so that an internal space is generated, and the internal space is opened toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10. The opening 68a opened rearward is closed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10 by a board pedestal 69 in which an imaging board 71 is integrated. The substrate pedestal 69 is screwed to the peripheral edge of the opening 68a of the stage member 68 from the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Such screwing is performed using a fixture so that it can be attached and detached. Therefore, the substrate pedestal 69 in which the imaging substrate 71 is integrated can be detached from the stage member 68 by releasing the screwed state in a non-destructive manner. For example, after performing maintenance or replacement of the imaging substrate 71, imaging is performed. The substrate pedestal 69 with the integrated substrate 71 can be fixed to the stage member 68 again.

  The substrate pedestal 69 includes a support plate portion 69a that supports the imaging substrate 71, and a support surface 69b of the support plate portion 69a that faces the front of the pachinko machine 10 is inclined downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. The imaging substrate 71 is fixed on the support surface 69b. The imaging substrate 71 is arranged such that the surface opposite to the mounting surface 71a on which the light emitting device 72 and the imaging device 73 are mounted overlaps the support surface 69b, and the light emitting device 72 and the imaging device 73 are mounted. The mounting surface 71a faces obliquely upward.

  Since the imaging substrate 71 is provided as described above, the imaging substrate 71 is accommodated in the space defined by the stage member 68 and the substrate pedestal 69. The light emitting device 72 and the image pickup device 73 face the stage member 68. In this case, the stage member 68 is made of a material that can transmit light. Specifically, it is formed using a colorless and transparent acrylic resin.

  A beam splitter function is provided by plating or vapor depositing tin or silver on the acrylic plate of the stage member 68 and laminating a thin reflective film. Specifically, the stage member 68 is formed as a half mirror (magic mirror). The pachinko machine 10 is installed and used in a game hall, and since there is no light source in the internal space of the stage member 68 other than the light emitting device 72 that radiates near infrared rays, the internal space side of the stage member 68 is the stage. The space becomes darker than the member 68 in front of the pachinko machine 10. Then, even if the stage member 68 is viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the stage member 68, the imaging substrate 71, the light emitting device 72, and the imaging device 73 cannot be viewed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the image pickup substrate 71 is used for image pickup.

  Further, even when the front door frame 14 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 and the stage member 68 is directly visible, the stage member 68 functions as a half mirror, so the imaging substrate 71 and the light emitting device 72. Also, the image pickup device 73 cannot be visually observed. As a result, even if a ball clogging or the like occurs in the game area PA and it is necessary to open the front door frame 14 in order to eliminate the clogging, imaging is performed using the imaging substrate 71. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing.

  Furthermore, not only the stage member 68 is formed as a half mirror, but also the substrate pedestal 69 is formed to be colored and opaque. Then, even if the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 and the back pack unit 15 is separated from the main body frame 13 to expose the back surface of the game board 51, the imaging substrate 71, the light emitting device 72, and the imaging device. 73 is not visible. Therefore, even an employee of the game hall can be prevented from recognizing that imaging is performed using the imaging substrate 71.

  On the other hand, since the stage member 68 is formed as a half mirror, the projection light emitted from the light emitting device 72 can pass through the stage member 68 and the image pickup device 73 can receive the light passing through the stage member 68. is there. Further, only the window panel 22 exists in front of the stage member 68. The window panel 22 is made up of two colorless and transparent glasses, which are arranged to face each other in the front and rear to form a unit, and can transmit light. Therefore, even if the light emitting device 72 and the imaging device 73 are provided on the rear side of the stage member 68 on the pachinko machine 10, the projection light emitted from the light emitting device 72 can propagate to the front of the pachinko machine 10 rather than the window panel 22. The imaging device 73 can receive the reflected light reflected by the measurement target existing in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the window panel 22.

  The imaging range toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 by the imaging device 73 is a range that includes the rear of the player who is seated in the chair arranged in front of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall and playing the game. There is. Further, the horizontal image pickup range by the image pickup device 73 is IAX as shown in FIG. 1 and the vertical image pickup range is IAY, and the window provided in the front door frame 14 is included in this image pickup range. The entire panel 22 is included. Since the imaging range is set in this way, in the imaging device 73, the chest portion of the player who is seated in the chair arranged in front of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall and the portion above the chest portion of the player who is playing the game. Can be imaged.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the imaging area of the imaging device 73 includes the rolling surface 67 a formed on the stage member 68. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 67a can be imaged by the imaging device 73. Further, the game ball that flows down between the stage member 68 and the window panel 22 can also be imaged by the imaging device 73.

  On the other hand, in the configuration in which the display surface of the symbol display device 61 exists at a position rearward of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 51, the stage member 68 is below the symbol display device 61 and is displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 61. An imaging substrate 71 is provided so as to extend in the front-rear direction over the surface of the board 51 and on the back side of the stage member 68. The imaging board 71 is provided such that the surface on which the imaging device 73 is mounted is inclined downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 on the back side of the stage member 68. Therefore, the image pickup range of the image pickup device 73 does not include an obstacle member of the game area PA such as a nail 59 for changing the flowing direction of the game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 81 is mounted on the back surface of the body frame 13. The main control device 81 is configured such that a main control board that integrally manages the progress of a game is housed in a board box. The substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening. Examples of the trace means include a structure of a joint portion that inseparably joins a plurality of case bodies constituting a substrate box and requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation, or peeling off by leaving an adhesive layer on an adhesive object when peeling off. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being stuck is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a structure in which an adhesive is applied to a boundary between a plurality of case bodies forming the substrate box can be considered.

  A sound emission control device 91 is provided above the main control device 81 on the back surface of the body frame 13. The voice emission control device 91 includes a voice emission control board that executes sound output control, emission control, and control of the display control device in accordance with instructions from the main control device 81, and the voice emission control board is housed in a substrate box. ..

  The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back surface side of the main body frame 13 including the main controller 81. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 101 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism unit 102 and a control device assembly unit 103 are attached to the back pack 101.

  The payout mechanism unit 102 includes a tank 105 to which game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 106 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 105. The game ball paid out from the payout device 106 is discharged to the upper plate 33 or the lower plate 34 through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 106. The payout mechanism section 102 is provided with a main power supply of, for example, 24 V AC, and a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power supply.

  The control device gathering unit 103 generates and outputs predetermined power required by various control devices and the like, and a payout control device 111 having a function of controlling the payout device 106, and accompanies the player's operation of the firing operation device 37. It is provided with a power supply / launch control device 108 for controlling the launch of a game ball. The payout control device 111 and the power supply / launch control device 108 are arranged in front of and behind each other so that the payout control device 111 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The back pack 101 is provided with an external terminal board 109 in addition to the payout mechanism section 102 and the control device assembly unit 103. The external terminal board 109 is installed on the rear corner side of the back pack unit 15 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and in the upper corner portion. The external terminal board 109 is a board for outputting a predetermined signal so that the management computer in the game hall recognizes the state of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board 82 that controls the main game, and a power failure monitor board 86 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 83 is mounted on the main control board 82. The MPU 83 includes a ROM 84 in which various control programs executed by the MPU 83 and fixed value data are stored, and a memory for temporarily storing various data in executing the control program stored in the ROM 84. A certain RAM 85, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are built in. It is not essential that the ROM 84 and the RAM 85 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 83, and each may be configured into an individual chip. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 81.

  The MPU 83 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. To the input side of the MPU 83, the power failure monitoring board 86 provided in the main control device 81 is connected, and the payout control device 111 is also connected. A power supply / launch control device 108 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 86, and power is supplied to the MPU 83 via the power failure monitoring board 86.

  Various sensors such as various prize detection sensors 87a to 87e are connected to the input side of the MPU 83. The various winning detection sensors 87a to 87e are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the winning-corresponding ball portions such as the general winning opening 52, the special electric winning device 53, the first operating opening 54, the second operating opening 55, and the through gate 56. The detection sensor is included, and the MPU 83 determines the winning of each winning portion. Further, in the MPU 83, various lottery is executed based on winning in the first operating port 54 and the second operating port 55.

  To the output side of the MPU 83, the power failure monitoring board 86, the payout control device 111, and the sound emission control device 91 are connected. To the payout control device 111, for example, a prize ball command is output based on the result of winning determination to the winning-corresponding ball portion. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 91. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  On the output side of the MPU 83, a special electric drive unit 53c that opens and closes the open / close door 53a of the special electric prize winning device 53, a general electric drive unit 55c that opens and closes the general electric officer 55a of the second operation port 55, and a special electric drive unit 55c. The drawing unit 62 and the universal drawing unit 63 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 62 is provided with a special figure display section 62a and a special figure reservation display section 62b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 83. Similarly, the universal figure unit 63 is provided with a universal figure display section 63a and a universal figure hold display section 63b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 83. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 82, and the MPU 83 executes drive control of various driving units and various display units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the drive control of the driving unit 53c for special electricity is executed in the MPU 83 so that the special electricity winning device 53 is opened / closed. In addition, when the general electric outlet 55a is in the open state, the MPU 83 executes drive control of the general electric drive unit 55c so that the general electric outlet 55a is opened and closed. Further, during the game times and the opening / closing execution mode, the display control of the special drawing unit 62 is executed in the MPU 83. Further, in the case of clearly indicating the result of the lottery as to whether or not to open the general electric accessory 55a, the MPU 83 executes the display control of the general-purpose unit 63.

  The power failure monitoring board 86 relays the main control board 82 and the power supply / launch control device 108, and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / launch control device 108.

  The payout control device 111 controls payout of prize balls or loan balls by the payout device 106 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81. The payout control device 111 includes a payout control board 112, and the payout control board 112 has an MPU 113 mounted thereon. The MPU 113 includes a ROM 114 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 113, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 115 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The MPU 113 has an input / output port. A main control board 82, a power supply / launch control device 108, a ball lending operation device 26, and a ball lending device Y are connected to the input side of the MPU 113. Further, on the input side of the MPU 113, in addition to the above, a sensor for detecting a game ball paid out from the payout device 106, and a sensor for detecting that the game ball is not stored in the tank 105. , A sensor for detecting that the lower plate 34 is full of game balls is electrically connected. On the other hand, the main control board 82 and the ball lending device Y are connected to the output side of the MPU 113. Further, the payout motor of the payout device 106 is electrically connected to the output side of the MPU 113.

  The MPU 113 drives and controls the payout motor of the payout device 106 by receiving the prize ball command from the main control board 82, and pays out the number of game balls designated by the prize ball command toward the downstream side. Further, by driving and controlling the payout motor of the payout device 106 based on the fact that the ball lending operation device 26 has performed the ball lending operation, the number of game balls set by the ball lending operation is directed to the downstream side. Let it pay out. In this case, by using the detection result of each sensor, when the instructed number of game balls is paid out, the payout of the game balls is stopped, and the tank 105 is in the ball-free state. Also when the lower plate 34 is full, the payout of the game balls is stopped.

  The power supply / launch control device 108 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power necessary for each of the main control device 81 and the payout control device 111 is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied.

  Specifically, regarding the configuration for supplying the operating power, the power supply / launch control device 108 is provided with a power supply unit for powering on 108a and a power supply unit for powering off 108b. The power supply unit 108a for power input is connected to a commercial power supply in a game hall or the like, for example, which generates operating power in a situation where external power is supplied from the commercial power supply, and also supplies the generated operating power. Have. The power-supply-during-use power supply section 108b is composed of a capacitor, and when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state (when power is being supplied from the external power supply), the power supplied from the power-supply-during-use power supply section 108a is used. Be charged. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state or in a power-off state (when the power supply from the external power source is cut off) such as when a power failure occurs in the commercial power source, the power is cut off from the power-supply-during-power-supply unit 108b. Backup power is supplied to the RAM 85 of the control device 81 and the RAM 115 of the payout control device 111. Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the RAM 85 of the main control device 81 and the RAM 115 of the payout control device 111 is not erased while the backup power is being supplied from the power supply unit for power interruption 108b. It is retained.

  A relatively large capacity of the power supply unit for power interruption 108b is ensured, and the information stored in the main RAM 85 before the power is shut off is retained within a predetermined period (for example, one day or two days). The power supply unit for power interruption 108b is not limited to the capacitor, and may be a battery or a non-rechargeable battery. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, it is not necessary to charge the power-supply-during-power-down unit 108b when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, but it is necessary to replace it periodically.

  The power supply / launch control device 108 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure (not shown) different from the power supply unit for power interruption 108b. In the power supply / launch control device 108, even after the power source of stable DC 24V becomes less than 22V, the power supply unit for power failure discharges the power, so that a sufficient time for execution of power failure processing described later can be achieved. It is configured to maintain the output of 5 V, which is the drive power source of the control system, at a normal value. As a result, the main controller 81 and the like can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The power supply / firing control device 108 is provided with a firing control unit 108c in addition to various power supply units 108a and 108b. A touch sensor 37c, a variable resistor 37d, and a stop switch 37e built into the firing operation device 37 are electrically connected to the firing control unit 108c.

  The touch sensor 37c has a built-in capacitor, and when the player's hand comes into contact with the outer surface of the operation handle to change the capacitance of the capacitor, a predetermined electric signal corresponding to the handle operation detection is emitted to the emission control unit 108c. Output to. Upon receiving the predetermined electric signal, the firing control unit 108c recognizes that the player's hand is in contact with the outer surface of the operation handle. In addition, the firing control unit 108c grasps the presence or absence of the firing stopping operation of the firing operation device 37 according to the electric signal received from the stop switch 37e, and rotates the operation handle according to the electric signal received through the variable resistor 37d. Understand the operation amount.

  The firing control unit 108c transmits a condition fulfillment signal of a predetermined signal form to the MPU 83 when a predetermined launch condition of the game ball is fulfilled. Specifically, the firing control unit 108c receives, from the touch sensor 37c, a signal indicating that the operation handle is touched by the player, and outputs a signal indicating that the firing stop operation has not been performed from the stop switch 37e. On condition that the signal is being received, a HI level condition satisfaction signal (a signal corresponding to the condition satisfaction) is continuously transmitted to the MPU 83. When any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition satisfaction signal (a signal that does not correspond to the condition satisfaction) is transmitted to the MPU 83. However, the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. In addition to the above condition, a condition that the ball lending device Y is connected to the pachinko machine 10 may be added as a condition for transmitting the condition satisfaction signal corresponding to the condition satisfaction.

  In the MPU 83, when the HI level condition satisfaction signal is received, and if the launch of the game ball can be permitted, the HI level launch permission signal (a signal corresponding to the launch permission) is sent to the launch control unit 108c. To continue to send. When the MPU 83 does not receive the HI level condition fulfillment signal from the firing control unit 108c, it transmits a LOW level firing permission signal (a signal that does not correspond to firing permission). The relationship between the level and the HI level may be reversed.

  When the game ball launching mechanism 45 is electrically connected and the HI level launch permission signal is received from the MPU 83, the launch control unit 108c periodically drives and controls the game ball launching mechanism 45. In this case, if the game ball is being continuously supplied to the game ball launching mechanism 45, one game ball is launched into the game area PA in a specific launch cycle (specifically, 0.6 sec). .. Further, at the time of this launch, the launch intensity is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 37d, so that the game ball is launched with an intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle.

  The sound emission control device 91 includes a sound emission control board 92 on which the MPU 93 is mounted. The MPU 93 includes a ROM 94 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 93 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 94 is executed. A certain RAM 95, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, etc. are built in.

  In the following description, for convenience of description, the MPU 83, the ROM 84, and the RAM 85 of the main control board 82 are referred to as the main MPU 83, the main ROM 84, and the main RAM 85, and the MPU 93, the ROM 94, and the RAM 95 of the audio emission control board 92 are referred to as The sound-light side MPU 93, the sound-light side ROM 94, and the sound-light side RAM 95 are called.

  The sound-light side MPU 93 is electrically connected to the display light emitting unit 23, the speaker unit 24, the effect drive unit 38c, and the display control device 96 on the output side thereof, and the display light emission is performed based on the command received from the main MPU 83. The drive control is performed on the unit 23, the speaker unit 24, and the effect drive unit 38c, and a command is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 is electrically connected to the symbol display device 61, and executes the display control of the symbol display device 61 based on the command received from the sound-light side MPU 93. Various effects are performed using the display light emitting unit 23, the speaker unit 24, the effect drive unit 38c, and the symbol display device 61, and abnormality notification is performed using the display light emitting unit 23, the speaker unit 24, and the symbol display device 61. The state of the pachinko machine 10 is notified. An image pickup substrate 71 is electrically connected to the input side and the output side of the sound-light side MPU 93, and image pickup is performed on the image pickup substrate 71 according to the signal output from the sound-light side MPU 93. The imaging result is received by the sound-light side MPU 93.

<Electrical structure for performing various lottery in main MPU 83>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various kinds of lottery in the main MPU 83 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main MPU 83 uses the various counter information at the time of the game, and performs the winning occurrence lottery, the setting of the display of the special figure display portion 62a, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 61, the setting of the display of the general figure display portion 63a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, the winning random number counter C1 used in the lottery for winning, the jackpot type counter C2 used in determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 61 are displaced. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when performing, random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and display duration in the special figure display portion 62a and the pattern display device 61 are determined. The fluctuation type counter CS is used. Further, the ordinary electric random number counter C4 used in the lottery for determining whether or not to make the ordinary electric accessory 55a of the second operation port 55 into the electric power opened state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 85a of the RAM 85.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Each counter is updated at short time intervals. Numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the special figure holding area 85b when a prize is paid to the first operating opening 54 or the second operating opening 55.

  The special figure reservation area 85b includes a reservation area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and the winning history to the first operating opening 54 or the second operating opening 55 is recorded. In addition, a combination of numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the winnings to the first working opening 54 or the second working opening 55 occur successively a plurality of times, the first holding area RE1 → the second holding area RE1 Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the holding area RE2 → the third holding area RE3 → the fourth holding area RE4. By thus providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4, the winning history of the game balls to the first working opening 54 or the second working opening 55 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four. ..

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, and may be another number such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical value information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display portion 62a, and starts one game time. At that time, a win / fail judgment is made on the basis of various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

  First, the ordinary electric random number counter C4 will be described. The ordinary electric random number counter C4 is configured so that, for example, it is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 250, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The ordinary electric random number counter C4 is periodically updated and is stored in the ordinary figure holding area 85c of the main RAM 85 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 56. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is carried out as to whether or not to control the general electric power accessory 55a to be in an open state by the stored value of the general electric power random number counter C4.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric accessory 55a are different from each other. In detail, in the support mode, when compared in a situation where the game balls are continuously emitted in the same manner with respect to the game area PA, the general electric service object 55a of the second working port 55 per unit time is compared. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the open state is relatively high.

  In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the ordinary electric open state in the ordinary electric open lottery using the ordinary electric random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the frequency support mode, the number of times that the general electric outlet 55a is in the open state when the general electric open state is won is set to a greater number than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time of one time is set longer. There is. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the general electric open state wins and the general electric auditors article 55a is opened plural times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum securing time (that is, in the general map The one-time display duration on the display unit 63a is set to be short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation opening 55 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first operation port 54 is higher than in the second operation port 55, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than the first operation port 54. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 55 increases.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency of the high frequency support mode to be in the general electric open state per unit time more than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, in the general electric open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the ordinary electric open state. In addition, a securing time that is secured when the next ordinary electric train open lottery is performed after the first ordinary electric train open lottery is performed (for example, it is executed in the universal map display portion 63a based on the winning of the through gate 56). In the configuration where multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter securing time can be selected more easily or the average securing time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. Good. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the time of opening is lengthened, and the securing time that is secured when the next ordinary electric train opening lottery is performed after one ordinary electric train opening lottery is shortened. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or an arbitrary combination of conditions of shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability.

  When the general electric open lottery using the general electric power random number counter C4 results in the general electric power open state winning, the general electric power open state is established. The ordinary electric power open state ends when the electric power outlet 55a is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, or when a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the second working opening 55. To do. Regarding these contents, specifically, the upper limit number is 10 in common in both the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, the number of times of opening and closing the ordinary electrical accessory 55a is once in the low frequency support mode, whereas it is more than once in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. It has been three times. Further, the one-time opening duration of the general electric accessory 55a is 1 sec in the low frequency support mode, whereas it is 2 sec in the high frequency support mode.

  Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding area RE of the special figure holding area 85b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 54 or the second operating opening 55. Then, the winning / non-judgment determination is performed by using the stored value of the hit random number counter C1.

  The value of the random number that is won at the time of the win / no win determination is stored in the main ROM 84 as a win / loss table. In the hit / miss table, a jackpot result and a miss result are set as the hit / miss results. The jackpot result is a win / loss result that can be a trigger to shift to the open / close execution mode in which the special electric winning device 53 is controlled to be opened / closed, and a shift trigger to at least one of the win / loss lottery mode and the support mode. The disengagement result is a win / loss result that does not trigger the shift to the opening / closing execution mode and further does not trigger the shift in the win / loss lottery mode and the support mode.

  As the win / loss table, a win / loss table for the low probability mode and a win / loss table for the high probability mode are set. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the winning / winning lottery means. In the gaming state in which the win / loss table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number for the jackpot is two. On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the win / loss table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random number values for the jackpot win is set to be larger than that in the win / loss table for the low probability mode. The number is specifically 20. In this case, the value group of the hit random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the big random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the high probability mode.

  In addition, if the probability of being a big win in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low-probability mode, it is The value group of the hit random number counter C1 may or may not include a part of the value group of the hit random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the high probability mode. ..

  Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding area RE of the special figure holding area 85b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 54 or the second operating opening 55. Then, the distribution determination is performed using the stored value of the jackpot type counter C2.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of jackpot results are set. These jackpot results are (1) the contents of the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the contents of the winning / missing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode, ( 3) At least one of the three contents of the support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is different.

  The opening / closing execution mode executed when the jackpot is won is a round number defining mode executed with a predetermined number of round games as the upper limit. A round game is a game that continues until either one of the following conditions is satisfied: a predetermined open duration time has elapsed and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are won in the special electric prize winning device 53. That is. Further, the number of round games executed in the round number defining mode is the same as the fixed number of rounds regardless of which type of jackpot result triggered the transition. Specifically, no matter which jackpot result is obtained, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds.

  The number-of-rounds specifying mode includes a high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode so that the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 53 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high. And are set. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of opening mode of the special electric prize winning device 53 are set with different opening continuation times from the opening of the special electric prize winning device 53 to the closing. There is. Specifically, a long time mode in which the open duration time is set to 29 sec, which is a long time, and a short time mode in which the open duration time is set to 0.05 sec, which is shorter than the above long time, are set. ing. In the pachinko machine 10, when the firing operation device 37 is being operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 45 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. To be done. Further, the upper limit number of end conditions for the round game is set to 10. Then, in the long time mode of the above-mentioned opening modes, the opening continuation time of a time longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game is set. On the other hand, in the short time mode, a time shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game, more specifically, the open duration of time shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball is set. ing. Therefore, when the special electric prize winning device 53 is opened once in a long time mode, it is expected that the special electric prize winning device 53 is won by the upper limit number of pieces in one round game, and the special electric prize winning device 53 is short in time. When the special electric prize winning device 53 is opened once in this manner, it is expected that no prize is won in the special electric prize winning device 53.

  In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 53 is opened once for a long time in each round game. That is, the special electric winning device 53 is opened 15 times in the long time mode. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 53 is opened once in each round game in a short time mode. That is, the special electric winning device 53 is opened 15 times in a short time.

  In addition, the number of times of opening and closing the special electric prize winning device 53 in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are the higher frequency winning mode. Is not limited to the above value as long as the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 53 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is higher than that of the low frequency winning mode. Is.

  The distribution destination of the kind of the big hit result to the big hit type counter C2 is stored in the main side ROM 84 as a distribution table. In the distribution table, low-probability jackpot results, explicit high-probability jackpot results, and most advantageous jackpot results are set as the types of jackpot results.

  The low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / discarding lottery mode before shifting to the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-probability mode. This low-probability mode has a big hit result next, and continues at least until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. Further, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, it is a jackpot result of becoming the high frequency support mode regardless of which of the support modes before the switching to the opening / closing execution mode. This high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically 100 times) set as one or more times after the shift, and the high frequency support mode The low-frequency support mode that has transitioned after the end of the next has a big hit result next, and continues at least until it transitions to the opening / closing execution mode.

  As for the explicit high certainty jackpot result, the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, it becomes the high probability mode regardless of which win / loss lot mode before the opening / closing execution mode shifts, and the opening / closing execution It is a big hit result that it becomes a high frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the mode transition. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode result in a big hit next, and at least continue until the transition to the open / close execution mode is caused.

  The most advantageous jackpot result is that the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the win / disappearance lottery mode before switching to the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode and the opening / closing execution mode. It is a big hit result that it becomes the high frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the transition. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode result in a big hit next, and at least continue until the transition to the open / close execution mode is caused.

  In the distribution table, "0-9" of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0-29" corresponds to the low-probability jackpot result, and "10-14" corresponds to the explicit high-probability jackpot result. , "15-29" correspond to the most advantageous jackpot result.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 61. The expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 61 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in a game machine in which a final stop result is a given response result in a game time that is a predetermined jackpot result, the symbol display device 61 The display state for making the player think that the variation display state is likely to be the above-mentioned assignment correspondence result in the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol is started. In addition, as for the assignment correspondence result, specifically, a combination of symbols having the same number is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines.

  Two types of expected display are set: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display or the result of the assignment response in a stage before the reach display occurs.

  In the reach display, the symbols are stopped and displayed for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the symbol display device 61, thereby displaying a combination of reach symbols, and in that state, the symbols in the remaining symbol columns. The display state of performing variable display of is included. Moreover, while displaying the combination of reach symbols as described above, while performing variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns, and by performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, , Which includes reducing or displaying a combination of reach symbols and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire symbol display device 61 to perform a reach effect.

  In the notice display, in a situation in which the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 since the variable display of the symbols is started in the symbol display device 61, or a part of the symbol columns is plural. In a situation in which the symbols are variably displayed in the symbol column, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is included. Further, the background screen may be a predetermined mode different from the previous modes, and the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be predetermined modes different from the previous modes. Such notice display can occur at both game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the reach display is more likely to occur than the case where the reach display is not performed. Is set to occur in.

  Reach display is executed irrespective of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game time when the same symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, it is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the miss result, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the main ROM 84 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. Is executed if

  On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to display the advance notice is made in the sound / light side MPU 93, not in the main side MPU 83. In this case, in the sound-light side MPU 93, the notice display is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the deviation result, and the notice display with a low appearance rate is generated. The lottery process for displaying the notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that it is easy to perform. By the way, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for game use is executed on the symbol display device 61.

  Next, the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used in determining the display duration time in the special figure display portion 62a and the display duration time of the symbol in the symbol display device 61 in the main MPU 83. Specifically, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired at the start of fluctuation display on the special figure display unit 62a and at the time of fluctuation pattern determination at the start of fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 61.

<Various processes executed by the main MPU 83>
Next, various processes executed by the main MPU 83 to advance a game will be described. The processing of the main MPU 83 is roughly classified into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in the pachinko machine 10 at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing in the main MPU 83 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S101, power-on wait processing on the main side is executed. In the power-on wait process on the main side, for example, the process waits for 1 sec after the main process is started without proceeding to the next process. In subsequent step S102, access to the main RAM 85 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the main MPU 83 is set.

  Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply / launch control device 108 is manually operated, and in the following step S105, the power failure flag of the main RAM 85 is set to "1". It is determined whether or not there is. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed. In the following step S107, it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored at the time of power-off, that is, the validity of the stored data. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Also, when the power-off occurrence information is not set, or when an abnormality in the stored and held data is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 85 is cleared as the initialization of the main RAM 85. Then, it progresses to step S109. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is not pressed, the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal, and the process of step S108 is not executed, and step S109 is performed. Proceed to.

  In step S109, power-on setting processing is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 85 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is issued to the voice emission control device 91 in order to recognize the current game state. Send to.

  After that, the process proceeds to the residual process of steps S110 to S113. That is, the MPU 83 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed using this irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual process of steps S110 to S113 is an irregular process that is irregularly executed.

  In the residual processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In a succeeding step S111, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and at the same time, a fluctuation counter updating process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed in step S112. In these update processes, the current numerical value information is read from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 85, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical value information is performed, and then the process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting for switching from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing the timer interrupt process in the main MPU 83 will be described. The main control board 82 is provided with a clock circuit as a pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and is further divided so as to be present at an intermediate position of the signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 83. A circuit is provided.

  The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing unit that changes the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt process in the main MPU 83. .. That is, a pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 83 at an interval of a specific cycle of 4 msec. The main MPU 83 executes a process of confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as the rising or falling of the pulse signal, and activates the timer interrupt process on the condition that the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed. To execute.

  In this case, if the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in the situation where the activation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is activated when the interrupt is changed from the disabled state to the enabled state. Interrupt processing is started. That is, depending on the execution status of the process in the main MPU 83, the next timer interrupt process may be started 4.1 msec after the previous timer interrupt process was started, and when such an event occurs, The next timer interrupt process will be started 3.9 msec after the immediately preceding timer interrupt process is started.

  However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed at a specific cycle such as 4 msec regardless of the progress of processing in the main MPU 83, the timer interrupt processing is basically started at a specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main-side MPU 83 is such that even if the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started, The timer interrupt processing at the timing is set so that the amount exceeding the specific period is absorbed, and the timer interrupt processing at the next timing is activated at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, the power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power cutoff is received from the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of power failure is identified, the power failure processing is executed. In the power failure process, various data settings are made to enable the state before power shutdown at the next power startup, and then wait until the supply of operating power to the main MPU 83 is completely shut off.

  In a succeeding step S202, lottery random number updating processing is executed. In the lottery random number updating process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary electric random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after the current numerical value information is sequentially read from the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the universal electric random number counter C4, and the read numerical value information is incremented by 1, respectively, The process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0".

  After that, in step S203, the random number initial value updating process is executed as in step S111, and at the same time, the fluctuation counter updating process is executed in step S204 as in step S112. In a succeeding step S205, a game stop determination process is executed. In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game should be stopped, and if the situation is such that the progress of the game should be stopped, the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped. Specifically, by making a positive determination in step S206, the processing for advancing the game in steps S207 to S218 is not executed. Further, in the case where the progress of the game should be stopped, the command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 so that the notification corresponding to the event that triggered the stop of the progress of the game is executed. The state in which the progress of the game is stopped and the notification corresponding thereto are restarted when the power is turned on only by stopping the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 83, and the operating power of the main MPU 83 is restarted. After the supply of the operating power is started while pressing the RAM erasing switch of the power supply / launch control device 108 after stopping the supply, the main RAM 85 is not initialized as it is initialized.

  Then, in step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped, and the processing of step S207 and the subsequent steps is executed on condition that the progress of the game is not stopped.

  In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 53c and 55c is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric prize winning device 53 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 53c is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal.

  Further, when the information for switching the universal electric accessory 55a of the second operation port 55 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 55c for the general electric power is started to switch to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In a succeeding step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes.

  In a succeeding step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection processing, the signals received from the respective winning detection sensors 87a to 87e are read, and the general winning opening 52, the special electricity winning device 53, the first operating opening 54, the second operating opening 55, and the through gate 56 are read. A process for identifying the presence or absence of a ball is executed.

  In a succeeding step S210, a timer updating process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 85 is executed. In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are handled collectively, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may be configured.

  In a succeeding step S211, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraudulent monitoring target has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, occurrence of any of magnetism, radio waves, and vibration is confirmed using the detection result of the corresponding detection sensor. Then, when it is confirmed that any fraudulent response event has occurred, the game stop setting is made in step S205 in the next timer interrupt process, and an affirmative determination is made in step S206.

  In a succeeding step S212, a firing control process for controlling the firing of the game ball is executed. In the situation where the launching operation is continued to the launching operation device 37, as described above, one game ball is launched in a predetermined launching cycle of 0.6 sec.

  In a succeeding step S213, as input state monitoring processing, based on the information read in the reading processing in step S208, disconnection confirmation of each of the winning detection sensors 87a to 87e and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed. To do.

  In a succeeding step S214, special figure special electric power control processing for performing game time execution control and execution control of opening / closing execution mode is executed. The processing content of the special figure special power control processing will be described in detail later.

  In the following step S215, the universal figure / general electric power control processing is executed. In the normal / universal / universal control process, a process for acquiring the numerical information of the general / universal random number counter C4 is performed when a prize is awarded to the through gate 56, and when the numerical information is stored. The opening determination is performed on the numerical information, and the processing for performing the effect for the general figure is executed on the general figure display unit 63a triggered by the open determination. In addition, based on the result of the open determination, a process of opening and closing the universal utility article 55a of the second working port 55 is executed.

  In a succeeding step S216, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 and S215, setting of output information for reflecting the increased / decreased number of the hold information related to the special figure display portion 62a in the special figure hold display portion 62b, and the normal operation. The output information is set so that the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the figure display unit 63a is reflected on the universal figure hold display unit 63b. In step S216, the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display portion 62a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 and S215, and the display content of the general figure display portion 63a is set. Set the output information for updating.

  In a succeeding step S217, the content of the command received from the payout control device 111 is confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S218, payout output processing for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed.

<Special map special electric control processing>
Next, the special figure special power control processing executed in step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) of the main MPU 83 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special figure special power control process, the process for acquiring the hold information is performed when a winning is generated in the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55, and when the hold information is stored. The hold information is judged as to whether or not it is held, and the processing for performing the game replay effect is executed when the judgment is made. In addition, based on the result of the hit / miss determination, a process of shifting to the open / close execution mode after the game use effect is executed, and a process during the open / close execution mode and at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed.

  Specifically, first, in step S301, a process of acquiring pending information is executed. In the acquisition process, when the winning of the game ball to the first operating port 54 is occurring or the winning of the game ball to the second operating port 55 is occurring, the special figure holding area 85b is reserved. On condition that the number of pieces of reservation information stored in the area RE is less than the upper limit value (specifically, “4”), the respective values of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are The holding area RE is stored in the topmost area where the holding information is not stored.

  In the acquisition process, when the hold information is acquired, the hold command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. The sound-light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received hold command to the display control device 96. In the display control device 96, by receiving the hold command, the display of the number of hold information on the symbol display device 61 is changed in correspondence with the increase of the hold number. Further, when the number of hold information increases as described above, the display control process of step S216 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) displays such that the display content is changed to correspond to the increase of the hold number. Control is performed.

  In the following step S302, the information of the special figure special power counter provided in the main RAM 85 is read, and in step S303, the special figure special power address table stored in the main ROM 84 is read. Then, in step S304, the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special telephone counter is acquired from the special figure special telephone address table.

  Here, the processing contents of steps S302 to S304 will be described.

  As described above, the special figure special electric power control process includes a process for controlling the effect for game play and a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as a process for controlling the game use effect, a special figure variation start process (step S306), which is a process for starting the game use effect, and to advance the game use effect. The special figure changing process (step S307), which is the process of FIG. 7, and the special figure fixing process (step S308), which is a process for ending the effect for game use, are set.

  Further, as a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode, a special electricity start process (step S309), which is a process for controlling the opening of the opening / closing execution mode, and a process for controlling the open state of the special electricity winning device 53. The special electric opening process (step S310), the special electric closing process (step S311) for controlling the closed state of the special electric winning device 53, and the ending of the opening / closing execution mode and the end of the opening / closing execution mode The special electric power ending process (step S312), which is a process for controlling the transition of the game state, is set.

  In such a processing configuration, the special figure special telephone counter is a counter for the main MPU 83 to know which of the above-described plural types of processing should be executed. The start address of the program for executing the above-described plural kinds of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter.

  In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure fluctuation starting process (step S306), and the start address SA1 is the program address for executing the special figure changing process (step S307). The start address SA2 is a start address of a program for executing the special figure finalization process (step S308), and the start address SA3 is a program for executing the special electric power start process (step S309). The start address SA4 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power releasing process (step S310), and the start address SA5 is the program for executing the special electric power closing process (step S311). The start address SA6 is a start address of a program for executing the special electric power termination process (step S312).

  The special map special electric counter controls the special figure special electric control at the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information when the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed is satisfied. 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared according to the processing executed in the processing. Therefore, in the special figure special electric power control processing at each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the processing according to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric power counter. In addition, 0 is set as an initial value of the special map special electric power counter.

  After executing the process of step S304, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S304 is executed in step S305. Specifically, when the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special figure variation start process of step S306, and when the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special figure variation process of step S307. When the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the special figure finalizing process of step S308, and when the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special electric power start process of step S309 and the acquired start address is If it is SA4, the process jumps to the process during opening of special power in step S310, if the acquired start address is SA5, jumps to the process during closing of special power in step S311, and if the acquired start address is SA6. It jumps to the special electric power ending processing of step S312. When any one of steps S306 to S312 is executed, this special figure special electric power control process is ended. Hereinafter, the processes of steps S306 to S312 will be individually described.

<Special map fluctuation start processing>
First, the special figure variation start processing in step S306 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S401, it is determined whether or not holding information is stored in the special figure holding area 85b. If a negative determination is made in step S401, the special figure variation start processing is ended, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S401, the process proceeds to step S402.

  In step S402, a data setting process is executed. In the data setting process, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process of shifting the data stored in each of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first holding area RE1 and The data in each area is shifted in the order of holding area RE2 → first holding area RE1, third holding area RE3 → second holding area RE2, fourth holding area RE4 → third holding area RE3. At this time, a shift command may be set and transmitted as an output target for causing the voice emission control device 91 to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted.

  In a succeeding step S403, a win / fail judgment process is executed. In the win / loss determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the win / loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, by referring to the high probability mode win / loss table provided in the main ROM 84, the win / failure determination information of the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the winning random number counter C1 is acquired. It is determined whether or not the performed numerical information matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability. Further, in the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information obtained from the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is referred to for the low probability by referring to the win / fail table for the low probability mode provided in the main ROM 84. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot numerical value information.

  In a succeeding step S404, it is determined whether or not the result of the win / loss determination process in step S403 is a jackpot winning result. If it is the jackpot winning result, a distribution determination process is executed in step S405. In the distribution determination process, the distribution determination information, that is, the numerical value information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2, is grasped from the information stored in the execution area AE. Then, by referring to the distribution table provided in the main ROM 84, it is determined which jackpot result the numerical information of the grasped jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to. Specifically, it identifies which of the low-probability jackpot result, the explicit high-probability jackpot result, and the most advantageous jackpot result corresponds to the jackpot result.

  In a succeeding step S406, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, in the game time related to the start of the variation this time, the information of the aspect of the pattern finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display portion 62a is read from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the main ROM 84 in advance. The specified information is stored in the main RAM 85. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the form of the pattern stopped and displayed on the special figure display portion 62a is set differently for each kind of the jackpot result.

  The information on the type of the pattern to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this case, the pattern mode may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern modes may be set for each jackpot result.

  In a succeeding step S407, flag setting processing corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed. Specifically, the main RAM 85 is provided with a flag corresponding to each kind of jackpot result, and in step S407, among the flags corresponding to each kind of jackpot result, the distribution determination result of step S405 is set. Set "1" to the corresponding flag.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S404 that the result is not the jackpot, the stop result setting process for the disengagement result is executed in step S408. Specifically, the stop result table for the disengagement result, which is stored in advance in the main side ROM 84, is the information of the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display portion 62a in the game time corresponding to the current fluctuation start. The main RAM 85 stores the specified information. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After the processing of either step S407 or step S408 is executed, the display continuation time acquisition processing is executed in step S409. In the acquisition process, the current game state, the result of the hit determination process, the result of the distribution determination process, the presence / absence of reach display, the number of hold information, and the value of the variation type counter CS are displayed in the current game time. Get duration information.

  After executing the acquisition processing of the display continuation time in step S409, the process proceeds to step S410, and the information of the display continuation time acquired in step S409 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. The updating of the numerical information set in the timer counter is executed by the timer updating process (FIG. 11) already described. By the way, as the effect for game play, the variable display of the symbol on the special figure display portion 62a and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 61 are performed. In the state where the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 61, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the activated line), the final stop is displayed for the final stop time. In this case, the display continuation time acquired in step S409 is the time obtained by subtracting the final stop time from the total time for one game.

  In a succeeding step S411, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. The variation command has a 2-byte data structure. The 2-byte data includes the data corresponding to the result of the hit / miss judgment processing, the data corresponding to the result of the sorting judgment processing, and the display continuation time. Corresponding data is included. Specifically, the identification data for indicating that the command is a change command is set by the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data, and the success / failure determination process is performed by the next 4 bits of data. And the lottery result data corresponding to the result of the sorting determination process is set, and the remaining 8-bit data sets the time data corresponding to the display continuation time. Therefore, in the sound-light side MPU 93, when the variation command is received, it is recognized from the identification data that it is a variation command, and the lottery result data indicates the result of the win / loss determination process and the result of the distribution determination process. Recognize and recognize the display continuation time of the current game time from the time data. Here, since the main MPU 83 selects different display durations depending on whether or not reach is generated, even if the variation command does not include information on whether or not reach is generated, the sound MPU 93 displays the information. It is possible to identify the occurrence of reach from the information on the duration. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. It should be noted that the variation command may include information directly indicating whether or not the reach has occurred.

  The type command has a 2-byte data structure. The 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the win / fail judgment processing, data corresponding to the result of the sorting judgment processing, and the kind of win / no win lottery mode. And the data corresponding to the remaining number of times of the high frequency support mode. Specifically, the identification data for indicating that it is a type command is set by the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data, and the success / failure determination processing and The lottery result data corresponding to the result of the sorting determination process is set, and the remaining 8-bit data is used to set the number of continuations corresponding to the data corresponding to the type of win / loss lottery mode and the remaining number of continuations in the high-frequency support mode. Data is set. Therefore, when the type command is received, the sound-light side MPU 93 recognizes that it is the type command from the identification data, and recognizes the result of the win / loss determination process and the result of the distribution determination process from the lottery result data. The type of win / loss lot mode and the remaining number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode are recognized from the continuation number data.

  Here, both the variation command and the type command include data corresponding to the result of the hit / miss determination processing and the result of the distribution determination processing. Therefore, the sound-light side MPU 93 collates the lottery result data contained in the variation command with the lottery result data contained in the type command, so that noise or the like is received when the variation command and the type command are received. It is possible to specify whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred. Then, when the data for both lottery results match, the control for performance corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command is executed, and when the data for both lottery result do not match. Can notify it. By the way, in the latter case, the sound-light side MPU 93 may be configured to execute a game-use effect corresponding to a communication abnormality in the game time. Regardless of the result of the processing, the symbol display device 61 may surely stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the complete disengagement. In this case, the game diversion effect may be configured to be performed over the display continuation time corresponding to the time data included in the variation command, and may be continued until the next variation command and type command are received. Good.

  After executing the process of step S411, variable display of the pattern on the special figure display portion 62a is started in step S412. In a succeeding step S413, the special figure special power counter is incremented by one. In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special telephone counter is “0” when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is “1” when the process of step S413 is executed. Will be After that, the special figure variation start processing is ended.

<Processing during special map change>
Next, the special figure changing process in step S307 in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special figure changing process, it is determined whether it is the timing before the final stop display during the duration of the game time. Perform processing to change it regularly. This regular change is continued until it is time to start the final stop display. Further, this regular change is performed in a fixed manner regardless of whether or not a winning result is obtained and whether or not the reach display is generated.

  Also, instead of waiting in the special figure changing process until the final stop display timing, if it is not the final stop display timing, after performing the processing for regularly changing the above, this special figure The changing process is ended. Therefore, after the effect for game use is started, the special figure changing process is started each time the special figure special power control process is started until the final stop display timing. In addition, when it is time to display the final stop, the final display command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 in order to display the final stop result of the current game time on the symbol display device 61, and the special display. The display mode of the design on the display unit 62a is set to the display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game. In addition, the information of the final stop time (0.5 sec) of the game game is read from the main ROM 84 and set in the special figure special power timer counter. Then, by adding 1 to the value of the special figure special power counter, the value of the counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special figure changing process to the value corresponding to the special figure fixing process.

<Processing during special map confirmation>
Next, the special figure special electric power control processing (FIG. 12) in the special figure finalizing process of step S308 will be described.

  In the special map finalization process, if the final stop time of the current game time has not elapsed, the special special map finalization process ends as it is, and if the final stop time of the current game time has elapsed If the result of the hit / miss judgment that triggered the game time this time is a miss result, the value of the special map special electric counter is cleared to "0" and then the process during finalization of this special map is ended, and this game time is triggered. If the result of the hit / no hit judgment is any of the big hit results, the processing for switching to the open / close execution mode is executed.

  In the processing for shifting to the open / close execution mode, the information of the opening time (for example, 4 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 84 is read and the information of the opening time is set in the special figure special power timer counter. By the way, the opening time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the shift to the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the opening command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. The opening command is a command for causing the sound-light side MPU 93 to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. The opening command also includes information indicating which of the various jackpot results the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is. Therefore, the sound-light side MPU 93 can execute the effect of the opening / closing execution mode in a mode corresponding to the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1. In this case, since the value of the special figure special power counter is "2" when the special figure fixing process is executed, the value of the special figure special power counter is "3". After that, the process of finalizing the special figure is ended.

<Special train start processing>
Next, the special electric power start processing of step S309 in the special electric power control processing (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special electric power start process, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the current open / close execution mode has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, 15 is set in the round counter provided in the main RAM 85 and the main RAM 85 10 is set in the winning counter provided in. The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the main MPU 83 in the opening / closing execution mode, and the winning counter is the upper limit number of game balls in one round game or one opening / closing number regulation mode. This is a counter for the main side MPU 83 to specify whether or not a prize has been generated. Then, the opening duration time corresponding to the jackpot result is set in the special figure special power timer counter, and the special power winning device 53 is opened. In addition, when the special electric winning device 53 is opened, an opening command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound-light side MPU 93 executes control for switching the effect in the opening / closing execution mode accordingly. After the special electric prize winning device 53 is opened, the special electric power special counter is incremented by 1, and the special electric power start processing is ended. In this case, the value of the special figure special electric power counter when the special electric power start processing is executed is "3", and thus becomes "4" after adding one.

<Processing during opening of special train>
Next, the special electric power releasing control processing of step S310 in the special electric power control processing (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special electric open processing, it is determined whether or not the ending condition of the round game of 1 is satisfied, and if the ending condition is satisfied, the special electric winning device 53 is closed and a closing command is issued. It transmits to the optical MPU 93. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter after subtracting 1 is "0", and if it is not "0", the closing time is set in the special figure special power timer counter. The closing time is constant irrespective of the type of game result that triggers the shift to the open / close execution mode, and specifically, is 1 sec, which is longer than the game cycle of the game ball. When the special electric prize winning device 53 is closed, the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 regardless of whether or not the value of the round counter is "0". In this case, the value of the special figure special electric power counter when the special electric power open processing is executed is "4", and thus becomes "5" after adding one.

<Processing during special electric line closure>
Next, the special electric power closing control processing of step S311 in the special electric power control processing (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special electric current closing process, it is determined whether or not the round counter is “0”. If it is not "0", it is determined whether or not the closing time has elapsed. If the closing time has not elapsed, this special electric power closing process is ended as it is, and if the closing time has elapsed, the special electric prize winning device 53 is brought into the open state and the execution trigger of this opening / closing execution mode is executed. The opening duration time corresponding to the hit result is set in the special map special electric timer counter. In addition, when the special electric winning device 53 is opened, an opening command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. After that, the special figure special electric power counter is decremented by 1, and then this special electric power closing processing is ended. In this case, the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special electric closing process is executed is "5", and thus becomes "4" after subtraction by one.

  On the other hand, when the round counter is “0”, the ending command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. The ending command is a command for causing the sound-light side MPU 93 to recognize that it is time to start the effect for ending. The ending command also includes information indicating which of the various jackpot results the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is. Therefore, the sound-light side MPU 93 can execute the ending effect in a manner corresponding to the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the information of the ending time (for example, 6 sec) stored in the main ROM 84 in advance is read out, and the information of the ending time is set in the special figure special power timer counter. By the way, the ending time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the shift to the opening / closing execution mode. After that, the special figure special electric power counter is incremented by 1, and then the special electric special electric power closing processing is ended. In this case, the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special electric closing process is executed is "5", and thus becomes "6" after adding one.

<Tokuden termination processing>
Next, the special electric power ending processing of step S312 in the special electric power control processing (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special electric power ending process, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed. If the ending time has not elapsed, the special electric power ending process is ended as it is. If the ending time has passed, set the contents of the win / loss lottery mode and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode to the contents corresponding to the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time, Further, after clearing the special map special electric power counter to "0", the special electric power electric power ending processing is ended.

<Regarding timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 93>
Next, a timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed by the sound-light side MPU 93 at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the timer interrupt processing, first, in step S501, main command storage processing is executed. The main command storage process is a process for storing the command in the sound-light RAM 95 when the command is received from the main MPU 83. The sound-light side RAM 95 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 83, and commands received from the main MPU 83 are sequentially stored and stored in the ring buffer. The data are sequentially read out in the order of the above.

  In a succeeding step S502, main command corresponding processing for performing processing corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 83 is executed. In the main command handling process, a data table for enabling performance and notification according to the command received from the main MPU 83 is read. After that, in step S503, a light emission control process for controlling the light emission of the display light emitting unit 23 is executed according to the data table read in step S502 or the data table read in another process, and in step S504, The sound output control process for controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 24 is executed according to the data table read in step S502 or the data table read in another process.

  After executing the process of step S504, the process of steps S505 to S513 for performing the imaging control of the imaging substrate 71 and the use of the imaging result is executed, and then the timer interrupt process is ended.

<Main command processing>
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the main command handling process of step S502 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  First, in step S601, it is determined whether the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 83. If these commands have been received, a game result storage process is executed in step S602. Specifically, from the information included in the type command, information indicating which is the result of the winning / distracting lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 83 at the start of the current game time, that is, the current game. Information about whether the game result of the time is the most advantageous jackpot result, the explicit high-probability jackpot result, the low-probability jackpot result, or the deviation result is written, and the specified information is written in the sound-light side RAM 95.

  In a succeeding step S603, advance notice lottery processing is executed. In the notice lottery process, it is decided by lottery whether or not the notice display is to be displayed on the symbol display device 61 at the current game time. As the notice display, as described above, in a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the variable display of the symbols is started on the symbol display device 61, or a part of the symbols is displayed. In a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol columns in the symbol column, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and a background screen up to that point Is a predetermined mode different from the above, the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are different from the previous modes, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are reduced and displayed on the symbol display device 61. It also includes a mode for displaying a question or comment to the player. The warning display can occur at both game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the reach display is more likely to occur than the case where the reach display is not performed. Is set to occur in. Further, in the notice lottery process, the notice times are more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the out-of-range results, and further, notice images having a low appearance rate are likely to occur. To carry out a preliminary lottery. When a conversation effect for displaying a question or comment to the player on the symbol display device 61 and having a conversation with the player is selected by lottery, a conversation effect lottery process for determining the content of the conversation effect. Will be performed in the advance notice lottery process. Details of the conversation effect lottery process will be described later.

  In a succeeding step S604, a stop symbol determination process is executed. In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game time is the most advantageous jackpot result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is established on one of the activated lines L1 to L5, the current stop result To be determined as information. In this case, the type of the same symbol and the activated lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. However, it is easy to select an odd number symbol as a symbol forming a combination of the same symbols. Further, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game time is a low-probability jackpot result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of even symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5, It is decided as the information of this stop result. In this case, the type of the same symbol and the activated lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game time is an explicit high-probability jackpot result, a combination different from the same symbol on the one effective line L1 to L5 and a combination different from the reach symbol are predetermined. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the symbol combination is established is determined as the information of the current stop result. Further, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game time is a deviation result, the presence or absence of the reach display is specified from the content of the variation command. Then, when the reach display is generated, the combination of the same symbols is not established on all the activated lines L1 to L5, and the reach symbol combination is established on one or two activated lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result to be set is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when the reach display does not occur, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on all the activated lines L1 to L5, and the combination of the reach symbols is not established on all the activated lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the result is determined as the information of the current stop result.

  In a succeeding step S605, processing for determining the effect pattern of this game time is executed. In the process, the information on the display duration of the game time is specified from the contents of the variation command and the type command received this time, the information on the display duration, the information on the game result identified in step S602, Then, the effect pattern corresponding to the combination of the information of the lottery result of the advance notice lottery process in step S603 is selected.

  In a succeeding step S606, a data table corresponding to the type of the effect pattern selected in the step S605 and the type of the stop symbol determined in the step S604 is read from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95. In the light emission control process (step S503) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 23 is performed according to the data table, and in the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the data table concerned. The sound output of the speaker unit 24 is controlled in accordance with.

  In a succeeding step S607, the stop result command corresponding to the processing result of the step S604 and the pattern command corresponding to the processing result of the step S605 are transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the stop result command and the pattern command, the display control device 96 controls the display of the symbol display device 61 so that the display effect corresponding to the effect pattern is performed, and when the game diversion effect ends. Controls the display of the symbol display device 61 so that the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process is stopped on the activated lines L1 to L5.

  When a negative determination is made in step S601 or after the processing of step S607 is executed, it is determined in step S608 whether or not the final stop command is received. When the final stop command is received, the symbol stop command is transmitted to the display control device 96 in step S609. The symbol stop command is a command for instructing the display control device 96 to hold a stop symbol corresponding to the current game time on the effective lines L1 to L5 and maintain the state for the final stop time. .

  When a negative determination is made in step S608, or after the processing of step S609 is executed, it is determined in step S610 whether or not an open / close execution mode system command has been received. As the commands of the open / close execution mode, an opening command transmitted from the main MPU 83 when the open / close execution mode is started, and an open command transmitted from the main MPU 83 when the special electric prize winning apparatus 53 is opened. There are a closing command transmitted from the main MPU 83 when the special electric prize winning device 53 is started to be closed, and an ending command transmitted from the main MPU 83 when the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  When the command of the open / close execution mode system is received, the data table corresponding to the command is read from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95 in step S611. Thereby, in the light emission control process (step S503) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 23 is performed according to the data table, and in the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). The sound output of the speaker unit 24 is controlled according to the data table.

  In a succeeding step S612, a command corresponding to the command of the opening / closing execution mode system received this time is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 controls the display of the symbol display device 61 so that the display effect corresponding to the command of the opening / closing execution mode system is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S610, or if the processing of step S612 is executed, it is determined in step S613 whether or not a notification command has been received from the main MPU 83. The notification command is transmitted from the main MPU 83 when an event such as an abnormality or a change in the state of the pachinko machine 10 that should be notified occurs in the pachinko machine 10. When the notification command is received, in order to perform the notification corresponding to the notification command, the light emission data reading process is executed in step S614, and the sound output data reading process is executed in step S615. Run. Accordingly, in the light emission control process (step S503) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 23 is performed so that the light emission according to the light emission data is performed, and the sound of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is generated. In the output control process (step S504), the sound output control of the speaker unit 24 is performed so that the sound is output according to the sound output data. Then, in step S616, the notification command corresponding to the content of the notification command received this time is transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the command, the display control device 96 controls the display of the symbol display device 61 so that the notification corresponding to the notification command is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S613, or if the processing of step S616 is executed, it is determined in step S617 whether or not a cancellation command has been received. The cancellation command is transmitted from the main MPU 83 when the event that triggered the transmission of the notification command is resolved. When the cancel command is received, cancel setting processing is executed in step S618 to cancel the notification that has already been performed. After that, in step S619, the release command corresponding to the content of the release command received this time is transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the command, the display control device 96 controls the display of the symbol display device 61 so as to end the execution of the notification corresponding to the cancellation command.

  If a negative determination is made in step S617, or if the process of step S619 is executed, after executing the other corresponding process in step S620, the present corresponding process is ended. In the other handling process, for example, it is determined whether or not the demo start command is received, and when the demo start command is received, the demo start command is transmitted to the display control device 96. As a result, the demo display is started on the symbol display device 61.

<Various processing for performing imaging control of the imaging substrate 71 and various controls using the imaging result>
Next, various processes for performing image pickup control of the image pickup substrate 71 and various controls using the image pickup result will be described. Prior to describing the processing contents of various processes, an electrical configuration for executing these various processes will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 16.

  The imaging substrate 71 includes the light emitting device 72 and the imaging device 73, as described above. The light emitting device 72 has an LED driver 72a whose emission timing of the projection light is controlled by a control circuit 74 provided on the imaging substrate 71, and an LED driver 72a which has an LED capable of irradiating near infrared rays and is driven by the projection light. An LED module 72b that irradiates the LED module and a radiation angle adjustment lens 72c that is disposed on the front side of the LED module 72b in the light irradiation direction of the LED module 72b and that is capable of adjusting the radiation angle of the projection light with respect to the measurement target. I have it. A signal indicating that the projection light should be emitted is transmitted from the sound-light side MPU 93 to the imaging substrate 71, whereby the LED driver 72a operates under the control of the control circuit 74, and accordingly, the LED module 72b comes close. Infrared rays are emitted. In this case, the near-infrared light is emitted as pulsed light at a constant cycle so that the emission intensity of the near-infrared light emitted toward the measurement target is modulated at a constant cycle. Two light emitting devices 72 are provided, and each light emitting device 72 has the same electrical configuration with the above configuration.

  The image pickup device 73 receives the reflected light emitted from the light emitting device 72 and reflected by the measurement target, and detects the image pickup signal corresponding to the distance from the image pickup device 73 to the measurement target at each of a plurality of pixels 73a. And a viewing angle adjusting lens 73b arranged on the irradiation source side of the reflected light with respect to the imaging sensor 73a and capable of adjusting the viewing angle at which the reflected light from the measurement target is incident. Although a CMOS image sensor is used as the imaging sensor 73a, another imaging sensor such as a MOS sensor may be used.

  The imaging sensor 73a includes a pixel array section 73c having a large number of pixels (for example, 1000 pixels) as light receiving sections in each of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and each of these pixels in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, respectively. The pixel driver unit 73d that scans the signal to read the signal from each pixel is provided, and the signal read by the pixel driver unit 73d is A / D converted after noise cancellation processing is performed. The output signal after this conversion is received by the signal processing circuit 75 provided on the imaging substrate 71.

  The signal processing circuit 75 uses a so-called TOF (time of flight) technique to derive the distance from the imaging device 73 to the measurement target. Specifically, the propagation time of the light to the measurement target is calculated based on the information of the projection light emitted from the light emitting device 72 and the information of the reflected light received by the imaging device 73, and the calculation result and the known value are known. The speed of light is used to derive the distance from the imaging device 73 to the measurement target. Further, since the distance is derived for each of a large number of pixels of the imaging sensor, it is possible to derive the distance to the measurement target for each pixel.

  The reference flag 75a provided in the signal processing circuit 75 stores reference data serving as a reference when determining whether or not the received signal is used for calculating distance data. If the intensity of the received signal is equal to or higher than the intensity corresponding to the reference data stored in the reference flag 75a, the signal processing circuit 75 uses the received signal for calculating the distance data.

  The imaging substrate 71 having the above-described configuration receives the signal from the sound light side MPU 93, and irradiates the projection light from the light emitting device 72 and derives the distance data using the imaging result of the imaging device 73. Specifically, the sound-light side MPU 93 transmits a signal to the imaging substrate 71 when performing a predetermined effect based on the command received from the main side MPU 83, and causes projection light to be emitted and distance data to be derived. . Further, the sound-light side MPU 93 transmits a signal to the image pickup substrate 71 to perform various kinds of monitoring under a situation where the image pickup substrate 71 is not used for presentation, and irradiates projection light and derives distance data. Let it be done. The timing at which this monitoring is performed includes the timing at which the game ball is not fired, and when determining whether or not it is such a timing, the main timing is based on the signal transmitted from the power supply / fire control device 108. The command transmitted from the side MPU 83 is referred to. The timing at which the monitoring is performed includes the timing at which the ball lending apparatus Y performs a return operation for returning the storage medium, and the payout control apparatus 111 can be used when determining whether or not this is the timing. The command transmitted from the main MPU 83 is referred to based on the signal transmitted from the MPU 113.

  The distance data acquired on the imaging substrate 71 based on the instruction from the sound-light side MPU 93 is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. When transmitting the distance data, address data indicating which pixel in the pixel array unit 73c the distance data corresponds to is also transmitted. These distance data are written in the distance image storage area 95a provided in the sound side RAM 95. In this case, the distance image storage area 95a is provided with a unit storage area in a one-to-one correspondence with a large number of pixels provided in the pixel array section 73c of the imaging device 73, and the unit storage area is transmitted from the imaging substrate 71. The distance data are individually written in the unit storage areas corresponding to the pixels that can derive the distance data. The sound-light side MPU 93 uses the distance data written in the distance image storage area 95a to detect not only the distances of the individual images included in the image for one frame but also the face of the player and the face such as lips. It is possible to recognize the parts, and to recognize the shape and size of the face parts such as the face and lips. The image for one frame means that all the pixels of the pixel array section 73c in the image pickup device 73 have completed receiving the reflected light, while the light emitting device 72 has been issued with a projection light irradiation command once. It is an image that can be grasped from distance data derived based on.

  The distance data is derived as a value corresponding to the distance from the distance data reference position set individually for each pixel of the pixel array unit 73c. In this case, assuming that the distance data reference position is “0”, the value of the distance data becomes smaller as the position is closer to the reference position, and the value of the distance data becomes larger as the position is farther from the reference position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the distance data reference position is set as a value other than “0”, and the closer to the reference position, the smaller the distance data value in the range larger than the reference position value. However, the value of the distance data may increase as the distance from the reference position increases. Further, the distance data reference position is set as "0", and the farther from the reference position, the more negative the value and the larger the absolute value may be.

<Reference switch monitoring process>
Next, the reference switch monitoring process executed in step S505 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  Prior to the description of the reference switch monitoring process, the reference switch 91a will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the reference switch 91a is manually operated when the gaming machine body 12 is opened toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 and the back pack unit 15 is opened behind the gaming machine body 12 in the sound emission control device 91. It is provided at a position where it can be operated. The reference switch 91a is movable between two positions, an ON position and an OFF position.

  The reference switch 91a is operated to set a reference for determining whether to use the signal received by the image pickup device 73 of the image pickup board 71 in the signal processing circuit 75 for calculating the distance data. Is. The contents of the standard will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  As the reference of the signal strength, as shown in FIG. 17A, the first reference strength and the second reference strength are prepared in advance at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. The first reference intensity is set to have a higher reference signal intensity than the second reference intensity. When the first reference intensity is set as the reference intensity, when the maximum intensity of the received light signal is equal to or higher than the first reference intensity, the received signal is used for calculating the distance data. Further, when the second reference intensity is set as the reference intensity, the received signal is used for calculating the distance data when the maximum intensity of the received signal is equal to or higher than the second reference intensity. To do. Therefore, when a signal as shown in FIG. 17A is received, the signal is used for calculating the distance data regardless of whether the first reference intensity or the second reference intensity is set. To be done. On the other hand, when a signal as shown in FIG. 17 (b) is received, the signal is not used for calculating the distance data in the situation where the first reference intensity is set, and the second reference intensity is set. In this situation, the signal is used for calculating distance data.

  When the first reference strength is set, only the signal having a relatively large signal strength is used in the calculation of the distance data, so the influence of noise should be reduced when deriving the distance data. Is possible. On the other hand, when the second reference intensity is set, a signal having a relatively small signal intensity is also used in the calculation of the distance data. It is possible to derive the distance data even if the strength becomes low.

  The first reference intensity and the second reference intensity are related to the degree of light transmission of members such as the window panel 22 and the stage member 68 existing on the propagation path of the light emitted from the light emitting device 72, in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. Is determined by. In this case, the first reference intensity is set to be higher than the signal intensity of the reflected light reflected by the stage member 68 and the signal intensity of the reflected light reflected by the window panel 22. On the other hand, the second reference intensity is set to be higher than the signal intensity of the reflected light reflected by the window panel 22, but is higher than the signal intensity of the reflected light reflected by the stage member 68 having the function of a half mirror. Is also set so that it can have a low intensity. On the other hand, as will be described later in detail, the imaging substrate 71 performs a process for preventing the reflected light reflected by the stage member 68 from being used in the calculation of the distance data.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the general winning a prize opening 52, the special electricity winning a prize device 53, the first working opening 54, the second working opening 55 and the through gate 56 provided in the game area PA are irradiated with an illegal radio wave to make a profit. An act of trying to obtain it illegally is assumed. On the other hand, depending on the game hall, a radio wave got prevention sheet may be attached to the window panel 22 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 18A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which the radio wave got prevention sheet PS is not attached, and FIG. 18B is a case where the radio wave got prevention sheet PS is attached. It is an explanatory view for explaining the situation of.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, when the radio wave got prevention sheet PS is not attached to the window panel 22, the projected light emitted from the light emitting device 72 and the reflected light reflected by the measurement target MO are the window panel. Although reflected by 22 and the stage member 68, it is in a range that is experimentally grasped at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even if the reference intensity is set to the first reference intensity, the distance data can be derived as designed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18B, when the radio wave got prevention sheet PS is attached to the back surface of the window panel 22, the projection light emitted from the light emitting device 72 and the reflection reflected by the measurement target MO. The light is reflected not only by the window panel 22 and the stage member 68 but also by the radio wave got prevention sheet PS. In this case, the signal intensity of the reflected light reflected by the measurement target MO becomes weaker. Then, if the reference intensity is set to the first reference intensity, it may be impossible to derive the distance data as designed. On the other hand, by setting the reference intensity to the second reference intensity, which is lower than the first reference intensity, it becomes possible to derive the distance data.

  By setting the first reference intensity and the second reference intensity as described above, it is possible to derive the distance data based on the first reference intensity that is basically less susceptible to noise. When the radio wave got prevention sheet PS is used, it is possible to derive the distance data based on the second reference intensity in response to the decrease in the signal intensity of the reflected light. When the reference switch 91a is provided and the reference switch 91a is arranged in the OFF position, the first reference strength is set as the reference strength, and when the reference switch 91a is arranged in the ON position. The second reference intensity is set as the reference intensity.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the reference switch 91a is electrically connected to the sound-light side MPU 93, and when the reference switch 91a is placed in the OFF position, a LOW level reference signal is sent to the sound-light side MPU 93. When the reference switch 91a is placed in the ON position, the HI level reference signal is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. The relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. When the reference switch 91a is arranged in the OFF position, the signal corresponding to it is transmitted from the sound-light side MPU 93 to the image pickup substrate 71 to set the first reference intensity as the reference, and the reference switch 91a is in the ON position. In the case of being arranged at, the second reference intensity is set as a reference by transmitting a signal corresponding thereto from the sound-light side MPU 93 to the imaging substrate 71.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the reference switch monitoring process executed by the sound / light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S701, based on the signal received from the reference switch 91a, it is determined whether or not the reference switch 91a is arranged in the ON position. If the reference switch 91a is placed in the OFF position, the first reference signal is transmitted to the signal processing circuit 75 of the imaging substrate 71 in step S702. After that, in step S703, the reference flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 95 is cleared to "0", and then the reference switch monitoring process is ended. The reference flag is a flag for the sound-light side MPU 93 to specify whether or not the reference switch 91a is arranged in the ON position.

  On the other hand, when the reference switch 91a is arranged in the OFF position (step S701: YES), the second reference signal is transmitted to the signal processing circuit 75 in step S704. Thereafter, in step S705, the reference flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 95 is set to "1", and then the reference switch monitoring process is ended.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the flow of operation of signal processing executed by the signal processing circuit 75.

  The signal processing circuit 75 changes the receiving state of the reference signal, that is, changes from the state of receiving the first reference signal to the state of receiving the second reference signal, or receiving the second reference signal. When the state in which the first reference signal is received is changed to the state in which the first reference signal is received (step S801: YES), the state of the reference flag 75a provided in the signal processing circuit 75 is changed according to the type of the reference signal received this time. Change (step S802). Specifically, the value of the reference flag 75a is "0" when the first reference signal is being received, and the state of the reference flag 75a is "1" when the second reference signal is being received. It

  When the reflected light is received by the image pickup device 73 and the image pickup signal corresponding thereto is transmitted from the image pickup device 73 (step S803: YES), the signal processing circuit 75 calculates the distance data according to the state of the reference flag 75a. Then, the distance data of the calculation result is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93.

  Specifically, when the value of the reference flag 75a is "0" (step S804: NO), the condition is that the maximum value of the signal strength of the image pickup signal received this time is equal to or higher than the first reference strength ( (Step S805: YES), using the image pickup signal, the distance data calculation process (step S806) is executed, and the distance data as the calculation result is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 (step S807). When transmitting the distance data, address data corresponding to the pixel of the pixel array unit 73c that has received the image pickup signal of this time is additionally transmitted. As a result, the sound-light side MPU 93 writes the received distance data in the unit storage area corresponding to the address data transmitted accompanying the distance data in the distance image storage area 95a.

  When a plurality of types of image pickup signals corresponding to the first reference intensity or more are received from one pixel, the signal processing circuit 75 derives the distance data for each of the image pickup signals, and the distance data is obtained. It transmits to the sound-light side MPU 93 as distance data derived from the pixel. When receiving a plurality of distance data for one pixel, the sound-light side MPU 93 writes all the distance data in the corresponding unit storage area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the signal processing circuit 75 receives a plurality of types of image pickup signals corresponding to the first reference intensity or higher from one pixel, the signal intensity of the respective image pickup signals is the highest. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the distance data is derived with respect to a high value, and only the distance data is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 as the distance data derived from one pixel.

  On the other hand, if the value of the reference flag 75a is "1" (step S804: YES), the maximum value of the signal intensity of the image pickup signal received this time is equal to or higher than the second reference intensity (step S808: YES), the calculation processing of the distance data is executed by using the image pickup signal (step S809). After the calculation processing of the distance data is executed, the distance data of the calculation result is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 on condition that the distance data of the calculation result corresponds to the data of the reference distance or more (step S810: YES). (Step S811). When transmitting the distance data, address data corresponding to the pixel of the pixel array unit 73c that has received the image pickup signal of this time is additionally transmitted. As a result, the sound-light side MPU 93 writes the received distance data in the unit storage area corresponding to the address data transmitted accompanying the distance data in the distance image storage area 95a.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 18B, the reference distance is set as a distance farther from the imaging device 73 than the back surface 22b of the window panel 22 and closer to the imaging device 73 than the front surface 22a of the window panel 22. Has been done. The pixel array section of the image pickup device 73 is associated with the fact that the virtual reference plane corresponding to the position of the reference distance is set vertically while the image pickup surface of the image pickup device 73 faces diagonally upward. The value of the distance data corresponding to the reference distance is different for each pixel of 73c. This also applies to the recognition corresponding distance, the monitoring distance, and the reference target distance, which will be described later.

  When the reference intensity is set to the second reference intensity, it is assumed that the intensity of the reflected light reflected by the radio wave got prevention sheet PS becomes higher than the second reference intensity. Further, since the second reference intensity is lower than the first reference intensity, it is assumed that the intensity of the reflected light on the stage member 68 functioning as a half mirror will be higher than the second reference intensity. On the other hand, by setting only the distance data corresponding to the reference distance or more as the transmission target to the sound light side MPU 93, the distance data derived from each reflected light is prevented from being used by the sound light side MPU 93. It becomes possible. By the way, in a situation where the reference flag 75a is set to "1", a situation may occur in which the image pickup signal corresponding to the distance data that is equal to or larger than the reference distance from one pixel remains to be received. For the pixel, the distance data is not transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93.

  When a plurality of types of image pickup signals corresponding to the second reference intensity or more are received from one pixel, the signal processing circuit 75 derives the distance data for each of the image pickup signals, and among the distance data, All of the distance data corresponding to the reference distance or more are transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 as distance data derived from one pixel. When receiving a plurality of distance data for one pixel, the sound-light side MPU 93 writes all the distance data in the corresponding unit storage area. However, the signal processing circuit 75 is not limited to this, and when a plurality of types of image pickup signals corresponding to the second reference intensity or more are received from one pixel, the signal processing circuit 75 has the highest signal intensity among those image pickup signals. It may be configured such that distance data is derived for a high value and the distance data is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 as distance data derived from one pixel when the distance data corresponds to the reference distance or more.

  The signal processing circuit 75 receives the image pickup signals from all the pixels of the pixel array section 73c when the image pickup allowance period (for example, 5 msec) has elapsed after the projection light is emitted from the light emitting device 72, and based on the image pickup signals. When the distance data is transmitted, it is determined that the image capturing is completed (step S812: YES), and the image capturing completion signal is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93.

<Imaging control process>
Next, the imaging control process executed in step S513 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the reception standby flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 95 is set to "1". The reception standby flag is a flag for the sound-light side MPU 93 to specify whether or not it is in a state of waiting for the acquisition of the distance data after being irradiated with the projection light from the light emitting device 72.

  If "1" is not set in the reception standby flag, it is determined in step S902 whether "1" is set in any of the image pickup command flags provided in the sound-light side RAM 95. The imaging command flag is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each of cancellation monitoring processing, face authentication processing, first status monitoring processing, second status monitoring processing, and question display processing, which will be described later. This is a flag for the sound-light side MPU 93 to specify whether or not the derivation of the distance data by the imaging substrate 71 is instructed in the processing of.

  When "1" is not set in all the image pickup command flags, the main image pickup control process is ended as it is, and when "1" is set in any of the image pickup command flags, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, the irradiation instruction signal is transmitted to the control circuit 74 of the imaging substrate 71. As a result, the projection light is emitted from the light emitting device 72. In a succeeding step S904, "1" is set to the reception standby flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 95.

  Then, in step S905, it is determined whether or not the image capturing command flag that triggered the positive determination in step S902 is the image capturing command flag corresponding to the return authentication. The imaging command flag corresponding to the return authentication is a flag that is set to “1” in the return operation authentication process described later. If the image pickup command flag corresponds to the return authentication, the main image pickup control process is ended as it is. If the image capturing command flag does not correspond to the authentication at the time of return, in step S906, the image capturing command flag that triggered the positive determination in step S902 is cleared to "0", and then the main image capturing control process is ended. .. As a result, when the imaging result on the imaging substrate 71 is used as the return authentication, the imaging on the imaging substrate 71, that is, the derivation of the distance data is repeatedly executed, while the imaging result on the imaging substrate 71 is repeated. When is used for a purpose other than the return authentication, the imaging on the imaging substrate 71 is performed only once for each imaging instruction unless the imaging retry is performed.

  On the other hand, if "1" is set in the reception standby flag, it is determined in step S907 whether or not the image pickup substrate 71 has completed image pickup in response to the current image pickup command. The sound-light side MPU 93 determines that the image pickup is completed when the image pickup completion signal is received from the signal processing circuit 75. By the way, the maximum time required from the transmission of the irradiation instruction signal to the imaging substrate 71 in step S903 to the determination of imaging completion in step S907 is about 10 msec.

  If the image pickup is not completed, the main image pickup control process is ended as it is, and if the image pickup is completed, the process proceeds to step S908. In step S908, it is determined whether or not the cancel monitoring flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 95 is set to "1". The cancellation monitoring flag indicates whether the imaging instruction is performed in order to use the image for one frame in the cancellation monitoring process described later or the imaging waiting state for the imaging instruction. This is a flag for specifying by the side MPU 93. When the cancel monitoring flag is set to "1", the process of step S915 described below is executed, and then the main imaging control process ends.

  If "1" is not set in the cancellation monitoring flag, a search counter setting process is executed in step S909. Here, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 22, in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound-light side RAM 95, a large number of unit storage areas are made to correspond one-to-one to the pixels of the pixel array section 73c of the imaging substrate 71. U1 is provided, and the distance data derived from the reflected light received by the corresponding pixel is written in each unit storage area U1. By the way, the unit storage area U1 corresponding to the pixel for which the distance data has not been transmitted from the signal processing circuit 75 is set as a blank area, and the blank area is not referred to when the image is grasped by the sound light side MPU 93. The search counter is provided in the sound-light side RAM 95, and in order to specify an area of the unit storage area U1 of the distance image storage area 95a, which is an object to be determined whether or not adjustment of the distance data is necessary. Referenced by the sound-light side MPU 93. In the search counter setting process, a value corresponding to the number of unit storage areas U1 is set in the search counter.

  In a succeeding step S910, it is determined whether or not the distance data stored in the unit storage area U1 corresponding to the current value of the search counter is data corresponding to the recognition corresponding distance or more. As shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 23, the recognition corresponding distance is set as a distance farther from the image pickup device 73 than the front surface 22a of the window panel 22. When a negative determination is made in step S910, a unit storage area U1 corresponding to the current value of the search counter is set as a blank area in step S911. That is, the value of the unit storage area U1 is cleared to "0" so that the area does not hold the distance data. The unit storage area U1 set as the blank area is treated as an area in which distance data does not exist when recognizing an image of one frame in the sound-light side MPU 93.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S910, or if the processing of step S911 has been executed, then the value of the search counter of the sound-light side RAM 95 is decremented by 1 in step S912. Then, in step S913, it is determined whether or not the process of step S910 has been executed for all the unit storage areas U1 by determining whether or not the value of the search counter after subtracting 1 is “0”. judge. If a negative determination is made in step S913, it means that there is a unit storage area U1 in which the process of step S910 is to be executed. Therefore, regarding the distance data stored in the unit storage area U1 of the next order. The process of step S910 is executed. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S913, it means that the process of step S910 has been completed for all unit storage areas U1, and therefore the process proceeds to step S914.

  In step S914, it is determined whether or not the number of unit storage areas U1 in which the blank area is set in step S911 is equal to or larger than the reference number. The reference number is arbitrary as long as the image for one frame can be appropriately recognized, but it is preferable that the reference number is set as a plurality of numbers, and specifically, it is set to “50”. There is.

  When a negative determination is made in step S914, in step S915, the reception standby flag of the sound-light side RAM 95 is cleared to "0", and "1" is set to the imaging completion flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 95. After that, the main imaging control process ends. The image pickup completion flag specifies that the acquisition of the image for one frame is completed in response to the image pickup command being generated and that the image can be used in the process in which the image pickup command is generated by the sound-light side MPU 93. It is a flag for.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S914, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the value of the retry number counter provided in the sound-light side RAM 95 is the upper limit number or more. The retry number counter is a counter for the MPU 93 on the sound-light side to specify the number of times of re-imaging when the number of blank areas is equal to or larger than the reference number. The upper limit number of times is set as a plurality of times, and is specifically set to "3".

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S916, the processing of step S915 already described is executed, and then the present imaging control processing ends. If a negative determination is made in step S916, the reception standby flag of the sound-light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” and the type of the trigger that started the current imaging control process in the sound-light side RAM 95 is determined in step S917. "1" is set to the imaging command flag. After that, in step S918, the value of the retry number counter of the sound-light side RAM 95 is incremented by 1, and then the main imaging control process is ended.

  As described above, by setting the blank area for the distance data corresponding to the distance closer to the image pickup device 73 than the surface 22a of the window panel 22, as shown in FIG. 23, the image pickup device 73 and the window panel 22 are separated from each other. When the game ball B happens to be present in the meantime, it is possible to prevent the distance data derived based on the reflected light from the game ball B from being used in the monitoring process and the effect process. Therefore, only the distance data derived based on the reflected light at the measurement target MO existing at a distance farther than the surface 22a of the window panel 22 with respect to the imaging device 73 can be used in the subsequent processing. .

  When the number of unit storage areas U1 in which the blank area is set is equal to or larger than the reference number, irradiation of the projection light from the light emitting device 72 is executed again, and the image of one frame is taken again. To be done. As a result, for example, even when the game ball B flowing down the game area PA is imaged as shown in FIG. 23, one frame worth in which the game ball B does not exist by being imaged again. It is possible to create an opportunity to acquire an image. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chance of obtaining one frame of an image of only the measurement target MO existing in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the front surface 22a of the window panel 22.

  The event of re-imaging the image for one frame is performed within the upper limit number of times. This makes it possible to limit the maximum time required to complete the acquisition of the image for one frame in response to one imaging command. It should be noted that the maximum time required from when the irradiation instruction signal is transmitted to the imaging substrate 71 in step S903 to when it is determined that the imaging is completed in step S907 is about 10 msec, and the upper limit number of times of performing imaging again. Is set to three times, the maximum time required to complete the acquisition of the image for one frame for one imaging command is about 35 msec when the processing time of steps S908 to S918 is taken into consideration. ..

<Cancellation monitoring process>
Next, the cancel monitoring process executed in step S506 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the canceling monitoring process, whether or not there is a situation in which an image of one frame cannot be normally captured on the imaging substrate 71, whether or not the unauthorized jig D is inserted in the game area PA, And the process for monitoring whether or not the ball clogging has occurred in the game area PA is executed by using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71. The phenomenon to be monitored will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 24A, when the monitoring process other than the main cancellation monitoring process is executed by using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 or when the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 is used as an effect. The measurement object MO is present in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the surface 22a of the window panel 22. In this case, since the surface 22a of the window panel 22 is exposed to the player, the surface 22a may be touched by the player. Then, a dirty portion A such as a fingerprint may occur on the surface 22a. When such a dirty portion A occurs, the projection light emitted from the light emitting device 72 is reflected by the dirty portion A, and there is a possibility that the imaging of the measurement target MO cannot be performed normally. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), it is assumed that an illegal jig D is inserted into the game area PA to perform an illegal profit. In addition to these events, in the pachinko machine 10, there is a possibility that ball clogging may occur in the game area PA, in which case a large number of game balls will be stopped in the game area PA. On the other hand, in the cancellation monitoring process, occurrence of an event to be monitored for cancellation such as occurrence of a dirty portion A, insertion of an illegal jig D into the game area PA, or ball clogging in the game area PA. If specified, the corresponding process is executed.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the cancellation monitoring process.

  First, in step S1001, by checking the states of various flags of the sound-light side RAM 95, it is determined whether or not a priority event has occurred. The priority event is a situation in which an image capturing command is generated on the image capturing board 71 in order to use an image for one frame for rendering and an image capturing board 71 for using an image for one frame in return authentication described later. This is a situation in which an imaging command is issued.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1001, the cancel monitoring flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 95 is cleared to "0" in step S1002, and then this cancel monitoring process is terminated. The cancellation monitoring flag is a flag for the sound-light side MPU 93 to specify that the imaging substrate 71 is capturing an image of one frame in order to perform the cancellation monitoring. Then, as described above, the cancel monitoring flag is forcibly cleared to "0" during the occurrence of the priority event, so that the use of the image for one frame is performed on the priority event side rather than the cancel monitoring. It becomes possible to prioritize the use.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined in step S1003 whether "1" is set in the cancel monitoring flag of the sound-light side RAM 95. If "1" is not set in the canceling monitoring flag, it is determined in step S1004 whether "1" is set in another monitoring flag in the sound-light side RAM 95. The other monitoring flag corresponds to one frame for the imaging substrate 71 in any of the face authentication process (step S507), the first situation monitoring process (step S508) and the second situation monitoring process (step S509). Is a flag that is set to "1" when an image pickup command for the image is issued. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1004, this cancellation monitoring process is terminated, and if a negative decision is made in step S1004, the operation proceeds to step S1005.

  In step S1005, it is determined whether the standby time for monitoring for cancellation has elapsed. The standby time of the cancel monitoring is set to 200 msec, and the execution of the cancel monitoring is completed for the image of one frame acquired for the image capturing command in the cancel monitoring process. Waiting time measurement starts. Note that the standby time measurement is started immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  If the standby time for the cancellation monitoring has not elapsed, this cancellation monitoring process is ended as it is, and if the standby time for the cancellation monitoring has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1006. In step S1006, "1" is set to the imaging command flag corresponding to the monitoring for cancellation in the sound-light side RAM 95, and "1" is set to the cancellation monitoring flag in the sound-light side RAM 95. Then, the monitoring process for cancellation is ended. As described above by setting "1" in the imaging command flag, the irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and the imaging substrate 71 starts imaging. .

  By setting the cancel monitoring flag to "1", an affirmative decision is made in step S1003 and the operation proceeds to step S1007. In step S1007, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the image capturing completion flag of the sound-light side RAM 95. That is, it is determined whether or not the image pickup for one frame for monitoring for cancellation has been completed. When a negative determination is made in step S1007, the monitoring process for cancellation is ended as it is, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, the process proceeds to step S1008.

  In step S1008, the cancel monitoring flag and the image capturing completion flag in the sound-light side RAM 95 are cleared to "0". In a succeeding step S1009, it is determined whether or not the unit storage areas U1 in which the distance data equal to or less than the monitoring distance is stored in the distance image storage area 95a are integrated into a predetermined range.

  As shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, the monitoring distance is set as a distance from the position in front of the pachinko machine 10 about 1 cm from the front surface 22a of the window panel 22 to the imaging device 73. Distance data derived based on the reflected light reflected by the dirty portion A on the window panel 22, distance data derived based on the reflected light reflected by the fraudulent jig D inserted in the game area PA, and the game. The distance data derived based on the game ball causing the ball clogging in the area PA corresponds to the data equal to or less than the monitoring distance.

  When the dirty portion A is generated, when the illegal jig D is present, or when the ball is clogged, the pixel array unit 73c of the image pickup device 73 has a predetermined range adjacent to the vertical and horizontal directions. The pixel will receive the reflected light reflected by the dirty portion A, the illegal jig D, or the game ball. Then, as indicated by the blackened area in the explanatory view of FIG. 26A, distance data equal to or less than the monitoring distance is stored in a plurality of unit storage areas U1 existing in a predetermined range in the distance image storage area 95a. The Rukoto. In this case, it is considered that there is a high possibility that the dirty portion A, the tampering jig D, or the ball clogging ball exists.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1009, then in step S1016, each distance data currently stored in the distance image storage area 95a is overwritten in the history data storage area 95b provided in the sound-light side RAM 95, and then this cancellation is performed. Monitoring processing is terminated. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 26B, the history data storage area 95b has the same number of unit storage areas U2 as the distance image storage area 95a, and the data stored in the distance image storage area 95a. It is possible to save as it is.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1009, then in step S1010 the unit storage of the distance image storage area 95a corresponding to the unit storage area U2 of the history data storage area 95b in which the distance data for monitoring distance or less is stored. It is determined whether or not the same or substantially the same distance data as the distance data exists in the area U1. That is, it is determined whether or not the data range of the distance data that is equal to or less than the monitoring distance in the history data exists in the image data of one frame acquired this time. As a result, a positive determination is made in step S1010 even if the history data and the image data for one frame do not completely match, and the data range where the distance data is equal to or greater than the monitoring distance is the history. Even when the data of the one-frame image acquired this time is wider than the data, an affirmative determination is made in step S1010.

  Note that instead of the configuration for determining whether or not the same or substantially the same distance data exists, the history corresponding to the unit storage area U1 of the distance image storage area 95a in which the distance data equal to or less than the monitoring distance is stored. It may be configured to determine whether or not distance data corresponding to the monitoring distance or less is stored in the unit storage area U2 of the data storage area 95b.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1010, the history data update processing is executed in step S1016, and then the main monitoring processing for cancellation is ended. When a positive determination is made in step S1010, the value of the coincidence counter provided in the sound-light side RAM 95 is incremented by 1 in step S1011. The coincidence counter has the same or substantially the same distance as the distance data in the unit storage area U2 of the history data storage area 95b corresponding to the unit storage area U1 of the distance image storage area 95a in which the distance data less than the monitoring distance is stored. This counter is used by the sound-light side MPU 93 to specify the number of times the presence of data has been confirmed. The match counter is cleared to "0" when a negative determination is made in step S1010 or when a positive determination is made in step S1012.

  After that, in step S1012, it is determined whether the value of the coincidence counter is equal to or larger than the abnormal reference value. The abnormality reference value is set as a value of 2 or more, and is specifically set to "20". Here, as described above, the standby time for monitoring for cancellation is set to 200 msec. Therefore, in step S1012, the situation in which distance data equal to or less than the monitoring distance is acquired by the same pixel continues for 4 seconds or more. It is determined whether or not it is. The abnormal reference period is set as a period longer than the longest period expected to remain at a predetermined place when the game ball flows down in the game area PA in a situation where the ball does not get clogged.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1012, the history data update processing is executed in step S1016, and then the main monitoring processing for cancellation is ended. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1012, "1" is set in the regulation flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 95 in step S1013.

  The restriction flag is a flag for the sound-light side MPU 93 to specify whether or not the image pickup result on the image pickup board 71 is used in the face authentication process, the first situation monitoring process, and the second situation monitoring process, which will be described later. is there. When the restriction flag is set to "1", the sound-light side MPU 93 performs the face authentication process, the first situation monitoring process, and the second situation monitoring process, which will be described later, on the imaging result on the imaging substrate 71. Do not use. As a result, in a situation where the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 cannot be normally used due to the occurrence of the dirty portion A, various monitoring processes using the imaging result can be prevented from being executed.

  In a succeeding step S1014, a process of reading abnormality notification data is executed. In the reading process, the light emission data and the sound output data for executing the abnormality notification corresponding to the result of the monitoring process for cancellation in the display light emitting unit 23 and the speaker unit 24 are read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95. As a result, the display light emitting unit 23 and the speaker unit 24 notify the abnormality corresponding to the result of the monitoring process for cancellation. In step S1015, the abnormality notification command is transmitted to the display control device 96. By receiving the abnormality notification command, the display control device 96 controls the display of the symbol display device 61 so that the abnormality notification corresponding to the result of the monitoring process for cancellation is executed. By executing various abnormality notifications as described above, it is possible for not only the game hall manager but also the player to clearly recognize that the event to be monitored in the cancellation monitoring process has occurred. Become. After the process of step S1015 is executed, the history data update process is executed in step S1016, and then the main monitoring process for cancellation is ended.

  The state in which the restriction flag is set to "1" and the state in which the abnormality notification is being executed are canceled by turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10, and then when the power is turned on. The restriction flag is "0" and the abnormality notification is not restarted.

  A state in which the abnormality notification is executed based on the cancel monitoring process will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 27. It should be noted that the case where the dirty portion A is generated on the front surface 22a of the window panel 22 will be described as an example, but the same applies when the unauthorized jig D is present or when the ball is clogged.

  27A shows a period in which the dirty portion A is generated, FIG. 27B shows a period in which it is specified that the cancellation monitoring target is generated, and FIG. 27C is an abnormality notification. Indicates the execution period of. A case where the cancellation monitoring process is executed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, a dirty portion A is generated on the surface 22a of the window panel 22 at the timing of t1. After that, when the standby time for monitoring for cancellation elapses at the timing of t2, it is specified that the monitoring target for cancellation is generated as shown in FIG. 27 (b). Then, at the timing of t3, the period in which it is continuously specified that the cancel monitoring target is occurring becomes the abnormal reference period T1 or more, so that the abnormality notification is started as shown in FIG. 27 (c). It After that, at the timing of t4, the dirty portion A is removed from the surface 22a of the window panel 22, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again, whereby the abnormality notification is ended.

  As described above, when the cancel monitoring target is generated, the abnormality notification is executed, and thus it is possible to urge the game hall manager to cope with the occurrence of the cancel monitoring target event. . For example, if there is a dirty portion A on the front surface 22a of the window panel 22, it may not be possible to accurately identify the presence or absence of the player's effect operation. It is possible to urge the manager of the game hall to remove the dirty portion A. Further, for example, when the fraudulent jig D is inserted in the game area PA, the abnormality notification is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the fraudulent activity from continuing any further. Further, for example, when the ball clogging occurs in the game area PA, the abnormality notification is executed, so that it is possible to urge the manager of the game hall to eliminate the ball clogging.

  In addition, the monitoring distance is set as the distance from the position in front of the pachinko machine 10 to the imaging device 73 by about 1 cm from the surface 22a of the window panel 22, and when the distance data is equal to or less than the monitoring distance, the cancel monitoring target is set. With the configuration in which the occurrence is identified, it is possible to collectively monitor a plurality of types of cancellation monitoring targets by a certain process.

  In addition, when the unit monitoring area U1 storing the distance data equal to or less than the monitoring distance is aggregated and present in a predetermined range, it is determined that the cancellation monitoring target is generated, for example, It is possible to prevent the abnormality notification from being executed even when a minute stain is generated on the surface 22a of the window panel 22.

<Process for face authentication>
Next, the face authentication process executed in step S497 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the face authentication process, when the return button 28 of the ball lending operation device 26 is operated and the storage medium is returned from the ball lending device Y, the face of the player who has performed the operation is imaged and the imaging result is displayed. When the collation result between the image and the image of the player's face captured in advance does not match, the abnormality is notified. Thereby, when the act of illegally acquiring the storage medium is performed, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize it and deal with it.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the face authentication processing.

  First, in step S1101, it is determined whether the post-return operation flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 95 is set to "1". Here, when the payout control device 111 operates the return button 28 of the ball lending operation device 26 while the information corresponding to the number of usable game balls is stored in the ball lending device Y or the storage medium, A return instruction signal indicating that the storage medium storing the information should be ejected is transmitted to the ball lending device Y. Further, when the payout control device 111 transmits the return instruction signal to the ball lending device Y, the payout control device 111 transmits a return instruction generation command to the main MPU 83. When the main-side MPU 83 receives the return instruction generation command, the main-side MPU 83 transmits a return operation generation command corresponding to the sound-light side MPU 93. When receiving the return operation generation command, the sound-light side MPU 93 sets "1" in the post-return operation flag.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1101, that is, if the return operation has not been performed, then in step S1102, by checking the states of various flags of the sound-light side RAM 95, whether or not a priority event has occurred. Determine whether. The content of the priority event is the same as that of step S1001 in the monitoring process for cancellation (FIG. 25).

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1102, in step S1103 the face authentication monitoring flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 95 is cleared to "0", and then this face authentication processing is ended. The face authentication monitoring flag is used to capture an image of one frame on the imaging substrate 71 in order to acquire the image of the player's face when the information for enabling the lending of the game ball is newly added. This is a flag for the MPU 93 on the sound-light side to specify that the situation is that. Then, in the situation where the priority event occurs as described above, the face authentication monitoring flag is forcibly cleared to "0". It is possible to prioritize the use on the priority event side rather than the priority event side.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1102, it is determined in step S1104 whether "1" is set in the face authentication monitoring flag of the sound-light side RAM 95. When the face authentication monitoring flag is not set to "1", it is determined in step S1105 whether the regulation flag of the sound-light side RAM 95 is set to "1".

  When the restriction flag is set to "1", the face authentication processing is ended as it is. As described above, the restriction flag is set to "1" when it is specified in the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25) that the cancellation monitoring target is generated. Then, the situation in which the restriction flag is set to "1" may be a situation in which the image pickup substrate 71 cannot normally take an image of one frame. In this case, by making a positive determination in step S1105 and terminating the face authentication as it is, it is possible to prevent an image of the player's face from being acquired in a situation in which imaging cannot be performed normally. Become.

  If "1" is not set in the restriction flag, it is determined in step S1106 whether or not "1" is set in another monitoring flag of the sound-light side RAM 95. The other monitoring flag corresponds to one frame for the imaging substrate 71 in any of the canceling monitoring process (step S506), the first status monitoring process (step S508) and the second status monitoring process (step S509). Is a flag that is set to "1" when an image pickup command for the image is issued. When the affirmative judgment is made in step S1106, the face authentication processing is ended as it is, and when the negative judgment is made in step S1106, the process proceeds to step S1107.

  In step S1107, it is determined whether or not the face authentication request flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 95 is set to "1". Here, the payout control device 111 newly adds information corresponding to the number of game balls that can be used in the ball lending device Y or the storage medium as a result of inserting a bill into the ball lending device Y or inserting a storage medium. When set or increased, a lending information addition command is transmitted to the main MPU 83. When the main-side MPU 83 receives the lending-information addition command, the main-side MPU 83 transmits a lending-information addition command corresponding thereto to the sound-light side MPU 93. When receiving the lending information addition command, the sound-light side MPU 93 sets “1” in the face authentication request flag. When a negative determination is made in step S1107, the face authentication processing is ended as it is, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S1107, the process proceeds to step S1108.

  In step S1108, it is determined whether or not the standby time for face authentication monitoring has elapsed. The standby time for face authentication monitoring is set as a standby time different from the standby time for cancellation monitoring and the standby time for height position monitoring, and is specifically set to 300 msec. The measurement of the waiting time is started when the face authentication monitoring is completed for the image of one frame acquired in response to the image capturing command in the face authentication processing. Note that the standby time measurement is started immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  If the standby time for face authentication monitoring has not elapsed, the processing for face authentication is directly terminated, and if the standby time for face authentication monitoring has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1109, the imaging command flag corresponding to the face authentication monitoring in the sound-light side RAM 95 is set to "1", and the face authentication monitoring flag of the sound-light side RAM 95 is set to "1". After that, the face authentication processing ends. By setting "1" in the imaging command flag, as described above, the irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started on the imaging substrate 71. It

  When the face authentication monitoring flag is set to "1", an affirmative decision is made in step S1104 and the operation proceeds to step S1110. In step S1110, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound-light side RAM 95. That is, it is determined whether or not the image pickup for one frame for preliminarily acquiring the face image has been completed. When a negative determination is made in step S1110, the face authentication process is ended as it is, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S1110, the process proceeds to step S1111.

  In step S1111, the face authentication monitoring flag and the image capturing completion flag of the sound-light side RAM 95 are cleared to "0". In the following step S1112, face data extraction processing is executed. In the face data extraction processing, the image data for one frame is grasped based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound-light side RAM 95, and the human face is included in the grasped image data. It is determined whether or not image data corresponding to the portion exists. In the determination, a range corresponding to the contour portion of the face corresponding to an elliptical shape, a circular shape, an elliptical shape, or the like is extracted, and a range corresponding to the eyes, nose, mouth, or ears exists in the extracted range. In this case, the extracted range is recognized as a face.

  Then, in step S1113, it is determined whether the face data extraction is completed. If the face data extraction has not been completed, the face authentication processing is ended as it is. If the face data extraction is completed, the extracted face data is stored in the advance data storage area 95c provided in the sound-light side RAM 95 in step S1114. After that, in step S1115, the face authentication request flag of the sound-light side RAM 95 is cleared to "0", and then the face authentication processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1101 that the return operation is performed, the authentication processing for the return operation is executed in step S1116, and then the face authentication processing is ended. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an authentication process at the time of the return operation.

  In step S1201, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the return-time authentication monitoring flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 95. The return-time authentication monitoring flag indicates that the image capturing board 71 is capturing an image of one frame in order to capture the image of the player's face when the return operation is performed. This is a flag for specifying by the light side MPU 93. When a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1202 whether "1" is set in the regulation flag of the sound-light side RAM 95.

  When the restriction flag is set to "1", the post-return operation flag is cleared to "0" in step S1203, and then the main authentication process ends. As described above, the restriction flag is set to "1" when it is specified in the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25) that the cancellation monitoring target is generated. Then, the situation in which the restriction flag is set to "1" may be a situation in which the image pickup substrate 71 cannot normally take an image of one frame. In this case, by clearing the post-return operation flag to "0" without performing face authentication, it is possible to prevent the face authentication of the player from being performed in a situation where imaging cannot be performed normally. ..

  When the restriction flag is not set to "1", in step S1204, when the image pickup command flag corresponding to the return authentication in the sound-light side RAM 95 is set to "1" and the sound-light side RAM 95 is returned. After setting the authentication monitoring flag to "1", the present authentication processing is terminated. By setting "1" in the imaging command flag, as described above, the irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started on the imaging substrate 71. It

  Here, in the authentication process, before the setting of “1” to the corresponding image capturing command flag and the corresponding monitor flag as in the face authentication process (FIG. 28), “1” is set to the other monitor flags. Whether or not it is set and the elapse of the waiting time are not judged. Accordingly, when the return operation is performed, it is possible to start the acquisition of the face authentication image at an early stage.

  When the return-time authentication monitoring flag is set to "1", an affirmative decision is made in step S1201 and the operation proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, it is determined whether "1" is set in the image capturing completion flag of the sound-light side RAM 95. That is, it is determined whether or not one frame of image for face recognition has been captured. If a negative determination is made in step S1205, the main authentication process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1205, the process proceeds to step S1206.

  In step S1206, the image capturing completion flag of the sound-light side RAM 95 is cleared to "0". In the following step S1207, face data extraction processing is executed. The processing content of the extraction process is the same as the extraction process of step S1112 in the face authentication process (FIG. 31).

  After that, in step S1208, it is determined whether the face data extraction is completed. If the face data extraction has not been completed, the main authentication process is terminated. If the face data extraction is completed, the extracted face data is stored in the collation data storage area 95d provided in the sound-light side RAM 95 in step S1209.

  In a succeeding step S1210, all of the corresponding image capturing command flag, return operation post-return flag and return authentication monitoring flag in the sound-light side RAM 95 are cleared to "0". Here, when "1" is set to the imaging command flag in the authentication process at the time of the return operation, the imaging command flag is not cleared to "0" only when the imaging on the imaging substrate 71 is completed. When face data is stored in the collation data storage area 95d, "0" is cleared. As a result, the imaging is repeated on the imaging substrate 71 until the face data for verification is acquired, and the face data for verification can be reliably acquired. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when face data cannot be extracted before the face authentication monitoring period elapses after the corresponding imaging command flag is set to "1" in step S1204, As in step S1210, various flags may be cleared to "0" and the warning process may be executed in step S1213 described later.

  After that, in step S1211, the face data stored in the advance data storage area 95c of the sound-light side RAM 95 is compared with the face data stored in the comparison data storage area 95d of the sound-light side RAM 95. In this case, the jaw line is extracted from each face data, and the relative position of the eye, nose, mouth or ear with respect to the jaw line and the outer edge shape of the eye, nose, mouth or ear are 90% or more in both face data. If so, it is determined that the two face data match each other. Note that any specific method of authenticating the face data can be used as long as the face data can be authenticated.

  In a succeeding step S1212, it is determined whether or not the result of the collation processing in step S1211 is a match result. If face data is not stored in the pre-data storage area 95c, it is treated that the face data does not match. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S1212, the main authentication processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1212, the warning light emission data is read from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95 in step S1213, and then the main authentication processing is ended.

  By reading the light emission data for alarm, the light emission control process (step S503) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) refers to the light emission data for alarm, and the face authentication cannot be normally performed. The display light emitting section 23 emits light. This makes it possible to urge the manager of the game hall to confirm whether or not the storage medium has been returned to the legitimate player. For example, in a game hall in which a surveillance camera is installed in an island facility unit in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed, it is possible to determine whether or not an illegal acquisition operation of a storage medium is performed by referring to the shooting result of the surveillance camera. It becomes possible to specify.

  If the face data does not match, an alarm is issued using the display light emitting unit 23, and the process for stopping the progress of the game is not executed. The alarm is not issued by the speaker unit 24 and the symbol display device 61. As a result, even if the face data is not collated accurately, it is possible to prevent the regular player from being disadvantaged or uncomfortable.

  Next, how the face authentication is performed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG.

  FIG. 30 (a) shows the timing of adding lendable information, FIG. 30 (b) shows the execution period of the face data storage processing in the advance data storage area 95c, and FIG. 30 (c) shows the advance data storage area 95c. The period during which the face data has been stored is shown in FIG. 30, FIG. 30 (d) shows the execution timing of the return operation, and FIG. 30 (e) shows the completion of the return of the storage medium after the process for returning the storage medium is started. 30 (f) shows the period until the storage process of the face data in the collation data storage area 95d and the authentication process using the face data is performed, and FIG. 30 (g) shows the alarm execution. It indicates the period of time.

  By inserting a bill or a storage medium into the ball lending device Y at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 30A, information corresponding to the number of usable game balls is newly added. Then, in order to obtain the face data in advance, the process for pre-storing the face data is executed as shown in FIG. 30 (b), and at the timing of t2, the pre-data storage area as shown in FIG. 30 (c). The face data is stored in 95c. It should be noted that each time information corresponding to the number of usable game balls is newly added, face data is newly stored in the pre-data storage area 95c.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the return operation is performed as shown in FIG. Then, the return of the storage medium is started as shown in FIG. 30 (e), and the face authentication process is started as shown in FIG. 30 (f). After that, at the timing of t4, which is the timing before the timing of t5, which is the timing at which the return operation is completed, the face data is completely stored in the matching data storage area 95d and is stored in the preliminary data storage area 95c. The matching between the current face data and the face data stored in the matching data storage area 95d is completed. In this case, since both face data match, no alarm is issued as shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the face authentication process for the return operation performed at the timing of t6, both face data do not match. In this case, at the timing of t7, which is the timing before the timing of completion of the return of the storage medium, the alarm is issued as shown in FIG. 30 (g), and the manager of the game hall is cautioned. It becomes possible.

<First status monitoring process>
Next, the first status monitoring process executed in step S508 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the first situation monitoring process, when it is grasped based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 that a person may be seated in the chair provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 without playing a game. The first confirmation notification is performed. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize that the event is occurring, and to deal with it.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first situation monitoring process.

  First, in step S1301, by checking the states of various flags in the sound-light side RAM 95, it is determined whether or not a priority event has occurred. The priority event is a situation in which an imaging command is issued to the imaging substrate 71 in order to use an image for one frame in return authentication.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1301, in step S1303 the first situation monitoring flag and the seated counter provided in the sound-light side RAM 95 are cleared to "0", and then the first situation monitoring process is executed. finish. The first situation monitoring flag is a flag for the sound-light side MPU 93 to specify that the imaging substrate 71 is in the situation of capturing an image of one frame in order to monitor the first situation. .. When the priority event as described above occurs, the first status monitoring flag is forcibly cleared to "0", so that the use of the image for one frame has priority over the first status monitoring. It becomes possible to prioritize the use on the event side. In addition, the seated counter counts the number of times that it is specified based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 that a person is seated in the chair provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 in the state where the game is not executed. This is a counter for the side MPU 93 to grasp.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1301, it is determined in step S1302 whether or not the game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a firing operation is performed. If a shooting operation is performed, it is determined that the game is being executed, and an affirmative decision is made in step S1302.

  Further, when the firing operation is not performed, it is determined whether or not the effect for game use is being executed and the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. This determination is made by referring to the contents of the effect data table read out to the sound-light side RAM 95. That is, it is determined whether or not the data table corresponding to the effect for game play or the data table corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is read to the sound-light side RAM 95. If it is one of the execution of the game turning effect and the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined that the game is being executed, and an affirmative determination is made in step S1302.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, in step S1303, the first situation monitoring flag of the sound-light side RAM 95 is cleared to "0", and then the first situation monitoring process is ended. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first situation monitoring from being executed while the game is being executed.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1302, it is determined in step S1304 whether "1" is set in the first situation monitoring flag of the sound-light side RAM 95. If "1" is not set in the first situation monitoring flag, it is determined in step S1305 whether "1" is set in the restriction flag of the sound-light side RAM 95.

  If the regulation flag is set to "1", the first situation monitoring process is terminated. As described above, the restriction flag is set to "1" when it is specified in the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25) that the cancellation monitoring target is generated. Then, the situation in which the restriction flag is set to "1" may be a situation in which the image pickup substrate 71 cannot normally take an image of one frame. In this case, by making a positive determination in step S1305 and terminating the first situation monitoring process as it is, it is possible to prevent the first situation monitoring from being executed in a situation where imaging cannot be performed normally. Becomes

  If "1" is not set in the regulation flag, it is determined in step S1306 whether or not "1" is set in another monitoring flag of the sound-light side RAM 95. The other monitoring flag corresponds to one frame for the imaging substrate 71 in any of the canceling monitoring process (step S506), the face authentication process (step S507), and the second situation monitoring process (step S509). This is a flag that is set to "1" when an image capturing command is issued. When the affirmative judgment is made in Step S1306, the first situation monitoring process is finished as it is, and when the negative judgment is made in Step S1306, the process proceeds to Step S1307.

  In step S1307, the waiting time of the first situation monitoring elapses in the state where the game is not executed, that is, the game ball firing operation is not performed and the game turn effect and the opening / closing execution mode are not executed. It is determined whether or not. The standby time of the first situation monitoring is set as a standby time different from the standby time of the monitoring for cancellation and the standby time of the monitoring for face authentication, and is specifically set to 5 sec. When the execution of the first situation monitoring is completed for the image of one frame acquired based on the image capturing command in the first situation monitoring processing, or when the game is not executed, the standby Time measurement starts. Note that the standby time measurement is started immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  If the standby time for the first status monitoring has not elapsed, the first status monitoring process is ended as it is, and if the standby time for the first status monitoring has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, the imaging command flag corresponding to the first situation monitoring in the sound-light side RAM 95 is set to "1", and the first situation monitoring flag in the sound-light side RAM 95 is set to "1". Then, this 1st situation monitoring process is complete | finished. By setting "1" in the imaging command flag, as described above, the irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started on the imaging substrate 71. It

  By setting the first situation monitoring flag to "1", an affirmative decision is made in step S1304 and the operation proceeds to step S1309. In step S1309, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound-light side RAM 95. That is, it is determined whether or not one frame of image for performing the first situation monitoring has been captured. When a negative determination is made in step S1309, the first situation monitoring process is ended as it is, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S1309, the process proceeds to step S1310.

  In step S1310, the first situation monitoring flag and the imaging completion flag of the sound-light side RAM 95 are cleared to "0". In a succeeding step S1311, it is determined whether or not seating on a chair provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 occurs while the game is not being executed. Specifically, the image data for one frame is grasped based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound-light-side RAM 95, and a seat in the front chair is seated in the grasped image data. It is determined whether or not there is image data corresponding to the person. In the determination, a process similar to the face data extraction process (step S1112) in the face authentication process (FIG. 28) is executed to determine whether or not the face data can be extracted to determine whether or not the user is seated. Alternatively, the presence or absence of a seat may be determined based on whether or not shoulder data can be extracted. When a negative determination is made in step S1311, the first situation monitoring process is ended as it is, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S1311, the process proceeds to step S1312.

  In step S1312, 1 is added to the value of the seated counter of the sound-light side RAM 95. In a succeeding step S1313, it is determined whether or not the value of the seated counter is equal to or larger than the notification reference value. Although a specific value of the notification reference value is arbitrary, it is set to "10" in the pachinko machine 10. Then, as described above, since the standby time of the first situation monitoring is set to 5 sec, it is determined in step S1313 whether the period of sitting without playing a game has continued for 50 sec or more. It will be.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1313, the first situation monitoring process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S1313, in step S1314, the first confirmation notification light emission data is read from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95, and then the first situation monitoring process is ended. .. If a positive determination is made in step S1313, the seated counter is cleared to "0".

  By reading the first confirmation notification light emission data, the first confirmation notification light emission data is referred to in the light emission control process (step S493) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), and the game is performed in the display light emitting unit 23. Light is emitted in a manner indicating that there is a possibility that a seated person may exist even if there is not.

  Next, how the first situation monitoring is performed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 32A shows a period in which a person is seated in a chair provided in front of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 32B shows a period in which a game is being played on the pachinko machine 10. 32C shows the start timing of the first confirmation notification, and FIG. 32D shows the execution period of the first confirmation notification.

  The game ends as shown in FIG. 32 (b) at the timing of t1, and the player leaves the seat as shown in FIG. 32 (a) at the timing of t2. Thereafter, at the timing of t3, a new person sits in front of the pachinko machine 10 as shown in FIG. However, the person remains seated without playing a game on the pachinko machine 10. Then, at the timing of t4, the execution start period of the first confirmation notification elapses without playing the game as shown in FIG. 32 (c), so that the first confirmation notification is started as shown in FIG. 32 (d). To be done. The first confirmation notification is released by turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10, and the first confirmation notification is released by simply turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 without the need to clear the main RAM 85. It becomes possible to restart the game in the state of being.

  As described above, when the state of sitting in front of the pachinko machine 10 is continued without playing the game, the first confirmation notification is given. This makes it possible to urge the manager of the gaming hall to confirm whether or not the person should be left. If there is a person who is seated without playing a game, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 will be reduced, and this is an unfavorable event for the gaming hall, and such an event has occurred. In some cases, it is preferable to encourage leaving.

  Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1313, the notification is performed using the display light emitting unit 23, and the notification is not performed by the speaker unit 24 and the symbol display device 61. This makes it possible to prevent the regular player from feeling uncomfortable when the regular player is only taking a break between games.

<Second status monitoring process>
Next, the second status monitoring process executed in step S509 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the second situation monitoring process, the second confirmation notification is given when an operation that may cause a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 10 is grasped based on the imaging result of the imaging board 71. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize that the event is occurring, and to deal with it.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the second situation monitoring process.

  First, in step S1401, by checking the states of various flags of the sound-light side RAM 95, it is determined whether or not a priority event has occurred. The content of the priority event is the same as that of step S1001 in the monitoring process for cancellation (FIG. 25).

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1401, in step S1402 the second situation monitoring process is executed after the second situation monitoring flag and operation abnormality counter provided in the sound-light side RAM 95 are cleared to "0". finish. The second situation monitoring flag is a flag for the sound-light side MPU 93 to specify that the image pickup substrate 71 is taking an image of one frame in order to perform the second situation monitoring. .. When the priority event as described above occurs, the second status monitoring flag is forcibly cleared to "0", so that the use of the image for one frame has priority over the second status monitoring. It becomes possible to prioritize the use on the event side. In addition, the operation abnormality counter is a counter for the sound-light side MPU 93 to grasp the number of times that an operation that may be fraudulently performed on the pachinko machine 10 is identified based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71. is there.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1401, it is determined in step S1403 whether "1" is set in the second situation monitoring flag of the sound-light side RAM 95. When "1" is not set in the second situation monitoring flag, it is determined in step S1404 whether "1" is set in the regulation flag of the sound-light side RAM 95.

  When the restriction flag is set to "1", the second situation monitoring process is finished as it is. As described above, the restriction flag is set to "1" when it is specified in the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25) that the cancellation monitoring target is generated. Then, the situation in which the restriction flag is set to "1" may be a situation in which the image pickup substrate 71 cannot normally take an image of one frame. In this case, by making a positive determination in step S1404 and terminating the second situation monitoring process as it is, it is possible to prevent the second situation monitoring from being executed in a situation where imaging cannot be performed normally. Becomes

  If "1" is not set in the restriction flag, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not "1" is set in another monitoring flag of the sound-light side RAM 95. The other monitoring flag corresponds to one frame for the imaging substrate 71 by any of the canceling monitoring process (step S506), the face authentication process (step S507), and the first situation monitoring process (step S508). This is a flag that is set to "1" when an image capturing command is issued. When the affirmative judgment is made in Step S1405, the second situation monitoring process is finished as it is, and when the negative judgment is made in Step S1405, the process proceeds to Step S1406.

  In step S1406, it is determined whether the standby time for the second status monitoring has elapsed. The standby time of the second situation monitoring is set as a standby time different from the standby time of the cancel monitoring, the standby time of the face authentication monitoring, and the standby time of the first situation monitoring, and is specifically set to 3 seconds. ing. The measurement of the waiting time is started when the execution of the second situation monitoring is completed for the image of one frame acquired in response to the image capturing command in the second situation monitoring processing. Note that the standby time measurement is started immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  If the standby time for the second status monitoring has not elapsed, the second status monitoring process is ended as it is, and if the standby time for the second status monitoring has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1407. In step S1407, the imaging command flag corresponding to the second situation monitoring in the sound-light side RAM 95 is set to "1", and the second situation monitoring flag in the sound-light side RAM 95 is set to "1". Then, this 2nd situation monitoring process is complete | finished. By setting "1" in the imaging command flag, as described above, the irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started on the imaging substrate 71. It

  When the second situation monitoring flag is set to "1", an affirmative decision is made in step S1403 and the operation proceeds to step S1408. In step S1408, it is determined whether the image capturing completion flag of the sound-light side RAM 95 is set to "1". That is, it is determined whether or not the image pickup for one frame for performing the second situation monitoring is completed. When a negative determination is made in step S1408, the second situation monitoring process is ended as it is, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S1408, the process proceeds to step S1409. In step S1409, the second situation monitoring flag and the image capturing completion flag of the sound-light side RAM 95 are cleared to "0".

  In a succeeding step S1410, operation data extraction processing is executed. In the operation data extraction process, the image data for one frame is grasped based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound-light side RAM 95, and the grasped image data is displayed in front of the pachinko machine 10. The data of the arm of a person sitting in the provided chair is extracted. In the extraction, the position of the shoulder is grasped based on the recognition of the outer edge shapes of the neck and shoulder in relation to the distance data, and the arm portions extending from the shoulder portion to both sides are grasped from the distance data and the outer edge shape. .. Then, the positional relationship between the grasped arm portion and the window panel 22 is grasped.

  After that, in step S1411, it is determined whether the operation data grasped in step S1410 corresponds to the abnormality correspondence data of the sound-light side ROM 94. Specifically, the hand of a person seated in front of the pachinko machine 10 is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 rather than the shoulder portion and outside the left edge, right edge and upper edge of the window panel 22. The operation performed is stored in advance in the sound-light side ROM 94 as abnormality correspondence data. When a regular player plays a game, it is difficult to continuously perform the above operation. When the negative determination is made in step S1411, the second situation monitoring process is ended as it is, and when the positive determination is made in step S1411, the process proceeds to step S1412.

  In step S1412, the value of the operation abnormality counter of the sound-light side RAM 95 is incremented by 1. In a succeeding step S1413, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation abnormality counter is equal to or larger than the operation abnormality reference value. Although the specific value of the operation abnormality reference value is arbitrary, it is set to "40" in the pachinko machine 10. Then, as described above, since the standby time of the second situation monitoring is set to 3 sec, it is determined in step S1413 whether or not the operation corresponding to the operation abnormality correspondence data has continued for 120 seconds or more. It will be.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1413, this second situation monitoring process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S1413, then in step S1414 the second confirmation notification light emission data is read from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95, and then this second situation monitoring process is ended. .. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1413, the operation abnormality counter is cleared to "0".

  When the second confirmation notification light emission data is read, the second confirmation notification light emission data is referred to in the light emission control process (step S493) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). The light emission is performed in a mode indicating that the operation corresponding to the abnormality handling data is continuously performed. As a result, it becomes possible to urge the manager of the gaming hall to confirm whether or not an illegal act is being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1413, the notification is performed using the display light emitting unit 23, and the notification is not performed by the speaker unit 24 and the symbol display device 61. This makes it possible to prevent the regular player from causing discomfort to the player when the regular player is only performing an action corresponding to the abnormality response data for a reason different from the illegal act. Become.

<Conversation production>
Next, the conversation effect in the conversation effect process executed in step S510 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  The conversation production is a production set as a type of notice production. Immediately after the start of fluctuation, an inquiry to the player is displayed on the symbol display device 61. When the player verbally responds to the question, a comment corresponding to the player's answer is displayed on the symbol display device 61. Through a series of exchanges between the pachinko machine 10 and the player, the player can know the degree of expectation of a jackpot result at the game time.

  With reference to (a) to (h) of FIG. 34, the manner in which the conversation effect proceeds will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 34 (a), at the start of fluctuation, three variable symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed on the symbol display device 61. In this state, when the conversation effect starts, the three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are reduced and displayed in the left corner area 161 of the symbol display device 61. The three symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are always reduced and displayed in the left corner area 161 of the symbol display device 61 during the conversation production. In the conversation production, first, a blue or red cut-in occurs in the symbol display device 61 as shown in FIG. 34 (b). The color of the cut-in image reflects the degree of expectation of a jackpot result in the game. When the cut-in of the red image is displayed, the expectation of the jackpot result is high, and when the cut-in of the blue image is displayed, the expectation of the jackpot result is low.

  After the cut-in image is displayed on the symbol display device 61, the girl character 162 is displayed together with the balloon 164 as shown in FIG. The balloon 164 displays “Look at me, answer and answer”. At this time, the dialogue of the girl character 162 is only displayed as characters in the balloon 164 and is not reproduced as voice. In the conversation effect, the lines of the girl character 162 are always displayed as characters in the balloon 164 and are not reproduced as voice. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), the dialogue of the girl character 162 changes to a question to the player. Specifically, a balloon 164 of the symbol display device 61 displays "Do you think this variation is hot?"

  In the next scene, the girl character 162 and its balloon 164 move to the upper left of the symbol display device 61, as shown in FIG. At the timing, the remaining answer time limit display bar 163 indicating the period in which the player can answer is displayed at the upper right of the symbol display device 61, and "I think" and "don't think" are displayed near the center of the symbol display device 61. Two choices are displayed. At this time, on the symbol display device 61, the first question "Is this variation hot?" Is displayed above the two options. As a result, it becomes easy to lead the answer to the question of the player to either "think" or "not think". When the player gives an answer that is not stored in the database, the voice emission control device 91 cannot recognize it and there is a disadvantage that the corresponding comment cannot be displayed. By clearly indicating the choices "I think" and "I don't think" on the symbol display device 61, it is possible to guide the player's answer to either one and increase the recognition rate of the player's answer in the sound emission control device 91. Becomes The details of how to recognize the verbal answer of the player will be described later.

  In the balloon 164 of the girl character 162, an advice for increasing the recognition rate of the answer by the player is displayed as a character together with the symbol "○" or "x". The words used for the advice are picked up by capturing an image of the player, grasping the orientation of the player's face, and selected according to the grasped orientation of the player's face. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34 (e), when the player's face is tilted to the left, a balloon 164 displays the advice "look a little further to the right". In this case, by displaying an "x" mark on the left side of the advice, the player is alerted not to give an answer. Similarly, when the player's face is facing upward, an advice such as "look a little further downward" is displayed. On the other hand, when the player's face is facing the front of the symbol display device 61 and the lip area of the player can be sufficiently grasped, as shown in FIG. The message "Ask as it is" is displayed. In this way, by displaying the advice for correcting the orientation of the player's face before the player makes an answer, it is possible to increase the answer recognition rate by the voice emission control device 91.

  When the voice response of the player is normally recognized by the voice light emission control device 91, a comment corresponding to the player's response is displayed in the balloon 164 as shown in FIG. The result of the lottery result, the color of the cut-in image, and the player's reply are reflected in the comment. For this reason, the player can obtain information regarding the degree of expectation that is a jackpot result, for the game time by the comment.

  When the verbal answer of the player is not recognized by the voice emission control device 91, the advice for increasing the next answer recognition rate is displayed in the balloon 164 as shown in FIG. .. Specifically, when the sound emission control device 91 can recognize the movement of the player's mouth, but cannot recognize the word spoken by the player, the character string “Next answer is clear” 164 Displayed in.

  When the voice emission control device 91 recognizes that the player has not moved his mouth within the response time limit, it is considered that the player has no intention of answering the question of the girl character 162. In this case, "..." is displayed in the balloon. After the series of effects from the occurrence of the cut-in to the display of the dialogue at the end of the conversation are performed, the reduced symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are enlarged and displayed again in the left corner area 161 of the symbol display device 61.

  When the blue cut-in is performed at the time of starting the conversation effect, the second conversation effect is performed with a predetermined probability after the series of conversation effects is completed. The second conversation effect is executed at the timing of the reach effect this time, in a state where two rows Z1 and Z3 of the three symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 enlarged and displayed after the series of conversation effects are finished are stopped. To be done. At the timing, the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 are reduced and displayed again in the left corner area 161 of the symbol display device 61, a blue or red cut-in occurs, and the second conversation effect starts. Here, the color of the cut-in image in the second conversation effect is determined by lottery regardless of the color of the cut-in image in the first conversation effect. After the second conversation effect is performed, the reduced symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are enlarged and displayed again in the left corner area 161 of the symbol display device 61. After that, the last symbol row Z2 is stopped and the game is over. However, in the first conversation production, if it is determined that the player does not intend to participate in the conversation production, only the cut-in occurs and conversation is not exchanged. Specifically, when "..." is displayed after the first conversation effect, the second conversation effect is only cut-in.

  As shown in the table of FIG. 35, the sound-light side ROM 94 stores the cut-in image in red, and stores six types of reply comments that can be displayed when the player answers “I think” and cuts the image. The in-image is blue, and six types of reply comments that can be displayed when the player answers "think" are stored. In addition, the cut-in image is red, and six types of reply comments that can be displayed when the player replies "I don't think" are stored. The cut-in image is blue, and the player does not "think." 6 types of reply comments that can be displayed when the user answers "" are stored. The table is commonly applied to the first and second conversation effects. Each reply comment indicates to the player the degree of expectation that a jackpot result will occur. The range of the degree of expectation is 0 to 100%.

  The degree of expectation that is a jackpot result means that when a cut-in of a predetermined color occurs, the player makes a predetermined answer, and a predetermined reply comment is displayed on the symbol display device 61, the winning / non-winning lottery of the game time. It shows the degree of expectation that the result will be a big hit. Specifically, when a red cut-in occurs, the player replies "I think", and a reply comment "I'm wondering" is displayed, the expectation level to be a big hit is 75%.

  The response comment with 100% expected jackpot result can be displayed only when the win / win lottery result is jackpot, and the response comment with 0% expected jackpot result is missed. Can be displayed only if In the table of FIG. 35, the expectation that gives a jackpot result is assigned according to a certain rule.

  When a cut-in of the same color occurs, a reply comment whose expectation of a jackpot result is 100% is not the same as a reply comment whose expectation of a jackpot result is not 100%. Specifically, in the case where a red cut-in occurs, when the player replies "I think", the expectation degree that is a jackpot result that can be displayed is 100% in the reply comment. Regarding the case where the red cut-in occurs, only one reply comment “Susugane” is set regardless of the player's answer. Further, in the case where a red cut-in occurs, when the player replies "I think", there is "yes" in the reply comment that the expectation degree which is a jackpot result is 100%. There are two cases in which a reply comment “Yes, yes” can be displayed in the case where a red cut-in occurs. This is a case in which the player answers "I think" and a case in which the player answers "I don't think". In any case, the expectation level of the jackpot result when the response comment “Yes” is displayed is 100%. In this way, when the cut-in of the same color occurs, the reply comment whose expectation of the jackpot result is 100% and the reply comment whose expectation of the jackpot is not 100% are set as different words. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the answer is incorrectly detected. In other words, if a red cut-in occurs and the words "Susugane", "Yes" and "Sometimes I don't think" are displayed as a response comment, the result of that game is a big hit. Can be sure. Even if the player's answer is erroneously detected, the player's expectations cannot be disappointed.

  On the other hand, when the color of the cut-in image is different, the reply comment with a 100% expected jackpot result may be the same as the reply comment with a not expected 100% jackpot result. Specifically, while the red cut-in occurs and the player answers "I think", the expectation that is a big hit result of the reply comment "Yes, yes" is 100%. The expectation that is a big hit result of a reply comment “Yes, yes” that can be displayed when a player replies “I think” with a blue cut-in occurring is 50%. In this case, the color of the cut-in image, which is different from the element visually recognizable by the player, makes the player feel uncomfortable even if the response comment "Yes" is displayed due to the false detection of the player's answer. Don't give. A player can recognize that the combination of "red" and "yes" is 100% expected to be a jackpot result, and the combination of "blue" and "yes" is 50% to be a jackpot result. Because it can be recognized that there is.

  For the same reply comment, the degree of expectation that is a jackpot result when the color of the cut-in image is red is greater than or equal to the degree of expectation that is a jackpot result when the color of the cut-in image is blue. Specifically, while the red cut-in occurs and the player answers "I think", the expectation that is a big hit result of the reply comment "What should I do?" Is 75%. The expectation that is a big hit result of a reply comment "I wonder" that can be displayed when a player replies "I don't think" because a blue cut-in occurs is 50%. The player can recognize that the combination of “red” and “shall we” has a higher expectation of jackpot than the combination of “blue” and “shall we”. Since the above rule is applied to all the reply comments, the player can expect a big hit when the cut-in image is red more than when it is blue.

  Various numerical values will be illustrated when the probability of winning the jackpot result is 1/300. The conversation production includes a first conversation production as a notice display and a second conversation production performed during the reach display. In the present embodiment, with respect to the first conversational effect, the probability that the conversational effect is executed at the time of a big hit is 30%, and the probability that the conversational effect is executed at the time of being out is 1%. In this case, when the first conversation production is performed, the degree of expectation of a jackpot result is 9%.

  In the first conversation production, the probability that the cut-in image will be red at the time of a big hit is 70%, and the probability that the cut-in image will be blue is 30%. In addition, the probability that the cut-in image will be red at the time of detachment is 30%, and the probability that the cut-in image will be blue is 70%. Therefore, in the first conversation production, when a red cut-in occurs, the expectation of a jackpot result is 19%, and when a blue cut-in occurs, an expectation of a jackpot result is 4%. is there.

  For the second conversation production, the combination of the color of the cut-in image and the player's answer and reply comment in the lottery of the first conversation production is (blue, think, yes) and (blue, don't think, wonder ) Was done. The expected degree of jackpot result in the combination of the two is 50%. That is, when the second conversation production is performed, the degree of expectation of a jackpot result is 50%.

  In the second conversation production, the probability that the cut-in image will be red at the time of a big hit is 90%, and the probability that the cut-in image will be blue is 10%. In addition, the probability that the cut-in image will be red at the time of detachment is 10%, and the probability that the cut-in image will be blue will be 90%. Therefore, in the second conversation production, when the red cut-in occurs, the expectation that the jackpot result is 90%, and when the blue cut-in occurs, the expectation that the jackpot result is 10%. is there.

  In the second conversation production, there is a high probability that the cut-in image will be red when the jackpot is hit, and a low probability that the cut-in image will be red when the jackpot is off. Therefore, the player can expect a jackpot result when a red cut-in occurs in the second conversation effect, more than the first conversation effect. In this way, the player can obtain more reliable information on the result of the winning / winning lottery from the second conversation effect than the first conversation effect. By increasing the reliability of the information regarding the result of the winning / winning lottery in the order of the first and second times, it is possible to make the player pay attention even in the second conversation production.

  FIGS. 36A to 36H show tables used for lottery of reply comments in the first conversation effect and the second conversation effect. One or more numbers are assigned to each reply comment. At the time of drawing a reply comment, one number is randomly extracted from 200 numbers 0 to 199, and the word to which the number is assigned is selected as the reply comment. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 (a) is used for the lottery of the reply comment when the win / loss lottery result is a big hit, the lottery result of the color of the cut-in image is red, and the expected player's answer is "think". It is a table that can be. In this case, four types of words such as “as expected”, “yes”, “what should I do”, and “like that” are stored as reply comments. 200 numbers from 0 to 199 are divided into four and are associated with four words. Specifically, 0 to 39 are assigned to "Susugane", 40 to 79 are assigned to "Yes", 80 to 169 are assigned to "How should I", and 170 to 199 are assigned to "Such feeling". If the number randomly selected during the lottery is 0 to 39, the word "Sugasane" is selected as the reply comment.

  The table of FIG. 36 (a) is paired with the table of FIG. 36 (b). FIG. 36 (b) shows that the value of the win / loss lottery result is a big hit, the lottery result of the color of the cut-in image is red, and the expected player's answer is "I don't think". It is a table used for. The difference between FIG. 36 (a) and FIG. 36 (b) is only the expected player's answer. In FIG. 36 (b), as in the table of FIG. 36 (a), 200 numbers from 0 to 199 are divided into four and are associated with four words. The lottery performed using FIG. 36 (a) and the lottery performed using FIG. 36 (b) are performed simultaneously. Specifically, if the randomly extracted number is any of 80 to 169, the comment "Would you like" is selected from the table of FIG. 36 (a) and the table of FIG. 36 (b) is selected. From, the comment “How about?” Is selected. In this way, since the player's answer is not known at the time of the lottery, the lottery when the player's answer is "I think" and the lottery when the player's answer is "I don't think" are performed at the same time.

  In FIG. 36, similarly to (a) and (b) having a paired relationship, (c) and (d), (e) and (f), and (g) and (h) have a paired relationship. It is in. Therefore, the lottery using FIG. 36 (c) and the lottery using FIG. 36 (d), the lottery using FIG. 36 (e) and the lottery using FIG. 36 (f) and FIG. 36 (g) are used. The lottery and the lottery using FIG. 36 (h) are simultaneously performed using the same numbers.

  Regarding the lottery of reply comments in the second conversation production, the numbers assigned to each response comment are different from those in the case of the first conversation production, and the pair of tables and the lottery method are the same. It is the same.

  The overall flow of conversation production will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (c) show the variable periods of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3, FIG. 37 (d) shows the period of the first stage conversation effect when the conversation succeeds, and FIG. 37 (e) shows FIG. 37 (d) shows the timing of grasping the answer, and FIG. 37 (f) shows the period of the first stage conversation effect when the conversation fails. Further, FIG. 37 (g) shows the period of the second stage conversation effect when the conversation succeeds, FIG. 37 (h) shows the timing of grasping the answer in FIG. 37 (g), and FIG. The period of the conversation production when the conversation fails is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (c), when the variation of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 37 (d) and 37 (f), the subsequent t2 The conversation production is started at the timing. Specifically, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are reduced and displayed, and a blue or red cut-in occurs. As shown in FIG. 37 (e), when the voice light emission control device 91 normally recognizes the oral response by the player at the timing of t 3 before the end of the response time limit, as shown in FIG. 37 (d). At the timing of t4, the conversation effect is ended, and the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 are enlarged and displayed again. From t3 to t4, the reply comment to the verbal answer of the player is displayed on the symbol display device 61. On the other hand, when the answer limit time has elapsed without normally recognizing the verbal answer by the player, thereafter, the advice display to the player is displayed on the symbol display device 61, and then, as shown in FIG. 37 (f). As shown, the conversation effect ends at the timing of t5. In this way, the timing of ending the conversation effect changes depending on whether or not the voice light emission control device 91 normally recognizes the verbal answer by the player. Further, as shown in FIG. 37 (a), the symbol row Z1 stops at the timing of t6. Regardless of the length of the first conversation effect, after the first conversation effect is finished, the symbol row Z1 is set to be stopped after the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are enlarged and displayed. When the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 are changing, the player's interest lies in whether or not reach is generated. Since the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 are reduced and displayed during the conversation effect, it is easier to pay attention to the conversation effect than the symbol strings Z1 to Z3. Therefore, if the symbol row Z1 stops during the conversation production, the player may miss the stop of the symbol row Z1. On the other hand, after the conversation effect is finished and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are enlarged and displayed, the symbol column Z1 is stopped so that the player's attention can be directed to the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Becomes

  In the first conversation effect, if the first cut-in image is blue, the second conversation effect may be performed. After the symbol row Z3 is stopped at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 37 (c), the second conversation effect is started at the timing of t8 as shown in FIGS. 37 (g) and 37 (i). As shown in FIG. 37 (h), at the timing of t9, if the voice light emission control device 91 normally recognizes the verbal answer of the player, the conversation at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 37 (g). The production ends. Further, when the answer limit time has elapsed without normally recognizing the verbal answer by the player, the conversation production ends at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 37 (i). As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the symbol row Z2 stops at the timing of t12. Regardless of the length of the second conversation effect, after the second conversation effect is finished, the symbol row Z2 is set to be stopped after the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are enlarged and displayed. After the two symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped, in the state where only the symbol row Z2 is changing, the player's interest is in the stop line of the symbol row Z2. Before the stop of the symbol row Z2, the second conversation production is finished, and in the state where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are enlarged, the stop timing of the symbol row Z2 is reached, and the player's attention is paid to the stop of the symbol row Z2. It is possible to point.

  Next, a detailed flow of conversation production will be described with reference to a time chart shown in FIG. FIG. 38 (a) shows a period during which conversation production is performed, and FIG. 38 (b) shows a period during which a cut-in image is displayed on the symbol display device 61 and a period during which the first word of the girl character 162 is displayed. 38 (c) shows the period in which the question to the player is displayed on the symbol display device 61, and FIG. 38 (d) shows the options for the player to answer on the symbol display device 61. FIG. 38 (e) shows the period during which the answer limit time and the advice regarding the orientation of the player's face are displayed on the symbol display device 61. Further, FIG. 38 (f) shows a period during which the image of the responding player is being taken, FIG. 38 (g) shows the timing when the image taking of the player is all finished, and FIG. 38 (h) is a symbol The display device 61 shows the period in which the comment to the answer made by the player is displayed, and FIG. 38 (i) shows the symbol display device 61 when the voice emission control device 91 cannot recognize the player's answer. The period of advice to the displayed player is shown.

  First, a case where the voice emission control device 91 normally recognizes the player's answer within the answer time limit will be described. As shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b), a red or blue cut-in occurs at the timing of t1 when the conversation effect is started, and then the girl character 162 is displayed on the symbol display device 61 together with the balloon 164. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 38 (c), the display of the symbol display device 61 switches to a question to the player at the timing of t2. After the question is displayed until the timing of t3, as shown in FIGS. 38 (d) to (f), options for the player to refer to when answering are displayed on the symbol display device 61 at the timing, and the answer is given. Advice regarding the time limit and orientation of the player's face is also displayed. Furthermore, when the answering time limit starts, the image pickup of the player who answers is started.

  When the sound emission control device 91 normally recognizes the player's answer at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 38 (g), the symbol display device 61 at the timing as shown in FIGS. 38 (d) to (f). The display of the above options and the response time limit ends, and the imaging ends. As shown in FIG. 38 (h), a response comment corresponding to the player's answer is displayed on the symbol display device 61 at the timing of t4. Then, as shown in FIGS. 38A and 38H, the display of the comment ends at the timing of t5, and the conversation effect ends.

  Next, a case will be described in which the voice emission control device 91 cannot answer the player's answer and the answer time limit elapses. As shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b), a cut-in occurs at the timing of t6 and the conversation effect is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 38 (c), the question is displayed at the timing of t7. As shown in FIGS. 38 (d) to 38 (f), at the timing of t8, the options regarding the question and the response time limit are displayed, and the player's image pickup is started. The display and imaging of the options and the answer time limit are continued until t9 when the answer time limit ends. As shown in FIG. 38 (i), advice is given to the player's way of answering at the timing of t9, and the advice display is ended and the conversation effect is ended at the timing of t10.

  Next, the lottery process performed by receiving the result of the lottery will be described. The lottery process is divided into two types, that is, when the winning / winning lottery result is a big hit and when it is a win. In the case of a big hit, a confirmation notification is included to inform the player that the winning / winning lottery result is a big hit, whereas in the case of a miss, the confirmation notification is not included. In the two lottery processes, the color of the cut-in image and the reply comment to the player are determined by lottery. When the color of the cut-in image is blue and the second conversation effect is performed, a lottery is performed to determine the color of the cut-in image and the reply comment in the second conversation effect. Then, when the lottery is finished, a data table corresponding to the result of this lottery is expanded from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95.

  First, the lottery process at the time of a big hit performed when the result of the lottery is a big hit will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a lottery process at the time of a big hit. In step S1501, cut-in image lottery processing is performed. At the time of a big hit, a red cut-in indicating a high degree of expectation occurs with a probability of 70%, and a blue cut-in indicating a low degree of expectation occurs with a probability of 30%. Since the result of the winning / winning lottery is a big hit, it is highly likely that the production with high expectation will be performed. In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the color of the cut-in image is red. If the color of the cut-in image this time is red (step S1502: YES), a comment lottery process (first time) for "big hit" and "red" is performed in step S1503. The lottery process is performed using the lottery table (FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (b)) when the win / win lottery result is a big hit and the color of the cut-in image is red. A lottery is conducted for two types of cases where the player answers "I think" and "Do not think". On the other hand, when the color of the cut-in image determined by the lottery is blue (step S1502: NO), the comment lottery process (first time) at the time of “big hit” and “blue” is performed in step S1504. The lottery process is performed using the lottery table (FIGS. 36 (c) and 36 (d)) when the win / win lottery result is a big hit and the color of the cut-in image is blue. When the color of the cut-in image is blue, there is a possibility that the second conversation effect will be performed. The presence or absence of the second conversation effect is determined by the type of reply comment determined by the comment lottery process (first time) at the time of “big hit” and “blue”. Specifically, in the lottery performed using the lottery table shown in FIG. 36 (c), the reply comment “yes” is selected, and in the lottery conducted using the lottery table shown in FIG. 36 (d). When the reply comment "Would you like" is selected, the second conversation production is performed.

  After the comment lottery process (first time) for "big hit" and "red" in step S1503, or the comment process (first time) for "big hit" and "blue" ends in step S1504, the second conversation production When it is determined that the step S1505 is not performed (step S1505: NO), in step S1506, the reply comment and the base data table determined by the lottery are read from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95, and when the main jackpot The lottery process of is ended.

  When the comment lottery process (first time) at the time of “big hit” and “blue” is finished and it is determined that the second conversation effect is performed (step S1505: YES), the lottery process for the second conversation effect is performed in step S1507. Then, the lottery process at the time of this jackpot is finished.

  Next, a lottery process at the time of a miss, which is performed when the win / no win lottery result is a miss, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S1601, a cut-in image lottery process is performed. At the time of deviation, a red cut-in indicating a high degree of expectation occurs with a probability of 30%, and a blue cut-in indicating a low degree of expectation occurs with a probability of 70%. Since the result of the winning / winning lottery is out of order, it is highly possible that the production with a low expectation is performed.

  In step S1602, it is determined whether the color of the cut-in image is red. When the color of the cut-in image this time is red (step S1602: YES), a comment lottery process (first time) for “off” or “red” is performed in step S1603. The lottery process is performed using the lottery table (FIGS. 36 (e) and 36 (f)) when the win / win lottery result is a big hit and the color of the cut-in image is red. A lottery is conducted for two types of cases where the player answers "I think" and "Do not think". On the other hand, when the color of the cut-in image determined by the lottery is blue (step S1602: NO), the comment lottery process (first time) at the time of “off” or “blue” is performed in step S1604. The lottery process is performed using the lottery table (FIGS. 36 (g) and 36 (h)) when the result of the lottery is wrong and the color of the cut-in image is blue. When the color of the cut-in image is blue, there is a possibility that the second conversation effect will be performed. The presence or absence of the second conversation effect is determined by the type of reply comment determined by the comment lottery process (first time) at the time of “off” or “blue”. Specifically, in the lottery performed using the lottery table shown in FIG. 36 (g), the reply comment “yes” is selected, and in the lottery performed using the lottery table shown in FIG. 36 (h). When the reply comment "Would you like" is selected, the second conversation production is performed.

  In step S1603, after the comment lottery process (first time) for "off" or "red" ends, or the comment process (first time) for "off" or "blue" ends, the second conversation production is not performed. If it is determined (step S1605: NO), the color of the cut-in image determined by the lottery, the response comment, and the base data table when the conversation effect is performed once in step S1606 are set as the sound-light ROM 94 in step S1606. Is read out to the sound-light side RAM 95, and the lottery process at the time of the failure is completed.

  When the comment lottery process (first time) at the time of “off” or “blue” is completed and it is determined that the second conversation effect is performed (step S1605: YES), the lottery process for the second conversation effect is performed in step S1607. Then, the lottery process when the book is missed ends.

  Next, the lottery process for the second effect will be described with reference to FIG. The lottery process for the second effect is executed in step S1507 of the lottery process at the time of jackpot (FIG. 39) or step S1607 of the lottery process at the time of defeat (FIG. 40). The second conversation effect is executed when the color of the cut-in image in the first conversation effect is blue and a predetermined reply comment is selected by lottery.

  First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the result of this lottery is a big hit. If the winning / winning lottery result is a big hit (step S1701: YES), a big hit jack-in image lottery process is performed in order to determine the color of the cut-in image in the second conversation production in step S1702. In step S1703, it is determined as a result of the lottery whether or not the color of the cut-in image of the second conversation effect is red. When the color of the cut-in image is red (step S1703: YES), the comment lottery process (second time) at the time of “big hit” and “red” for determining the reply comment is performed in step S1704. The lottery table shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (b) is used for the lottery. If the color of the cut-in image is blue (step S1703: NO), the comment lottery process (second time) for “big hit” and “blue” is performed in step S1705 to determine the reply comment. The lottery tables shown in FIGS. 36 (c) and 36 (d) are used for the lottery.

  If the winning / winning lottery result is missed (step S1701: NO), a cut-in image lottery process at the time of miss is performed in order to determine the color of the cut-in image in the second conversation production in step S1706. In step S1707, it is determined as a result of the lottery whether the color of the cut-in image of the second conversation effect is red. When the color of the cut-in image is red (step S1707: YES), the comment lottery process (second time) at the time of “off” or “red” for determining the reply comment is performed in step S1708. The lottery tables shown in FIGS. 36 (e) and 36 (f) are used for the lottery. If the color of the cut-in image is blue (step S1707: NO), a comment lottery process (second time) for “off” and “blue” is performed in step S1709 to determine a reply comment. The lottery tables shown in FIGS. 36 (g) and 36 (h) are used for the lottery.

  After performing the reply comment lottery processing in step S1704, step S1705, step S1708, or step S1709, in step S1710, the color of the first and second cut-in images, the reply comment, and the conversation effect are performed twice. The base data table in the case of being read is read from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95, and the lottery process of the second effect is finished.

  Next, the base data table read from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95 will be described. FIG. 42 shows a base data table when two conversation effects are generated by one game. FIG. 42 (a) is a base data table for conversation effect, and FIG. 42 (b) is a base data table for the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3. The sound and light in the conversation effect are controlled based on FIG. 42A, and the sound and light when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changed are controlled based on FIG. 42B. Both of the two base data tables are stored in the sound-light side ROM 94, and are expanded in the sound-light side RAM 95 to produce an effect.

  In FIG. 42A, the start timings of the first and second conversation effects, the question display start timing, the option display start timing, and the answer limit time end timing are recorded. In FIG. 42 (b), the start timing of the reduced display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is recorded. As shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), the first conversation effect is started at the timing when the pointer, which was at the position of "0" at the start of the change, is moved to the position of "a". At this timing, the reduced display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is performed. Further, the second conversation effect is started at the timing when the pointer moves to the position of "e". At this timing, the reduced display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is performed.

  The symbol strings Z1 to Z3 are reduced and displayed during the conversation effect, and the effect shifts to the next scene at the timing when the answer of the player is grasped. Here, the timing at which the player's answer is grasped is indefinite. That is, there is a width in the length of the entire conversation production, and the timing of returning to the game time changes depending on the timing of grasping the answer. The voice emission control device 91 refers to the base data table of FIG. 42 (b) from the start of the change to the start of the conversation effect, and controls the sound and light relating to the change of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3, and after the start of the conversation effect. Until the end of the conversation effect, the sound and light related to the conversation effect are controlled with reference to the base data table of FIG. 42 (a). When the conversation effect is finished, the sound emission control device 91 refers to the base data table of FIG. 42 (b) in order to control the sound and light relating to the fluctuation of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 again. Here, the timing of switching from the effect of the sound and light for conversation effect to the effect of the sound and light for variation of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 is indefinite. Therefore, the two base data tables are developed in the sound-light side RAM 95, and the reference destination is changed from one base data table to the other base data table at the effect switching timing. As a result, it is possible to proceed with the conversation effect according to the player's independence.

  The table of FIG. 43 shows the feature points of the face for grasping the orientation of the face, the shape of the lip region, and the like from the face image obtained by imaging. As shown in the upper part of the table, 19 points from T1 to T19 are plotted for each face image.

  Specifically, the end points T1 and T2 of the eyebrows on the center side of the face, the bases T3 and T4 of the upper ears, the eye peripheries T5 to T12, the lip regions T13 to T18, and the tip T19 of the chin are plotted as feature points. .. As for the area around the eyes, the outer corners T5 and T9, the points T6 and T10 that project to the top of the upper eyelid, the points T7 and T11 that project to the bottom of the lower eyelid, and the inner corners T8 and T12 are plotted. Regarding the lip region, the mouth angles T13 and T17, the upper lip peak portions T14 and T16, the upper lip groove T15, and the lowermost protruding point T18 of the lower lip are plotted. Based on the positional information of the 19 feature points, the player's face direction, lip shape, and the like are grasped.

  Next, a method of grasping the face direction will be described with reference to FIG. First, a method of grasping the face downward and upward will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 (a) to 44 (c). FIG.44 (b) represents the state which faces the front. Further, FIG. 44 (a) shows a downward state, and FIG. 44 (c) shows an upward state. The point A corresponds to the tip of the jaw (T19 in FIG. 43), and the point B corresponds to the midpoint between the characteristic points of both eyebrows (T1 and T2 in FIG. 43). The point O corresponds to the center of the symbol display device 61. The point M is the midpoint of the line segment AB, and the line segment MN intersects with the line segment AB at the point M. The line segment AB is a line that bisects the player's face into right and left, and a straight line MN passing through the midpoint M of the line segment AB and perpendicular to the line segment AB can be regarded as representing the direction of the line of sight. it can.

  In FIG. 44B, the point N overlaps the point O. That is, it can be said that the center of the symbol display device 61 exists at the tip of the line of sight, and the player's face is facing forward with respect to the vertical direction. Thus, when the point N is within the range of the line segment PQ representing the vertical width of the symbol display device 61, it is considered that the player is facing the front. Further, the degree of protrusion of the feature point T19 (FIG. 43) corresponding to the tip of the jaw has individual differences. Therefore, if the inclination of the line segment AB is within a predetermined range, it is necessary to consider that the player is facing the front. Then, when the inclination of the line segment AB exceeds the predetermined range and is upward or downward, it is considered that the player does not face the front. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 44A to 44C, an adjustment area 61a is provided above the symbol display device 61, and an adjustment area 61b is provided below the symbol display device 61. Thereby, the range regarded as the vertical width of the symbol display device 61 is expanded from the line segment PQ to the line segment RS. Then, when the point N is within the range of the line segment RS, it is determined that the player faces the front in the vertical direction. As a result, it becomes possible to make a frontal orientation determination in consideration of the degree of protrusion of the jaw.

  The point N is obtained from the position information of the three feature points T1, T2, T19. In this way, it is not necessary to make a correction regarding the height of the sitting height of the player by determining that the player is facing the front because the symbol display device 61 is at the tip of the line of sight. Specifically, the front for a player with a high sitting height is a state in which the face is slightly tilted downward, and the front for a player with a low sitting height is a state in which the face is slightly tilted upward. Therefore, in the case of determining the frontal orientation based on the inclination of the player's face, it is necessary to correct the sitting height. On the other hand, when the straight line MN that can be regarded as the player's line of sight is obtained and the frontal direction is determined based on the fact that the point N exists within the range of the line segment RS, it is not necessary to correct the sitting height.

  In FIG. 44 (a), the point N exists below the point R which is regarded as the lower end of the symbol display device 61, so it is determined that the player's face is tilted downward. Further, in FIG. 44 (c), since the point N exists above the point S which is regarded as the upper end of the symbol display device 61, it is determined that the player's face is tilted upward.

  Next, a method of grasping the lateral inclination of the face will be described with reference to FIGS. In this case, the point C corresponds to the player's left ear feature point T3 (FIG. 43), and the point D corresponds to the player's right ear feature point T4 (FIG. 43). The point M is the midpoint of the line segment CD, and the point N exists on a straight line that passes through the point M and is perpendicular to the line segment CD. Also in this case, the straight line MN represents the line-of-sight direction of the player. In FIG. 44 (e), point N coincides with point O. That is, the center of the symbol display device 61 exists in front of the line of sight of the player. Therefore, the player's face is facing forward with respect to the left-right direction. In this way, when the point N exists within the range of the line segment TU representing the lateral width of the symbol display device 61, it is determined that the player faces the front. On the other hand, in FIG. 44A, since the point N exists on the left side of the point T which is the left end of the symbol display device 61, it is determined that the player's face is tilted to the left. Further, in FIG. 44 (f), since the point N exists on the right side of the point U which is the right end of the symbol display device 61, it is determined that the player's face is tilted to the right.

  Next, a method of verbally identifying an answer by a player will be described. The table of FIG. 45 shows the lip shapes when five vowels are pronounced. The lip shape when the vowel "a" is pronounced has a small aspect ratio. Also, the degree of protrusion is not much different from the closed state. The lip shape when the vowel "i" is pronounced has a large aspect ratio. Further, the protrusion degree is smaller than that in the closed state. The lip shape when the vowel "u" is pronounced has a medium aspect ratio. Further, the degree of protrusion is larger than that in the closed state. The lip shape when the vowel "e" is pronounced has a large aspect ratio. Also, the degree of protrusion is not much different from the closed state. The lip shape when the vowel "o" is pronounced has a small aspect ratio. Further, the degree of protrusion is larger than that in the closed state. In this way, the lip shape when the five vowels are pronounced can be identified by the combination of the large, medium, and small aspect ratios and the large, medium, and small protrusion degrees. Further, the shape of the lip region is grasped by the position information of the characteristic points T13 to 18 (Fig. 43). That is, the five vowels can be identified from the position information of the feature points.

  The player does not pronounce a single vowel when verbally answering, but rather utters several words in succession. Specifically, it is expected that the user will be guided by the options displayed on the symbol display device 61 and reply "I think" or "I do not think". "I think" is romanized "omou" and includes three vowels "o", "o", and "u". Also, "m" is sandwiched between "o" and "o". Therefore, when pronouncing the word "think", first "o" is pronounced, "o" is pronounced again through the closed state, and finally "u" is pronounced. In this way, when a specific alphabet such as "m" or "p" is included, the closed state is passed once.

  When trying to grasp the verbal answer of the player from the shape of the lip area, the closed state may cause a false detection. For example, in the case of continuously pronouncing "a", "i", "u", "e", and "o", it starts from the closed state, five sounds are pronounced in the open state, and the closed state is returned again. .. However, in the case of pronouncing a word firmly and pronouncing one sound one sound firmly and slowly, there is a possibility that a closed state is caught in the middle. In this case, when "a", "i", "u", "e", and "o" are pronounced, the closed state and the open state may be repeated many times.

  On the other hand, if the answer is grasped under the rule that the closed state is not counted, even if “a”, “i”, “u”, “e”, and “o” are pronounced continuously, they will be pronounced intermittently. Also in the case of doing, it is similarly grasped as "a" "i" "u" "e" "o".

  "I don't think" is "omowanai" in Roman letters, and under the rule that the closed state is not counted, the same lip shape as when pronounced "o" "o" "a" "a" "i" Become. In this way, when the same vowel sounds are consecutive, there is individual difference in the length of one sound emitted by the player, so the first "o", the second "o", and the third "o". When trying to distinguish the “a” from the fourth “a”, in addition to “o”, “o”, “a”, “a”, “i”, “o”, “a”, “a”, “i”, “o” Many possible detection patterns such as “o”, “a”, “i”, “o”, “o”, “o”, “a”, “a”, and “i” must be assumed and stored in advance.

  On the other hand, when the answer is grasped under the rule that consecutive consecutive vowels are counted as one sound, "I think" is uniquely decided to be "o" and "u", and also "I don't think". Is uniquely determined to be three characters, such as "o", "a", and "i".

  In the conversation production, the player is asked a question and a reply comment is returned to the player's answer. Since the player makes an oral response in the expectation of a reply comment, not being able to return a reply comment despite the player's reply discourages the player and participates in the player's conversation production. It also leads to discouragement. On the other hand, since the reply comment is configured to identify the player's answer and return it to the player based on the identification result, the player feels uncomfortable in the conversation if the wrong detection of the answer occurs frequently.

  The number of characters is different between "think" and "do not think", which are likely to be answered by the player. "I think" is recognized as "o" or "u", and "not think" is recognized as "o", "a", or "i". Most likely there is. If the player's answer does not correspond to "o", "u", or "o", "a", or "i", it is a condition that the pachinko machine 10 recognizes the first character as an unknown character. As a result, the number of characters is counted, and if it is 2 characters, the answer is “I think”, and if it is 3 characters, the answer is “I don't think”, thereby suppressing the possibility of false detection and increasing the answer recognition rate. Can be made First, it is determined whether any of “o” “u” or “o” “a” “i” is applicable, and then it is determined whether any of 2 or 3 characters is applicable. By doing so, the answer recognition rate can be increased while suppressing the possibility of false detection.

  Next, the timing of performing the processing for recognizing the words spoken by the player from the shape of the lip region will be described. For the purpose of grasping the player's answer without missing any character, the interval of capturing the face image of the player is set to be shorter than the time at which the player makes one sound. As a result, the number of characters of the player's answer can be accurately grasped, and the answer can be accurately grasped from the number of characters. Therefore, the number of face images of the player captured is larger than the number of sounds produced by the player. If image analysis is performed on all of the images obtained by imaging, there is a possibility that the player will recognize a larger number of characters than the words actually answered. In addition, performing the image analysis on the shape of the lip region in the transition state from when the player pronounces one sound to when the next one sound is pronounced may cause erroneous detection or detection error. . Specifically, there is a case where imaging is performed three times while the player pronounces "i" and "o". Assuming that the first imaging is when the pronunciation of “i” is performed and the third imaging is when the pronunciation of “o” is performed, the transition of the transition between the lip shape of “i” and the lip shape of “o” is performed in the second imaging. Will be captured. Image analysis of the second imaging result may determine that the lip shape is “e”. In this case, the player pronounces "i" and "o", whereas the image analysis result is "i", "e", and "o", and there is a possibility that the word and the number of characters are erroneously detected.

  On the other hand, the lip shape obtained by this imaging is compared with the lip shape obtained by the previous imaging, and if the lip shape is significantly different, it is determined that it is in a transition state and image analysis is not performed, If the difference in shape is small, image analysis is performed, so that transition states can be removed and only the pronunciation of words can be extracted for image analysis. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility of false detection. This is because the lip shape is constant when the player is making a sound, while the lip shape is largely changed in the transition state.

  Specifically, the feature points T13 to T18 (FIG. 43) of the lip region representing the lip shape are compared to calculate a vector, and the magnitude of the vector is used to determine whether or not the vector is in the transition state. A large vector obtained from the comparison between the feature points of the current image capture result and the feature point of the previous image capture result indicates a transition state, and a small vector indicates that the player is producing a sound. ..

  When the player pronounces "I think", after a plurality of lip shapes corresponding to "o" continue, a transition state is set, and a plurality of lip shapes corresponding to "o" continue again. After that, through the transition state, a plurality of lip shapes corresponding to “u” continue. Since the transition state is excluded, the result of the image analysis is that a plurality of “o” s are continuous and then a plurality of “u” s are continuous. Here, when the same character continues, it is counted as one character, so that it is possible to finally recognize "think" as "o" and "u".

  Next, the timing of ending the imaging will be described. The player is considered to be in a closed state after making an answer. The imaging is ended in the closed state. However, there is a timing when the player is in the closed state even during the answer. Therefore, even when it is determined that the closed state is set, it is not possible to immediately set the imaging end timing.

  On the other hand, by setting the image capturing end timing when the state in which the magnitude of the vector relating to the displacement of the feature point is small continues for a predetermined period, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the image capturing will be terminated during the answer of the player. .. This is because the closed state after the answer is completed is longer than the closed state during the reply.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the conversation effect process executed in step S510 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). The conversation effect process is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93. First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first conversation effect flag. Here, the first-time conversation effect flag is a flag indicating that the conversation effect as the notice effect is being executed, and is a flag set in step S1805 of the conversation effect process.

  If "1" is not set in the first conversation effect flag (step S1801: NO), the first conversation effect is referred to in step S1802 by referring to the base data table developed in the sound-light side RAM 95. It is determined whether or not it is the start timing of. Here, the first conversation effect means a conversation effect performed as a notice effect, and is described separately from the second conversation effect performed at the timing of the reach effect.

  When it is the start timing of the first conversation effect (step S1802: YES), the color of the cut-in image read to the sound-light side RAM 95 in step S1803 is grasped. Then, in step S1804, a command for executing the cut-in is transmitted to the display control device 96, and in step S1805, the first conversation effect flag is set to "1", and the present conversation effect process is ended.

  If "1" is set in the first conversation effect flag (step S1801: YES), the question display process is executed in step S1806 and the process for the main conversation effect is ended. If a negative determination is made in step S1802, this conversation production process is ended as it is.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the question display process executed in step S1806 of the conversation production process (FIG. 46) and step S3008 of the second conversation production process (FIG. 58) described later. The question display process is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S1901, the base data table loaded in the sound-light side RAM 95 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not it is the display start timing of the question. The question is an inquiry made by the girl character 162 to the player, and is displayed in the balloon 164 of the symbol display device 61. When it is the display start timing of the question (step S1901: YES), a command for displaying the question on the symbol display device 61 is transmitted to the display control device 96, and this question display process is ended. The command is a command for causing the symbol display device 61 to display “Is this variation hot?”.

  When it is not the display start timing of the question (step S1901: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the display start timing of the options by referring to the base data table developed in the sound-light side RAM 95 in step S1903. .. The option is displayed on the symbol display device 61 so that the player's eyes can be seen when the player answers the question asked by the girl character 162. When it is the option display start timing (step S1903: YES), a command for displaying the option and the response time limit display bar 163 on the symbol display device 61 is transmitted to the display control device 96 in step S1904.

  In the following step S1905, "1" is set in the image pickup command flag. This is performed in order that the voice light emission control device 91 recognizes the player's answer by performing image processing by picking up the image of the player who gives the answer verbally. After that, the answer waiting flag is set to "1" and the question display process is ended. Here, the answer waiting flag is a process for grasping the verbal answer of the player while capturing an image of the player's face while displaying the question for the player on the symbol display device 61. It is a flag indicating a state. If it is not the option display start timing (step S1903: NO), the comment display process is performed in step S1907, and the question display process ends.

  48 is a flowchart showing the comment display processing executed in step S1907 of the question display processing (FIG. 47). The comment display process is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93. First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the comment display flag is set to "1". Here, the comment displaying flag is a flag indicating that a comment for the answer of the player is displayed on the symbol display device 61, and "1" is set in step S2016 of the comment displaying process.

  If the comment displaying flag is not set to "1" (step S2001: NO), it is determined in step S2002 whether the advice displaying flag is set to "1". The advice display flag is a flag indicating a state in which the advice is displayed on the symbol display device 61 at the end of the conversation production when the voice emission control device 91 cannot recognize the verbal answer of the player. , "1" is set in step S2716 of the process (FIG. 55) at the time of conversation failure described later.

  When "1" is not set in the advice display flag (step S2002: NO), it is determined in step S2003 whether or not the reply waiting flag is set to "1". If the reply waiting flag is set to "1" (step S2003: YES), it is within the reply time limit by referring to the base data table loaded in the sound-light side RAM 95 in step S2004. It is determined whether or not. If it is within the response time limit (step S2004: YES), it is determined in step S2005 whether or not "1" is set in the imaging completion flag. When "1" is set in the image capturing completion flag (step S2005: YES), the image capturing completion flag is cleared to "0" in step S2006, and the image determination process is performed in step S2007.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the image determination processing executed in step S2007 of the comment display processing (FIG. 48). The image determination process is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93. First, in step S2101, feature points are extracted from the face image of the player obtained by the current imaging, and in step S2102, the face direction of the player is grasped from the position information of the feature points extracted in step S2101. The face orientation grasp process is performed.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the face orientation determination processing executed in step S2102 of the image determination processing (FIG. 49). The face orientation determination process is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S2201, "1" is added to the imaging counter. Here, the imaging counter is a counter that counts the number of times of imaging. The counter is used to determine whether or not the number of images captured in the front direction is more than half the number of captured images. Next, in step S2202, it is determined whether or not both ears are included in the face image of the player obtained by the current imaging. Specifically, as a result of extracting feature points in step S2401 of the image determination process (FIG. 52), it is determined whether or not there are feature points related to both ears in the face image this time. When only one of the feature points related to both ears is present in the face image this time (step S2202: NO), it is determined in step S2203 whether or not the feature point related to the right ear is present. When only the feature point related to the right ear exists (step S2203: YES), a command for displaying the rightward advice on the symbol display device 61 is transmitted to the display control device 96 in step S2204, and the orientation of the actual face is grasped. The process ends. Here, the rightward advice is an advice for turning the player to the right. Specifically, while displaying "x" on the symbol display device 61, the advice "a little more to the right" is given. When only the feature point regarding the left ear exists (step S2203: NO), in step S2205, a command for displaying the left-pointing advice on the symbol display device 61 is transmitted to the display control device 96, and the orientation of the face is grasped. The process ends. Here, the left-handed advice is advice for turning the player to the left. Specifically, the symbol “X” is displayed on the symbol display device 61, and the advice “a little more to the left” is given.

  If there is a feature point relating to both ears in step S2202, a horizontal face orientation grasping process is performed in step S2206. Specifically, the face orientation in the left-right direction is grasped from the position information of the characteristic points T3 and T4 (FIG. 43).

  In step S2207, it is determined whether or not the face is facing left. If it is leftward (step S2207: YES), a command for displaying the rightward advice is transmitted to the display control device 96 in step S2208, and the face orientation grasping process ends. If the face orientation is not leftward (step S2207: NO), it is determined in step S2209 whether or not the face orientation is rightward. If it is rightward (step S2209: YES), a command for displaying the leftward advice is transmitted to the display control device 96 in step S2210, and the face orientation grasping process is ended.

  When the face orientation is neither leftward nor rightward (step S2209: NO), vertical face orientation determination processing is performed in step S2211. In step S2212, it is determined whether or not the direction of the face is upward. If it is facing upward (step S2212: YES), a command for displaying the downward advice is transmitted to the display control device 96 in step S2213, and the face orientation grasping process is ended. If the face is not up (step S2212: NO), it is determined in step S2214 whether the face is down. If it is downward (step S2214: YES), a command for displaying the upward advice is transmitted to the display control device 96 in step S2215, and the face orientation grasping process is ended.

  If the face orientation is neither upward nor downward (step S2214: NO), "1" is added to the front facing counter in step S2216, and the player is facing front in step S2217. A command for displaying on the display device 61 is transmitted to the display control device 96, and the face orientation grasping process is ended. Here, the front-facing counter is a counter that counts the number of times the player has been imaged in a state of facing the front. When the player is facing the front, the symbol display device 61 displays "O answer as it is".

  Returning to the description of the image determination processing in FIG. 49, the lip area is extracted from the face image of the player in step S2103, and the feature points of the lip area are extracted in step S2104.

  In step S2105, by determining whether or not the comparison target is stored in the sound-light side RAM 95, it is determined whether or not the current imaging is the second or subsequent imaging. Here, the comparison target is the position information of the feature points stored in step S2117 of the main image determination process. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, a vector representing the shape change of the lip region from the comparison target is obtained in step S2106. Specifically, the amount and direction of displacement of each feature point is set as a vector based on the comparison between the position information of the feature points of the lip region captured last time and the position information of the lip region captured this time, which are stored as comparison targets. Represent

  In step S2107, it is determined whether the sum of the magnitudes of the respective vectors is smaller than a predetermined value. The fact that the sum of the sizes of the respective vectors is small indicates that the lip shape of the player has not changed much from the previous image capturing to the current image capturing. In addition, a large sum of the sizes of the vectors indicates that the lip shape of the player has changed significantly from the previous image capturing to the current image capturing. If the amount of change in lip shape is small, it is possible that the player is uttering some words. It is also possible that the player has finished answering and kept the lip shape constant. On the other hand, when the amount of change in the lip shape is large, it is possible that the player is in a transitional period from one word to another word.

  When the sum of the magnitudes of the vectors is smaller than the predetermined value (step S2107: YES), it is determined in step S2108 whether or not the shape of the lip region this time is the same as the shape of the previous lip region. To do. The determination is performed by comparing the position information of each feature point. Specifically, the sum of the sizes of the respective vectors obtained from the position information of the feature points of the lip region this time and the position information of the feature points of the lip region when the character recognition processing (step S2111) was performed last time is performed. When it is smaller than the predetermined value, it is determined that the lip shape of this time is the same as the lip shape of the previous character recognition process. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2108, "1" is added to the same shape counter in step S2109. The same shape counter is a counter for measuring the time during which the player's lips have the same shape continuously, and when the value of the counter reaches a predetermined value, the player finishes the answer. It is considered as done. If a negative determination is made in step S2108, the same shape counter is cleared to "0" in step S2110, and character recognition processing is performed in step S2111.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the character recognition process executed in step S2111 of the image determination process (FIG. 49). The character recognition processing is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the aspect ratio of the lip region is large. If the aspect ratio is large (step S2301: YES), it is determined in step S2302 whether or not the degree of protrusion of the lip region is medium. If the degree of protrusion is medium, the vowel pronounced this time is recognized as "e" in step S2303. If the degree of protrusion of the lip area is not medium (step S2302: NO), it is determined in step S2304 whether the degree of protrusion of the lip area is small. If the degree of protrusion is small (step S2304: YES), the vowel pronounced this time in step S2305 is recognized as "i". If the degree of protrusion is not small (step S2304: NO), the vowel pronounced this time is recognized as an unknown character in step S2306. When grasping the answer of the player from the number of characters, the unknown character is counted as one character. As a result, even if it is determined that a part of the player's answer does not correspond to any of “a”, “i”, “u”, “e” and “o”, the player's answer depends on the number of characters. It becomes possible to grasp.

  If the aspect ratio of the lip region is not large (step S2301: NO), it is determined in step 2407 whether the aspect ratio is medium. When the aspect ratio is medium (step S2307: YES), it is determined in step S2308 whether the degree of protrusion of the lip region is large. When the degree of protrusion is large (step S2308: YES), the vowel pronounced this time is recognized as "u" in step S2309. If the degree of protrusion is not large (step S2308: NO), it is recognized as an unknown character in step S2310.

  If the aspect ratio of the lip region is not medium (step S2307: NO), it is determined in step S2311 whether the aspect ratio is small. If the aspect ratio is small (step S2311: YES), it is determined in step S2312 whether the degree of protrusion of the lip region is large. When the degree of protrusion is large (step S2312: YES), the vowel pronounced this time is recognized as "o" in step S2313. When the degree of protrusion is not large (step S2312: NO), it is determined in step S2314 whether the degree of protrusion is medium. If the degree of protrusion is medium (step S2314: YES), the vowel pronounced this time is recognized as "a" in step S2315. If the degree of protrusion is not medium (step S2314: NO), it is recognized as an unknown character in step S2316.

  If the aspect ratio of the lip region is not small (step S2311: NO), it is recognized as an unknown character in step S2316. After step S2303, step S2305, step S2306, step S2309, step S2310, step S2313, step S2315, and step S2316, the recognized character storage processing is performed in step S2317, and this character recognition processing ends.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the recognized character storage processing executed in step S2317 of the character recognition processing (FIG. 51). The recognition character storage process is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93. First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not there is a previously recognized character. Specifically, "1" is set in any of the previous "a" flag, the previous "i" flag, the previous "u" flag, the previous "e" flag, the previous "o" flag, or the previous "unknown" flag. It is determined whether or not it is set. If any of the characters "a" to "o" was recognized last time, "1" is set in any of the five flags. Further, when the character is previously recognized as an unknown character, "1" is set in the "unknown" flag last time. For example, if "a" was previously recognized, "1" is set in the "a" flag last time.

  If there is a previously recognized character (step S2401: YES), it is determined in step S2402 whether or not the currently recognized character is the same as the previously recognized character. If the character recognized this time is the same as the character recognized the previous time (step S2402: YES), the recognized character storage process is ended. When the character recognized this time is different from the character recognized last time (step S2402: NO), the flag regarding the character recognized last time is cleared to "0" in step S2403. Specifically, if the previous "o" flag is set to "1", the previous "o" flag is cleared to "0".

  When a negative determination is made in step S2401 or after step S2403, it is determined in step S2404 whether "1" is set in any of the six flags corresponding to the first character. Specifically, the first character “a” flag, the first character “i” flag, the first character “u” flag, the first character “e” flag, the first character “o” flag, or the first character “unknown”. It is determined whether or not "1" is set in any of the flags. When "1" is not set in any of the six flags corresponding to the first character (step S2404: NO), the flag of the first character corresponding to the character recognized this time in step S2405 is set to " 1 ”is set. Specifically, when the character recognized this time is "o", "1" is set to the first character "o" flag.

  When "1" is set in any of the six flags corresponding to the first character (step S2404: YES), "1" is set in any of the six flags corresponding to the second character in step S2406. ] Is set. Specifically, the second character “a” flag, the second character “i” flag, the second character “u” flag, the second character “e” flag, the second character “o” flag, or the second character “unknown”. It is determined whether or not "1" is set in any of the flags. When "1" is not set in any of the six flags corresponding to the second character (step S2406: NO), the flag of the second character corresponding to the character recognized this time in step S2407 is set to " 1 ”is set.

  When "1" is set to any of the six flags corresponding to the second character (step S2406: YES), "1" is set to any of the six flags corresponding to the third character in step S2408. ] Is set. When "1" is not set in any of the six flags corresponding to the third character (step S2408: NO), the flag of the third character corresponding to the character recognized this time in step S2409 is set to " 1 ”is set.

  When "1" is set to any of the six flags corresponding to the third character (step S2408: YES), "1" is set to any of the six flags corresponding to the fourth character in step S2410. ] Is set. When "1" is not set in any of the six flags corresponding to the fourth character (step S2410: NO), the flag of the fourth character corresponding to the character recognized this time in step S2411 is set to " 1 ”is set. In the present embodiment, “think” is grasped by two characters, and “don't think” is grasped by three characters. On the other hand, by providing the flag of the 4th character, it is recognized this time when the flag of the 2nd character is set to "1" and the flag of the 3rd character is not set. This time, when it is determined that the number of vowels in the answer given is two, the flag of the third character is set to “1”, and the flag of the fourth character is not set to “1” this time. It is determined that the number of vowels in the recognized answer is three. When the flag of the fourth character is set to "1", it is determined that the number of vowels in the answer recognized this time is four or more. On the other hand, when the words to be recognized have two and three vowels, when five or more vowels are recognized, it is considered that a word different from the recognition target is pronounced and five characters For the characters after the eye, do not set the corresponding flags.

  After step S2405, step S2407, step S2409, or step S2411, in step S2412, the flag relating to the previously recognized character is set, and "1" is set to the flag corresponding to the character recognized this time to execute the actual recognized character storage processing. finish. Specifically, when the character recognized this time is "o", "1" is set to the "o" flag last time.

  As described above, when the previously recognized character and the currently recognized character match, the character recognized this time is not stored. Character storage is limited to 4 characters. For example, when the player answers "I think" and the answer is normally recognized by the sound-light side MPU 93, three characters "o", "o", and "u" are recognized. Of these, the second character "o" is the same as the previously recognized character, and thus the storage process is not performed. Therefore, the recognition character storage process sets "1" to the first character "o" flag and the second character "u" flag, and "think" is recognized as "o" "u" by the sound-light side MPU 93. To be done. In addition, when the player replies "I don't think" and the answer is correctly recognized by the sound-light side MPU 93, five characters "o", "o", "a", "a", and "i" are recognized. To be done. Of these, the second character "o" and the fourth character "a" are the same as the previously recognized characters, and thus the storage processing is not performed. Therefore, the recognition character storage process sets "1" to the first character "o" flag, the second character "a" flag, and the third character "i" flag, and "I do not think" is set in the sound-light side MPU 93. Is recognized as "o" "a" "i".

  Returning to the description of the image determination process in FIG. 49, in step S2112, it is determined whether or not the value of the same shape counter has reached a predetermined value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the same shape counter has reached 600 (about 3 seconds). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2112, the same shape counter is cleared to "0" in step S2113, the answer grasping end flag is set to "1" in step S2114, and the comparison target is set in step S2115. After the image is erased and the answer recognition process is performed in step S2116, the main image determination process ends. Here, the answer grasp end flag is a flag that indicates that the answer is considered to have ended when the player's lip shape displacement is not recognized for a predetermined time or longer within the answer time limit. In step S2008 of the comment display process (FIG. 48), by referring to the flag, if the answer has been grasped (step S2008: YES), a reply comment or advice is displayed to grasp the answer. If is not completed (step S2008: NO), the image is taken again.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2105, step S2107, or step S2112, the positional information of the feature points of the lip region obtained this time in step S2117 is saved in the sound-light side RAM 95 as a comparison target and the main image determination is performed. The process ends. Further, after the character recognition processing is performed in step S2111, the positional information of the feature points of the lip region obtained this time is stored in the sound-light side RAM 95 as a comparison target in step S2117, and the main image determination processing ends. ..

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the answer recognition process executed in step S2116 of the image determination process (FIG. 49). The answer recognition process is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the effect this time is a conversation effect, and if it is a conversation effect (step S2501: YES), "1" is set to the first character "o" flag in step S2502. It is determined whether or not it is set. If the first character "o" flag is set to "1" (step S2502: YES), it is determined in step S2503 whether the second character "u" flag is set to "1". To do. When "1" is set in the second character "u" flag (step S2503: YES), it is determined in step S2504 whether or not the third character flag is set "1". Here, the third character flag is a third character “a” flag, a third character “i” flag, a third character “u” flag, a third character “e” flag, a third character “o” flag, and The 6th flag of the 3rd character "unknown" flag is pointed out. If "1" is not set in any of the six flags (step S2504: NO), the "think" flag is set to "1" in step S2505, and the present answer recognition process ends.

  When "1" is not set in the second character "u" flag (step S2503: NO), it is determined in step S2506 whether the second character "a" flag is set to "1". To do. When "1" is set in the second character "a" flag (step S2506: YES), it is determined in step 2607 whether the third character "i" flag is set to "1". To do. When "1" is set in the third character "i" flag (step S2507: YES), it is determined in step S2508 whether or not the fourth character flag is set "1". Here, the fourth character flag is the fourth character “a” flag, the fourth character “i” flag, the fourth character “u” flag, the fourth character “e” flag, the fourth character “o” flag, and Six flags of the 4th character "unknown" flag are pointed out. If "1" is not set in any of the six flags (step S2508: NO), the "don't think" flag is set to "1" in step S2509, and the present answer recognition process ends. ..

  The first character “o” flag is set to “1” (step S2502: YES), and the stored answer corresponds to either “o” “u” or “o” “a” “i”. If not (step S2504: YES, step S2506: NO, step S2507: NO, step S2508: YES), this answer recognition process is ended as it is. If the recognition of the first character is successful, it is highly possible that the player's lip shape is successfully recognized. In this case, if it does not correspond to any of “o” “u” or “o” “a” “i”, it is considered that another word is being spoken. For this reason, this answer recognition process is ended without performing the character number recognition process (FIG. 54) for grasping the answer by the number of characters. This can reduce the probability of erroneously recognizing different words having the same number of characters.

  When "1" is not set in the first character "o" flag (step S2502: NO), it is determined in step S2510 whether the first character "unknown" flag is set to "1". To do. When "1" is set to the "unknown" flag for the first character (step S2510: YES), the character number recognition process is performed in step S2511, and the present answer recognition process ends. The fact that the first character is an unknown character means that the player answered, but the pachinko machine 10 could not accurately grasp the answer of the player. In this case, the answer recognition rate can be increased by counting the number of characters and determining “I think” if the number of characters is two and determining “I don't think” if the number of characters is three. If "1" is not set in the first character "Unknown" flag (step S2510: NO), this answer recognition process is terminated. If the effect this time is not the conversation effect (step S2501: NO), the answer recognition process for the selected effect is performed in step S2512, and the present answer recognition process ends. This is because in the selective production, words different from those in the conversation production are identified.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the character number recognition processing executed in step S2511 of the answer recognition processing (FIG. 53). The character number recognition process is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93. The character number recognition process is performed when the first character “unknown” flag is set to “1”. Therefore, it is not necessary to determine whether "1" is set in the flag of the first character.

  First, in step S2601, it is determined whether the second character flag is set to "1". Here, the Nth character flag is an Nth character “a” flag, an Nth character “i” flag, an Nth character “u” flag, an Nth character “e” flag, an Nth character “o” flag, and It indicates the six flags of the Nth character "unknown" flag. N is any number from 2 to 4. When "1" is set in the second character flag (step S2601: YES), it is determined in step S2602 whether or not "1" is set in the third character flag. When "1" is not set in the third character flag (step S2602: NO), it means that the answer stored this time is two characters. In this case, it is considered that the player has answered "I think", and "1" is set to the "I think" flag in step S2603.

  When "1" is set in the third character flag (step S2602: YES), it is determined in step S2604 whether or not "1" is set in the fourth character flag. When "1" is not set in the fourth character flag (step S2604: NO), it means that the answer stored this time was three characters. In this case, it is considered that the player has answered "don't think", and "1" is set to the "don't think" flag in step S2605.

  If "1" is not set in the second character flag (step S2601: NO), it means that the answer stored this time is one character. Here, this character number recognition processing is started on condition that the first character "unknown" flag is set to "1". Therefore, in this case, the answer stored this time is one unknown character. For this reason, the character number recognition process is terminated without setting "1" to either the "think" flag or the "not think" flag. If "1" is set in the fourth character flag (step S2604: YES), it indicates that the answer is four characters or more. If the answer stored this time is 4 characters or more, it is possible that the player gave an answer that does not correspond to either "I think" or "I do not think". finish.

  Returning to the description of the comment display processing in FIG. 48, in step S2008, it is determined whether or not the answer grasping end flag is set to "1". The answer grasping end flag is a flag which is set to "1" when the voice emission control device 91 normally recognizes the verbal answer of the player, and in step S2114 of the image determination process (FIG. 49). "1" is set.

  When "1" is set in the answer grasp end flag (step S2008: YES), the type of comment read in the sound-light side RAM 95 in step S2009 is grasped. In a succeeding step S2010, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the "think" flag. If "1" is set in the "think" flag (step S2010: YES), the "think" flag is cleared to "0" in step S2011, and the comment corresponding to "think" in step S2012. Is transmitted to the display control device 96. As a result, the symbol display device 61 displays a reply comment corresponding to “think” read in the sound-light side RAM 95.

  When "1" is not set in the "think" flag (step S2010: NO), it is determined in step S2013 whether or not "1" is set in the "not think" flag. If "1" is set in the "not think" flag (step S2013: YES), the "not think" flag is cleared to "0" in step S2014, and "not think" is handled in step S2015. The command for the comment thus made is transmitted to the display control device 96. As a result, the symbol display device 61 displays a reply comment corresponding to "I don't think" read in the sound-light side RAM 95. After transmitting the command to the display control device 96 in step S2012 or step S2015, "1" is set in the comment display flag in step S2016.

  If "1" is not set in the "don't think" flag (step S2013: NO), a command for advice display is transmitted to the display control device 96 in step S2017, and the advice display flag is displayed in step S2018. Set "1" to. In this case, the player gives an answer, but the result is that the answer does not correspond to either "think" or "do not think". Therefore, a command for displaying "talk more clearly" is transmitted to the symbol display device 61.

  After the flag is set to "1" in step S2016 or step S2018, the reply waiting flag is cleared to "0" in step S2019, and the comment display process is ended.

  When "1" is not set in the answer grasp end flag (step S2008: NO), a command for displaying on the symbol display device 61 according to the orientation of the player's face is displayed in step S2020. After transmitting to the control device 96, in order to capture the face image of the player again in step S2021, the image capturing command flag is set to "1" and this comment display processing is terminated.

  If it is not within the reply time limit (step S2004: NO), it means that the sound light emission control device 91 has passed the reply time limit without normally recognizing the verbal answer of the player. Therefore, in step S2022, the process at the time of conversation failure is performed and the comment display process is ended.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the processing when the conversation fails, which is executed in step S2022 of the comment display processing (FIG. 48). The process when the conversation fails is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93. First, in step S2701, a conversation failure cause identifying process for identifying the reason why the voice light emission control device 91 cannot normally recognize the verbal answer of the player is performed.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the conversation failure cause identifying process executed in step S2701 of the conversation failure process (FIG. 55). The conversation failure cause identification processing is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93. First, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not more than half of the face images of the player imaged within the answer time limit this time are facing the front. The determination is performed using the value of the front facing counter and the value of the imaging counter. Specifically, if twice the value of the front facing counter is greater than or equal to the value of the image capturing counter, it is determined that the player is facing the front. When the number of face images facing the front is more than half (step S2801: YES), "1" is set to the front facing flag in step S2802. The front-facing flag is a flag indicating that the player has spent half or more of the response time limit in the front facing direction.

  When the number of face images facing the front is less than half (step S2801: NO) and after the front facing flag is set to "1" in the step S2802, the player imaged within the response time limit in the step S2803. It is determined whether or not there is a change in the lip area of the face image group. Specifically, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the flag of the first character. When the flag of the first character is set to "1", it is considered that the lip area has changed. When "1" is not set in the flag of the first character, it is considered that the lip area has not changed. If a change is found in the lip area (step S2803: YES), the mouth change flag is set to "1" in step S2804, and the conversation failure cause identification processing ends. If no change is found in the lip area (step S2803: NO), this conversation failure cause identifying process is ended.

  Returning to the explanation of the processing at the time of conversation failure (FIG. 55), it is determined in step S2702 whether or not the mouth change flag is set to “1”. The mouth change flag is set to "1" in step S2804 of the conversation failure cause identifying process (FIG. 56). If the mouth change flag is set to "1" (step S2702: YES), the mouth change flag is cleared to "0" in step S2703, and the first conversation effect flag is set to "1" in step S2704. It is determined whether or not is set.

  When "1" is set in the first conversation effect flag (step S2704: YES), "1" is set in the conversation participation flag in step S2705. The conversation participation flag is a flag indicating that the player has participated in the conversation in the conversation production as the notice production. If the player's change of mouth is recognized, it is determined that the player has the intention to participate in the conversation, and is considered to have participated in the conversation.

  After making a negative determination in step S2704 or after step S2705, it is determined in step S2706 whether or not the front facing flag is set to "1". The front-facing flag is a flag indicating that the player was mainly facing the front within the response time limit, and "1" is set in step S2802 of the conversation failure cause identifying process (FIG. 56). .. When the front facing flag is set to "1" (step S2706: YES), it is performed in step S2707 when the player is facing the front and a change in the player's mouth is recognized. A command for displaying the advice on the symbol display device 61 is transmitted to the display control device 96. Specifically, the advice "Please speak clearly next time" is displayed on the symbol display device 61. If "1" is not set in the front-facing flag (step S2706: NO), in step S2708, it is performed when the player is facing away from the front and a change in the player's mouth is recognized. The command for displaying the advice to be displayed on the symbol display device 61 is transmitted to the display control device 96. Specifically, the symbol display device 61 displays the advice “Next, look straight ahead and talk”.

  If "1" is not set in the mouth change flag (step S2702: NO), it is determined in step S2709 whether or not the front facing flag is set to "1". When the front facing flag is set to "1" (step S2709: YES), in step S2710, the player is facing the front and no change in the player's mouth is recognized. The display control device 96 transmits a display-related command to the display control device 96. As a result, it is considered that the player did not intend to participate in the conversation production, and "..." Is displayed on the symbol display device 61. When "1" is not set in the front facing flag (step S2709: NO), in step 2711, the display corresponding to the case where the player is facing away from the front and no mouth change is recognized The command is transmitted to the display controller 96. As a result, the advice "Please look straight ahead and talk" is displayed on the symbol display device 61.

  After transmitting the command to the display control device 96 in step S2707, step S2708, step S2710 and step S2711, it is determined in step S2712 whether "1" is set in the first conversation effect flag. When "1" is set to the first conversation effect flag (step S2712: YES), the first conversation effect flag is cleared to "0" in step S2713. When "1" is not set in the first conversation effect flag (step S2712: NO), the second conversation effect flag is cleared to "0" in step S2714. After the conversation effect flag is cleared to "0" in step S2713 or step S2714, the front facing flag is cleared to "0" in step S2715, and the advice displaying flag is set to "1" in step S2716. In step S2717, the reply waiting flag is cleared to "0" and the processing when the main conversation fails is ended.

  Returning to the explanation of the comment display processing in FIG. 48, when "1" is set in the comment displaying flag (step S2001: YES) or when "1" is set in the advice displaying flag (step S2002: If YES, a conversation effect ending process is performed in step S2023, and the comment displaying process is ended.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the conversation effect ending process executed in step S2023 of the comment display process (FIG. 48). The conversation effect ending process is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S2901, it is determined whether 3 seconds have elapsed since the comment display flag or the advice display flag was set to "1". The 3 seconds is the time for displaying the comment display or the advice display on the symbol display device 61. If 3 seconds have elapsed since the comment displaying flag or the advice displaying flag was set to "1" (step S2901: YES), "1" is set to the comment displaying flag in step S2902. It is determined whether or not there is. If "1" is set to the comment displaying flag (step S2902: YES), the comment displaying flag is cleared to "0" in step S2903. If "1" is not set in the comment displaying flag (step S2902: NO), the advice displaying flag is cleared to "0" in step S2904.

  After the flag is cleared to "0" in step S2903 or step S2904, the front facing counter is cleared to "0" in step S2905, the image pickup counter is cleared to "0" in step S2906, and in step S2907. A command for enlarging and displaying the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 is transmitted to the display control device 96. In step S2908, it is determined whether the first conversation effect flag is set to "1". If the first conversation effect flag is set to "1" (step S2908: YES), the process proceeds to step S2909. Then, the first conversation effect flag is cleared to "0" and the main conversation effect end process is ended. If "1" is not set in the first conversation effect flag (step S2908: NO), the second conversation effect flag is cleared to "0" in step S2910, and the main conversation effect ending process ends. If 3 seconds have not elapsed since the comment displaying flag or the advice displaying flag was set to "1" (step S2901: NO), the conversation production ending process is ended as it is.

  Returning to the explanation of the comment display processing of FIG. 48, when “1” is not set in the reply waiting flag (step S2003: NO) or when “1” is not set in the imaging command flag (step S2005: NO) Ends the comment display process.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the second conversation production process executed in step S501 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). The processing for the second conversation effect is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93. First, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the second conversation effect flag is set. Here, the second-time conversation effect flag is a flag indicating that the conversation effect is being executed as the reach effect, and is a flag set in step S3006 of the second-time conversation effect process.

  When "1" is not set in the second conversation effect flag (step S3001: NO), the second conversation effect is referred to in step S3002 with reference to the base data table loaded in the sound-light side RAM 95. It is determined whether or not it is the start timing of.

  If it is the start timing of the second conversation effect (step S3002: YES), the color of the cut-in image read to the sound-light side RAM 95 is grasped in step S3003, and the cut-in is executed in step S3004. A command for doing so is transmitted to the display control device 96. In a succeeding step S3005, it is determined whether or not the conversation participation flag is set to "1". If the conversation participation flag is set to "1" (step S3005: YES), the second conversation effect flag is set to "1" in step S3006, and the conversation participation flag is set to "0" in step S3007. After clearing, the process for the second conversation effect is finished. As a result, when the player participates in the first conversation effect, the second conversation effect is executed. On the other hand, when the player does not participate in the first conversation effect, only the cut-in occurs and the second conversation effect is not executed.

  When "1" is set in the second conversation effect flag (step S3001: YES), the question display process is executed in step S3008 and the second second conversation effect process is ended. The question display process (FIG. 47) is the same as the question display process (step S1806 in FIG. 46) of the conversation production process. If it is not the start timing of the second conversation effect (step S3002: NO) or the conversation participation flag is not set to "1" (step S3005: NO), the second conversation effect is used as it is. The process ends.

  In conversation production, cut-in occurs at the start of production. The color of the cut-in image allows the player to know the degree of expectation of a jackpot result in the current game. The question is displayed after the cut-in occurs, and then the options are displayed. As a result, it is possible to increase the probability that the player answers "I think" or "Do not think", and it is possible to increase the answer recognition rate.

  An image of how the player answers is picked up, and feature points are extracted from the obtained image to grasp the answer. When grasping the answer, the vowel produced from the lip shape is grasped. Successive identical vowels are counted as one sound. Also, the number of closed states varies depending on how the player answers, and is therefore not counted. When the displacement of the lip shape per predetermined time is small, it can be regarded as the sound generation. When the displacement of the lip shape is small for a certain period of time or longer, it is considered that the player's answer is completed. The player's answer is made by collating the number of characters, in addition to collating each sound. As a result, the answer recognition rate can be increased while minimizing the possibility of false detection of an answer. When the player makes an answer, a display corresponding to the orientation of the player's face is displayed on the symbol display device 61. As a result, it is more likely that an answer will be made in a state of facing the front of the symbol display device 61, the false detection rate of the answer can be reduced, and the answer recognition rate can be increased.

  When the answer is successfully grasped, a reply comment to the player's answer is displayed. This allows the player to know in more detail the degree of expectation that will result in a jackpot in the current game. In addition, when the answer grasping fails, the advice for increasing the answer recognition rate is displayed on the symbol display device 61. As a result, it is possible to increase the probability of successful conversation in the subsequent conversation production.

<Selective production>
Next, the content of the selected effect and the control content for enabling execution of the selected effect will be described. The selection effect is an effect that is set as a type of reach effect. In the selection effect, after the fluctuation starts, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3 are stopped, and the player is queried at the timing when only the symbol row Z2 is scrolling. When the player verbally answers the question, a super reach effect corresponding to the player's answer is developed. An inquiry is made to the player on the symbol display device 61, and two options are presented to the player at the timing. It should be noted that, regardless of which option is selected by the player, the reach effect length and the jackpot expectation degree are the same. If no verbal selection is made, the normal long reach effect of the same length is executed.

  The selection effect will be described with reference to FIG. 59. As shown in FIG. 59 (a), after the start of fluctuation, all of the three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have changed. Thereafter, the symbol row Z1 is stopped as shown in FIG. 59 (b). Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), the symbol row Z3 is stopped and only the symbol row Z2 is changed. In this state, as shown in FIG. 59 (d), the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are reduced and displayed on the lower left of the symbol display device 61, and "the straight screen is seen, red or green is displayed on the symbol display device 61." Please speak and select. ”Is displayed. The inquiry is displayed as characters in the inquiry display area 165 of the pattern display device 61 and is not reproduced as voice.

  At the same time as inquiring, the symbol display device 61 displays two options and an answer time limit display bar 163. While the answer time limit display bar 163 is displayed, the face of the player is imaged in order to grasp the verbal answer of the player. When the sound emission control device 91 normally recognizes the player's answer within the answer time limit, the super reach effect selected by the player is executed. On the other hand, when the sound emission control device 91 cannot normally grasp the player's answer within the answer time limit, the image pickup of the player's face is finished and the normal long reach effect is executed.

  The flow of the entire selection effect will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 60 (a) to 60 (c) show the variable periods of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3, FIG. 60 (d) shows the period of selective effect, and FIG. 60 (e) shows the period of super reach effect.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to (c), when the variation of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started at the timing of t1, the symbol row Z1 is stopped at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 60 (a). At the same time, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the symbol row Z3 is stopped at the timing of t3. As shown in FIG. 60 (d), the selection effect starts at the timing of subsequent t4, and as shown in FIGS. 60 (d) and 60 (e), the selection effect ends and is selected at the timing of t5. Super reach production or normal long reach production of the same length as super reach production is started. Then, as shown in FIGS. 60 (b) and 60 (e), the reach effect ends at the timing of t6 and the symbol row Z2 stops.

  Next, the detailed flow of the selection effect will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. Super reach production is composed of a story part and a lingering part. In the story portion, an image along a certain story is displayed on the symbol display device 61. The story part is structured so that the contents can be grasped by looking from the beginning to the end. In the afterglow part, an image related to the content of the story is displayed on the symbol display device 61. Specifically, it consists of a slide show that collects important scenes from the story. Therefore, there is no story in the afterglow part, and there is no discomfort even if it is cut off in the middle.

  FIG. 61 (a) shows the period during which the selective production is performed, FIG. 61 (b) shows the period during which the story part of the super reach production is executed, and FIG. 61 (c) shows the reverberation part of the super reach production. It shows the displayed period. Further, FIG. 61 (d) is a period in which the symbol display device 61 is displayed for inquiring about the player, options, answer limit time, and face direction advice, and FIG. 61 (e) is a period during which imaging is performed. Yes, FIG. 61 (f) shows the timing when the voice emission control device 91 recognizes the answer and finishes all the imaging.

  First, a case will be described in which the voice emission control device 91 normally recognizes the player's answer at an early stage of the answer time limit. As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the selection effect starts at the timing of t1, and at the timing as shown in FIG. 61 (d), the symbol display device 61 is queried for the player, the options, the response time limit, and the face. The direction advice is displayed and, as shown in FIG. 61 (e), imaging for grasping the player's answer is started.

  When the sound emission control device 91 normally grasps the player's answer at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 61 (f) and completes all the imaging, the selection effect is made at that timing as shown in FIG. 61 (a). finish. Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (d), the display of the inquiry to the player, the options, the answer limit time, and the advice regarding the face orientation is ended, and the imaging is stopped as shown in FIG. 61 (e). Then, at the timing, the story portion of the super reach effect is started on the symbol display device 61.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the story portion of the super reach effect ends at the timing of t3, and as shown in FIG. 61 (c), the reverberation portion of the super reach effect begins. The length of the story part of the super reach production is equal and constant to the length of the normal long reach production. In the normal long reach effect, the display is started after the answer time limit has expired, and the length is set to complete. Therefore, when the voice emission control device 91 grasps the player's answer and the story portion of the super reach effect starts before the answer time limit ends, the story is always completed. As shown in FIG. 61C, at the timing of the subsequent t4, the afterglow portion of the super reach effect ends, and the super reach effect ends.

  The story part cannot be grasped unless it is watched for a predetermined time from the beginning to the end. Therefore, it is not possible to cut the story part in the middle. On the other hand, the afterglow part is configured so that it does not feel discomfort even if it is cut off on the way. Therefore, the display time of the story part is constant, but the display time of the entire super reach effect including the afterglow part can be expanded and contracted.

  Super reach production is executed after grasping the player's answer. If the super reach performance is executed some time after the player finishes answering, the player's own answer will be displayed on the pachinko machine until the super reach performance is executed after finishing the response. It is not possible to judge whether or not it is recognized by 10. Therefore, it is necessary for the super reach effect to be executed promptly after the player finishes the answer. However, there are individual differences in the response times of the players. Therefore, the super reach performance may start early or may start late. On the other hand, since the display time of the entire super reach effect can be expanded and contracted, the time from the start of the selection effect to the end of the super reach effect can be kept constant.

  Next, a case will be described in which the voice emission control device 91 grasps the player's answer at a stage where the answer time limit is late. As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the selective effect is started at the timing of t5, and as shown in FIG. 61 (f), the sound emission control device grasps the player's answer at the timing of t6 and finishes the entire imaging. Becomes As shown in FIG. 61A, the selection effect ends at the timing. That is, the selected effect is performed from t5 to t6. As shown in FIG. 61 (d), the symbol display device 61 displays inquiries to the player, options, answer time limit, and advice regarding the orientation of the face, as shown in FIG. 61 (e). Imaging is performed to understand the player's answer.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the story portion of the super reach effect started at the timing of t6 ends at the timing of t7, and as shown in FIG. 61 (c), the story of the super reach effect starts at the timing of t7. The afterglow part ends at the timing of t8.

  Here, the time of the story part of the super reach production is always constant. That is, the length from t2 to t3 and the length from t6 to t7 are the same. When the player's answer is grasped early, the period of the selection effect is shortened and the reverberation part of the super reach effect is lengthened. Specifically, the length from t5 to t6 is longer than the length from t1 to t2. Further, the length from t7 to t8 is shorter than the length from t3 to t4. In this way, the start timing and the end timing of the story portion of the super reach production are changed depending on the timing when the voice emission control device 91 grasps the answer of the player, but the story of the super reach production is always the same length and is completed. Is set to. The difference in the start timing of the story part of the super reach production is absorbed by the expansion and contraction of the afterglow part of the super reach production. Therefore, the time from the start of the selective effect to the end of the reverberant portion of the super reach effect is always constant. Specifically, the time from t1 to t4 and the time from t5 to t8 are the same.

  Next, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 62 in which the voice emission control device 91 cannot grasp the player's answer within the answer time limit and the normal long reach effect is executed. FIG. 62 (a) shows a period during which the selection effect is performed, FIG. 62 (b) shows a period during which the normal long reach effect is executed, and FIG. 62 (c) shows the symbol display device 61 to the player. Inquiries, choices, answer time limits, and a period during which advice regarding face orientation is displayed, FIG. 62D illustrates a period during which imaging is performed, and FIG. 62E illustrates a symbol display device in which advice is provided to the player. The period displayed in 61 is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), the selection effect starts at the timing of t1 and ends at the timing of t2. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), the question display to the player, the options, the answer limit time, and the advice display regarding the face orientation are also started at the timing of t1 and ended at the timing of t2. Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (d), the imaging of the player's face is also started at the timing of t1 and ended at the timing of t2. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (e), the display of the advice to the player, which is performed after the reply time limit has elapsed, starts at the timing of t2 and ends at the timing of t3. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the normal long reach effect starts at the timing of t3 and ends at the timing of t4. Here, the period from t1 to t4 in FIG. 62, the period from t1 to t4 in FIG. 61, and the period from t5 to t8 are equal. In this way, the time from the start to the end of the selective effect is constant regardless of whether or not the player answers.

  Next, the base data table in the case where the selection effect is performed will be described. FIG. 63 is a base data table relating to display control of selection effects. The base data table, the base data table for the red super reach effect, and the base data table for the green super reach effect are stored in the sound light side ROM 94, and are expanded in the sound light side RAM 95 to be selected and the subsequent reach effect. The performance is performed.

  In the base data table of FIG. 63, variation start timing, selection effect start timing, answer limit time end timing, advice display start timing, advice display end timing, and normal long reach start timing are recorded. As shown in FIG. 63, when the pointer is at the position of "0", the variation of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started. Then, when the pointer is at the position "a", the selection effect is started, and when the pointer is at the position "b", the player's answer time limit ends.

  The symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 are reduced and displayed during the selection effect, and the super reach effect selected by the player is started at the timing when the answer of the player is grasped. Here, the timing at which the player's answer is grasped is indefinite. By reading out three of the base data table regarding the display for the selection effect, the base data table for the red super reach effect, and the base data table for the green super reach effect to the sound-light side RAM 95, at any timing within the answer time limit. Even after the player's grasp of the answer is completed, the super reach effect selected by the player can be immediately executed by changing the reference base data table. Specifically, until the player's answer is grasped, the base data table regarding the display for the selection effect is referred to, and after grasping the answer, the base data table for the red super reach effect or the base data for the green super reach effect. Browse to one of the tables. On the other hand, when the player's answer grasp is not completed within the answer time limit, the base data table of FIG. 63 is referred to as it is. Specifically, when the pointer is at the position of "b + 1", the display of the advice to the player is started, and when the advice display is finished when the pointer is at the position of "c", the pointer becomes "c + 1". Normal long reach production is started when in the position.

  64 is a flowchart showing the selection effect process executed in step S502 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). The selection effect process is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93.

  In step S401 of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13) executed by the main MPU 83, the fluctuation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93. The sound-light side MPU 93 reads the display duration time from the information included in the variation command in step S602 of the main side command handling process (FIG. 15). The display duration depends on the type of reach effect. There is a variable time peculiar to the selection effect in the selection effect. When the specific display duration time is included in the variation command transmitted from the main MPU 83, the sound-light MPU 93 determines to perform the selection effect in the current game time.

  First, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the selection effect flag. Here, the selection effect flag is a flag indicating that the selection effect is being executed, and is set in step S3106 of the selection effect process.

  If "1" is not set in the selection effect flag (step S3101: NO), in step S3102, the base data table loaded in the sound-light side RAM is referred to and the selection effect start timing is set. Determine whether or not there is.

  If it is the start timing of the selection effect (step S3102: YES), in step S3103 a command for displaying a question to the player and options of the question on the symbol display device 61 is transmitted to the display control device 96. At the same time, in a succeeding step S3104, a command for displaying the reply time limit on the symbol display device 61 is transmitted to the display control device 96.

  In step S3105, "1" is set in the image capturing command flag in order to image the player's face. Then, in step S3106, the selection effect flag is set to "1", and in the subsequent step S3107, the answer waiting flag is set to "1" to end the main selection effect. Here, the reply waiting flag is a flag that indicates a state in which the question to the player is displayed on the symbol display device 61 and is waiting for the reply from the player.

  If the selected effect flag is set to "1" (step S3101: YES), it is determined in step S3108 whether or not the reply waiting flag is set to "1". When the reply waiting flag is set to "1" (step S3108: YES), it is within the reply time limit by referring to the base data table loaded in the sound / light side RAM 95 in step S3109. Or not. If it is within the answer time limit (step S3109: YES), it is determined in step S3110 whether or not "1" is set in the imaging completion flag. When "1" is not set in the image capturing completion flag (step S3110: NO), the main selection effect process is ended as it is. If "1" has been set in the image capturing completion flag (step S3110: YES), the image capturing completion flag is cleared to "0" in step S3111, image determination processing is performed in step S3112, and in subsequent step S3113. The command transmission process for super reach production is performed and the main selection production is ended.

  Here, in the image determination process, the same process as the image determination process for conversation production (FIG. 49) is performed, but since the player speaks different words when answering, there are some differences. Specifically, the answer recognition process (FIG. 53) and the character number recognition process (FIG. 54) are different. In place of these processes, in the selection effect, the answer recognition process for selection effect (step S2512) is performed in the answer recognition process (FIG. 53). Hereinafter, the answer recognition process for the selection effect (step S2512) will be described.

  In the answer recognition process (FIG. 53) of the conversation production, in step S2502 to step S2509, it is determined whether or not the answer grasped this time is "ou", and if the determination is affirmative, the "think" flag is set to "1". Is set and "1" is set to the "don't think" flag when a positive determination is made by determining whether or not the answer grasped this time is "oai". If the first character “unknown” flag is set to “1” in step S2510, the process proceeds to the character number recognition process (FIG. 54). The same applies to the answer recognition process for the selection effect (step S2512 in FIG. 53). First, it is determined whether or not the answer grasped this time is "a", and when a positive determination is made, "1" is set to the "red" flag. Specifically, if the first character "a" flag is set to "1" and the second character flag is not set to "1", the answer grasped this time is "a". judge. The vowel of "aka" is "aa", and two identical vowels are consecutive. Therefore, red is recognized as "a".

  Next, it is determined whether or not the answer grasped this time is "ioi", and when a positive determination is made, "1" is set to the "green" flag. Specifically, the first character “i” flag, the second character “o” flag, and the third character “i” flag are set to “1”, and the fourth character flag is set to “1”. If not, it is determined that the answer grasped this time is “ioi”. Since the vowel of "midori" is "ioi", green is recognized as "ioi". If the first character "Unknown" flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to the character number recognition process for selective effect.

  Next, the number-of-characters recognition process for selective effect will be described. In the character number recognition process for conversation production (FIG. 54), in step S2601 to step S2605, it is determined whether or not the answer grasped this time is two characters, and if an affirmative determination is made, "1" is set in the "think" flag. Is set, and it is determined whether or not the answer grasped this time is three characters, and if an affirmative determination is made, "1" is set to the "don't think" flag. The same applies to the character number recognition processing for selective presentation. First, it is determined whether or not the answer grasped this time is one character, and when a positive determination is made, "1" is set to the "red" flag. Specifically, when “1” is not set in the flag of the second character, it is determined that the answer grasped this time is “a”. As a result, even when the player answers red and recognizes the lip shape of the vowel "a" as an unknown character, the player's answer is correctly recognized.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the answer grasped this time is three characters, and when a positive determination is made, "1" is set to the "green" flag. Specifically, when the flag of the third character is set to "1" and the flag of the fourth character is not set to "1", the answer grasped this time is "ioi". judge. As a result, even if the player answers green and recognizes the lip shape of the vowel "i" of the first character as an unknown character, the player's answer is correctly recognized.

  Returning to the explanation of the selection effect process in FIG. 64, if the answer time limit is exceeded (step S3109: NO), the type of advice displayed on the symbol display device 61 is grasped in step S3114. The advice is the same as the advice in the conversation production. That is, when the player is facing the front and a change in the lip shape is confirmed, “Next time speak clearly” is displayed, and the player is facing away from the front and the lip shape is changed. When the change is confirmed, "Please look straight ahead and talk" is displayed. These pieces of advice are displayed when the player's answer is not normally grasped by the voice emission control device 91 within the answer time limit. In a succeeding step S3115, a command for displaying the advice on the symbol display device 61 is transmitted to the display control device 96. After that, in step S3116, the advice display flag is set to "1", and in step S3117 the answer waiting flag is cleared to "0", and the main selection effect is finished. Here, the advice display flag is a flag indicating that the sound emission control device 91 is displaying an advice to the player on the symbol display device 61 to make it easier to understand the answer.

  When "1" is not set in the reply waiting flag (step S3108: NO), it is determined in step S3118 whether or not the advice display flag is set to "1". When the advice display flag is set to "1" (step S3118: YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the advice display flag was set to "1" in step S3119. Specifically, it is determined whether or not 3 seconds for displaying the advice on the symbol display device 61 have elapsed. When a negative determination is made in step S3119, a normal long reach effect command is transmitted to the display control device 96 in step S3120. As a result, the normal long reach effect is displayed on the symbol display device 61. After that, the advice display flag is cleared to "0" in step S3121, the selection effect flag is cleared to "0" in step S3122, and the main selection effect is ended. When a negative determination is made in step S3102, step S3118, or step S3119, the main selection effect is ended as it is.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the super reach production command transmission processing executed in step S3113 of the selection production processing (FIG. 64). The super-reach effect command transmission process is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the answer grasp end flag is set to "1". If the answer grasping end flag is set to "1" (step S3201: YES), it is determined in step S3202 whether the player's answer is red. If the player's answer is red (step S3202: YES), a red super reach effect command is transmitted to the display control device 96 in step S3203. On the other hand, when the player's answer is green (step S3202: NO), a green super reach effect command is transmitted to the display control device 96 in step S3204.

  The target age is different between red super reach production and green super reach production. Specifically, in the red super reach production, characters for the elderly appear and the story develops, and in the green super reach production, characters for the young appear and the story develops. As a result, the player can enjoy the super reach effect according to his or her age.

  After transmitting the command to the display control device 96 in step S3203 or step S3204, the answer grasp end flag is cleared to "0" in step S3205, the response waiting flag is cleared to "0" in step S3206, and the process proceeds to step S3207. Then, the selection effect flag is cleared to "0" and the command transmitting process for the super reach effect is ended.

  If "1" is not set in the answer grasp end flag (step S3201: NO), the face orientation of the player is determined in step S3208 as in step S2020 in the comment display process (FIG. 48) of the conversation effect. Is transmitted to the display control device 96, and in step S3209, in order to capture the face image of the player again, "1" is set in the image capturing command flag and the present answer is grasped. The termination process is terminated.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

  In the conversation production, a process of grasping the verbal answer of the player is performed, and a reply comment corresponding to the player's answer grasped by the process is displayed. The player recognizes that he / she had a conversation with the pachinko machine 10. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense that he or she is actively participating in the game, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by talking with the pachinko machine 10 which normally uses only hands to play, the player moves his mouth in addition to his hands. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with a novel effect. Furthermore, the player thinks the question displayed on the symbol display device 61 of the pachinko machine 10 and performs an operation of selecting an answer. This allows the player's attention to be focused on the pachinko machine 10 centered on the symbol display device 61.

  In the conversation production, a question is displayed to the player during the fluctuation of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 to prompt a verbal answer, the player's answer is grasped and a reply comment is displayed. Therefore, the player can participate in the conversation production without getting bored until the first symbol row Z1 is stopped. In addition, the player can know the degree of expectation that is a jackpot result in the current game, from the reply comment displayed in the conversation production. Since the player can know the degree of expectation of the jackpot result in the current game time before the first symbol row Z1 is stopped, he is interested in the conversation production.

  In conversation production, cut-in of a blue image or a red image occurs at the start of production. The color of the cut-in image informs the player of the first information regarding the degree of expectation of a jackpot result in the current game. In addition, a comment displayed on the symbol display device 61 immediately before the end of the conversation effect informs the player of final information regarding the degree of expectation of the current game time. In other words, the player is not informed of the expectation of the current game time twice, but in two times. As a result, it becomes possible to keep the player's interest in the degree of expectation of the current game time throughout the conversation production.

  In the conversation production, when the player verbally answers, the direction of the player's face is displayed on the symbol display device 61, and when the player's face is facing the front, a "○" mark indicates the game. When the person's face is facing other than the front, an "x" mark is displayed. Further, when the "x" mark is displayed, a tip is displayed to inform the player which direction the player should face to face. This makes it easy for the player to answer with the front facing. By capturing the face of the player at the time of answering from the front, it becomes easy to understand the answer from the face image of the player.

  In the conversation production, two options are displayed on the symbol display device 61 when the player verbally answers. This increases the possibility that the player will select one of the displayed two options and respond. By narrowing down the types of words that the player may answer, it becomes easier for the player to understand the answer.

  The Roman letters of the two alternatives are "omou" and "omowanai", respectively, and the last words are "u" and "i", respectively. Therefore, even if the number of characters of the word cannot be grasped, it is possible to grasp the answer of the player if the last character can be grasped. Since the shape of the lip region when the last character is pronounced is greatly different, false detection of an answer is unlikely to occur.

  The expected answer "I think" or "I don't think" is first grasped as a character string "ou" or "oai". When the answer cannot be grasped by this method, the answer is grasped by the number of characters. If it is 2 characters, it will be recognized as "I think", and if it is 3 characters, it will be recognized as "I don't think". As a result, even if the lip shape is not read well and it is recognized as another character or as an unknown character, the player's answer is correctly grasped.

  When a blue image cut-in occurs in the conversation effect as the notice effect, the conversation effect as the reach effect is executed with a predetermined probability. In this case, in the conversation effect as the notice effect and the conversation effect as the reach effect, the comment reflecting the degree of expectation of the current game is displayed on the symbol display device 61 one by one. Accordingly, even if the cut-in image is blue in the conversation effect as the notice effect, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game times without discouraging the player.

  At the end of the conversation production, the symbol display device 61 displays the advice for the player to face and answer. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that a player who has an intention to participate in the conversation production and cannot participate successfully this time can participate in the next conversation production successfully.

  In the conversation production, the option selected by the player is not displayed on the symbol display device 61. Therefore, even if the sound-light side MPU 93 erroneously detects the content verbally answered by the player, the player can finish the conversation without feeling discomfort.

  In the conversation production, a cut-in is generated immediately after the production is started, and the player is informed early about the information regarding the probability of a big hit in the current game. As a result, the player's interest in conversation production can be increased and the participation rate in conversation production can be increased.

  When understanding the player's answer, consecutive vowels are counted as one sound. As a result, the same result can be obtained whether the player pronounces one sound long or short.

  The player's answer is grasped from the position information of the feature points extracted from the lip shape. If the displacement of the feature points per predetermined time is large, the character recognition process is not performed, and if the displacement is small, the character recognition process is executed. As a result, the transition state from when the player pronounces one sound until when the next one sound is pronounced can be excluded from the target of the character recognition processing. The transition state includes a possibility that a lip shape not intended by the player may be detected, which may cause a false detection of an answer. By excluding the transition state from the target of character recognition processing, the probability of false detection can be reduced.

  When the displacement of the feature points in the lip area continues to be small for a certain period of time or more, it is considered that the player's answer is completed. If the closed state is used as a criterion for the player's answer end, the player's answer end timing may be incorrect. Specifically, there is a possibility that the moment when the player closes his mouth to pronounce a specific character during the answer is regarded as the answer end timing. By using the displacement amount of the feature point as a reference, the end of the answer is determined after the movement of the mouth of the player has stopped.

  When the player's answer is grasped early, the reply comment is displayed on the symbol display device 61 at the timing. As a result, conversation production can be performed at a tempo close to that of actual conversation.

  When the player replies "I think", the reply comment displayed on the symbol display device 61 as a confirmation notice is displayed on the symbol display device 61 as something other than the confirmation notice when the player replies "I don't think". It is different from the reply comment. Similarly, the reply comment displayed on the symbol display device 61 as a final notice when the player replies "I don't think" is a symbol display device other than the final notice when the player replies "I think". It is different from the reply comment displayed in 61. As a result, when the player answers "I think" and the pachinko machine 10 erroneously recognizes as "I don't think", or when the player replies "I do not think" and the pachinko machine 10 incorrectly recognizes as "I think". Also in, it is possible to avoid confusing the player with respect to the result of the game.

  When the reply comment has the same word, the case where the color of the first cut-in image is red is higher than the case where the color is blue. This makes it possible to inform the player of a more detailed degree of expectation by the reply comment without betraying the expectation given to the player by the first cut-in.

  The first conversation effect is performed during the notice effect period, and the second conversation effect is performed during the reach effect period. In the second conversation production, when the red cut-in occurs, the degree of expectation that is a jackpot result is higher than when the red cut-in occurs in the first conversation production. In addition, the probability of a jackpot result when the blue cut-in occurs in the second conversation production is lower than that when the blue cut-in occurs in the first conversation production. In this way, the cut-in color of the second conversation effect has more accurate information about the expectation than the cut-in color of the first conversation effect. By gradually increasing the accuracy of the expectation information to be notified to the player, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in conversation production for a long period of time.

  When the player does not participate in the first conversation effect, the second conversation effect ends only with the occurrence of the cut-in. As described above, when the player does not intend to participate in the conversation production, the player is not bored by not repeating the production in which the player has little interest.

  In the conversation production, when the player verbally answers the question displayed on the symbol display device 61, the reply comment displayed on the symbol display device 61 thereafter changes. Further, in the selection effect, the player verbally selects the type of the super reach effect, so that the effect thereafter changes. In this way, the subsequent effect can be changed by an operation mode different from the manual operation. By providing such an operation mode, it is possible to provide novel contents regarding the effect executed in a mode corresponding to the motion of the player.

  In the selection effect, the player can verbally select the type of super reach effect, which is performed by developing the reach effect. As a result, the player has the impression that he or she has actively selected a performance, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  The super reach production has a storyline, and is composed of a story part that gives the player a feeling of discomfort if it is interrupted, and a slide show that does not give the player a feeling of discomfort even if it is interrupted. Further, the maximum display time of the afterglow part of the super reach effect is set to be longer than the period in which the answer grasping end timing can be set in the answer limit time. Therefore, even if the player finishes the answer at any timing during the answer time limit, the player can immediately move to the super reach effect, and at any time within the answer time limit, the display of the super reach effect is started. Even in this case, the super reach effect can be ended without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. Thereby, the time from the start of the selection effect to the end of the super reach effect can be kept constant.

  In the selection effect, three of a base data table relating to the display for the selection effect, a base data table for the red super reach effect, and a base data table for the green super reach effect are read to the sound-light side RAM 95. Refer to the base data table regarding the display of the selection effect until the selection effect, and at the timing when the player's answer grasp is completed, depending on the answer result of the player, the base data table for the red super reach effect or the green super reach effect By changing the reference destination to the base data table, either of the super reach effects can be executed immediately when the player's answer grasp is completed at any timing within the answer time limit. As a result, the selection effect can be advanced according to the player's arbitrariness.

  The choices that the player can select in the selection effect are “red” or “green”. By image analysis, "red" is recognized as "a", and "green" is recognized as "i", "o", and "i". The two character strings that are recognized are different and the number of characters is also different. Therefore, it is possible to increase the answer recognition rate while suppressing the possibility that the player's answer is erroneously detected.

  Both the option "think" in the conversation production and the option "green" in the selection production are three hiragana characters, but the productions are different and the timing at which the player answers is different. In step S2501 of the answer recognition process of FIG. 53, it is determined whether or not it is a conversation effect, and if it is not a conversation effect, an answer recognition process for selection effect (step S2512) is executed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can identify the two options.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the effect displayed as a notice is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a continuous conversation effect in which the player can answer a plurality of questions displayed on the symbol display device 61 is performed. Hereinafter, the content of the effect and the control content for enabling execution of the effect will be described.

  The continuous conversation production is a production set as a type of notice production. Immediately after the start of fluctuation, the question to the player is displayed on the symbol display device 61. When the player answers the question, a new question is displayed. When the player responds to the second inquiry, a notice in which the player's response and the expectation of the jackpot are reflected is displayed. The player can know the degree of expectation of the jackpot at the game time from the relationship between the player's answer and the notice. Hereinafter, the content of the continuous conversation effect and the control content for enabling execution of the continuous conversation effect will be described.

  With reference to FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c), how the continuous conversation effect progresses will be described. First, at the start of fluctuation, three variable symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed on the symbol display device 61. In this state, when the continuous conversation effect starts, the three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are reduced and displayed in the left corner area 161 of the symbol display device 61. The three symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are always reduced and displayed in the left corner area 161 of the symbol display device 61 during continuous conversation production. In the continuous conversation production, first, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the symbol display device 61 is divided and displayed in two colors, red and green. Then, in the inquiry display area 165, an inquiry "Please look straight at the screen and say whether you like red or green" is displayed. This prompts the player to look directly at the symbol display device 61 and answer. In addition, the colors presented as options are "Aka", which has two letters in hiragana, and "Midori", which has three letters in hiragana. Further, the two vowels when pronounced "aka" are both "a", while the three vowels when pronounced "midori" are "i" and "o". a "is not included. Therefore, the sound emission control device 91 is set so as to easily recognize the difference in the shape of the mouth when grasping the answer of the player. A reply time limit display bar 163 is also displayed on the symbol display device 61 at the same time as the inquiry display area 165. The reply time limit display bar 163 represents the reply time limit, and plays a role of clearly indicating to the player the remaining time that can be answered.

  When the player's answer is normally recognized within the time limit by the sound emission control device 91, the second question is continuously displayed as shown in FIG. 66 (b). Specifically, the symbol display device 61 is divided and displayed in two colors, red and yellow. Then, in the inquiry display area 165, an inquiry "Please look straight at the screen and say whether you like red or yellow" is displayed. The colors to be presented as options are "Aka", which has two letters in hiragana, and "Kiiro", which has three letters in hiragana. Further, the vowels of the two letters when pronounced "aka" are both "a", whereas the three vowels when pronounced "kiiro" are "i" and "o". a "is not included. Therefore, the sound emission control device 91 is set so as to easily recognize the difference in the shape of the mouth when grasping the answer of the player.

  When the player's answer to the second inquiry is normally grasped within the time limit by the sound emission control device 91, a notice screen is displayed on the symbol display device 61 as shown in FIG. 66 (c). It The notice screen is composed of one or two colors. The high expectations and low expectations screens reflect the player's answers and the jackpot expectations. Specifically, as shown in the table of FIG. 67, in the case of the confirmation notification that informs the player that the result of this game time is the jackpot result, a rainbow-colored notice is displayed. At the game time when the expectation of the jackpot is high, a notice screen including the color answered by the player is displayed. On the other hand, at the game times when the expectation of the jackpot is low, a notice screen that does not include the color answered by the player is displayed. The player can know the expectation degree of the big hit in the game time from the relationship between the color that the player answered and the color of the notice screen.

  On the other hand, in each conversation, when the voice emission control device 91 cannot normally grasp the answer of the player, the continuous conversation effect is finished as it is, and the notice screen is not displayed. For example, in the second inquiry, when the player's answer is not normally grasped, the notice line is not displayed after the answer limit time has elapsed, and the symbol array that has been reduced and displayed on the symbol display device 61 is displayed. Z1 to Z3 are enlarged and displayed. Further, in the case of the first inquiry, if the player's answer is not normally grasped, the second inquiry is not displayed after the answer limit time has elapsed and is reduced and displayed on the symbol display device 61. The symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 are enlarged and displayed.

  The flow of continuous conversation production will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 68 (a) to (c) show the variable periods of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3, FIG. 68 (d) shows the period of the first conversation effect, and FIG. 68 (e) shows the period of the second conversation effect. Indicates.

  First, a case will be described in which the sound emission control device 91 normally grasps the player's answer in both of the two conversations. As shown in FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (c), when the variation of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 is started at the timing of t1, the first conversation effect is shown at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 68 (d). Be started. Specifically, the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 are reduced and displayed, and the symbol display device 61 is divided into two colors, red and green. At the same time, the answer time limit display bar 163 is displayed, and the question “Please look straight at the screen and say whether you like red or green” is displayed in the question display area 165.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (d), at the timing of t3, the first conversation effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 68 (e), the second conversation effect starts. Specifically, the symbol display device 61 is divided into red and yellow, and the question in the question display area 165 is changed to a display "Please look straight at the screen and say whether you like red or yellow". As shown in FIG. 68 (e), the second conversation effect ends at the timing of t4, and the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 that have been reduced and displayed on the symbol display device 61 are enlarged and displayed again.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the symbol row Z1 stops at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), the symbol row Z3 stops at the timing of t6, and as shown in FIG. 68 (b). At time t7, the symbol line Z2 is stopped. When the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 are changing, the player's interest lies in whether or not reach is generated. Since the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 are reduced and displayed during the continuous conversation effect, it is easier to pay attention to the continuous conversation effect than the symbol strings Z1 to Z3. Therefore, if the symbol row Z1 is stopped during the continuous conversation effect, the player may miss the stop of the symbol row Z1. On the other hand, after the continuous conversation effect is finished and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are enlarged and displayed, the symbol column Z1 is stopped so that the player's attention can be directed to the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. It will be possible.

  Next, a case will be described in which the sound emission control device 91 cannot normally grasp the player's answer. Specifically, a case will be described in which the voice emission control device 91 cannot grasp the answer within the answer time limit corresponding to the first inquiry. As shown in FIGS. 68 (a) to (c), when the variation of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started at the timing of t8, the first conversation effect is made at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 68 (d). Be started. Then, the response time limit elapses without the voice emission control device 91 normally grasping the player's answer, and the first conversation ends at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 68 (d). In this case, the second inquiry is not displayed, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 that have been reduced and displayed on the symbol display device 61 are enlarged and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), the symbol row Z1 stops at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), the symbol row Z3 stops at the timing of t12, and as shown in FIG. 68 (b), t13. At the timing of, the symbol row Z2 is stopped.

  Next, the detailed flow of the continuous conversation production will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. FIG. 69 (a) shows a period in which the first conversation effect is being performed in the continuous conversation effect, and FIG. 69 (b) asks the symbol display device 61, options, answer limit time and the face of the player. It shows the period during which the direction instruction is displayed. Further, FIG. 69 (c) shows a period during which the player's face is imaged, and FIG. 69 (d) shows that the voice emission control device 91 has normally grasped the player's answer to image the player's face. 69 (e) shows the period in which the image after successful conversation is displayed on the symbol display device 61, and FIG. 69 (f) shows advice to the player on the symbol display device 61 at the time of conversation failure. Indicates the period of time. In FIG. 69, the length from t1 to t3 and the length from t4 to t6 are half or less of the length of time from the start of fluctuation to the stop of the symbol row Z1.

  First, a case where the voice emission control device 91 normally grasps the player's answer in the middle of the answer time limit in the first conversation production will be described. As shown in FIG. 69 (a), the first conversation effect is started at the timing of t1. As shown in FIG. 69 (b), the symbol display device 61 is queried at the timing of t1, and a display is displayed in accordance with the options, the response time limit and the face direction of the player, and as shown in FIG. 69 (c). Thus, the imaging of the player's face is started.

  When the sound emission control device 91 normally grasps the player's answer at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 69 (d), it asks at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the choices, and the response time limit. And the display according to the orientation of the player's face ends, and the imaging of the player's face also ends. Then, at the same timing of t2, the image after successful conversation is displayed on the symbol display device 61. The video after the successful conversation is continuously displayed until the answer limit time of the first conversation effect ends after the sound emission control device 91 normally recognizes the answer of the player. As shown in FIG. 69 (e), the image after successful conversation ends at the timing of t3, and the first conversation effect ends as shown in FIG. 69 (a).

  Next, a case will be described in which the voice emission control device 91 cannot normally grasp the player's answer within the answer time limit in the first conversation production. As shown in FIG. 69 (a), the first conversation effect is started at the timing of t4. As shown in FIG. 69 (b), the symbol display device 61 is queried at the timing of t4, and a display corresponding to the options, the response time limit and the face direction of the player is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 69 (c). Thus, the imaging of the player's face is started.

  When the answer time limit elapses, a question is asked at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 69 (b), and the display according to the options, the answer time limit and the face direction of the player is ended, and as shown in FIG. 69 (c). Thus, the imaging of the player's face is also completed. As shown in FIG. 69 (f), at the timing of t5, the symbol display device 61 starts to display the advice to the player who has failed in the conversation. The advice is continuously displayed for a predetermined time from the end of the answer control time in the first conversation production. Then, when the advice display to the player ends at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 69 (f), the first conversation effect ends at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 69 (a). In this case, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are enlarged and displayed without displaying the second inquiry.

  In the present embodiment, the notice display that can be selected in the notice lottery process of step S603 in the main command handling process (FIG. 15) includes the continuous conversation effect. When the continuous conversation effect is selected by lottery, the lottery process for continuous conversation effect for determining the content of the continuous conversation effect is performed in the advance notice lottery process.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the lottery process for continuous conversation production. The continuous conversation production lottery process is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93. First, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in this game is a big hit. When the winning / winning lottery result is a big hit (step S3301: YES), the expectation lottery process of the effect at the time of a big hit is performed in step S3302. In the lottery process, one effect is selected by lottery from the confirmation notification effect, the high expectation effect, and the low expectation effect. If the win / no win lottery result is out of step (step S3301: NO), in step S3303, an effect degree lottery process of production at the time of out of win is performed. In the lottery process, one of the high-expectancy effect and the low-expectancy effect is selected by lottery.

  After step S3302 or step S3303, it is determined in step S3304 whether or not the lottery result is the finalized notification effect. When the lottery result is the final notification effect (step S3304: YES), the final notification effect table is expanded from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95 in step S3305. There are four answers in the order of (first time, second time), (red, red), (red, yellow), (green, red), and (green, yellow), and the table shows In any of the four cases, a rainbow-colored warning is given. When the lottery result is not the finalized notification effect (step S3304: NO), it is determined in step S3306 whether or not the lottery result is the high-expectation effect. If the lottery result is a high-expectation effect (step S3306: YES), a table for high-expectation effect is developed from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95 in step S3307. In the table, as shown in FIG. 67, four notices are recorded corresponding to four combinations that the player can answer. When the lottery result is not the high-expectation effect (step S3306: NO), a table for low-expectation effect is developed from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95 in step S3308. In the table, as shown in FIG. 67, four notices are recorded corresponding to four combinations that the player can answer.

  After developing the table in step S3305, step S3307, or step S3308, in step S3309, the base data table for continuous conversation effect is developed from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95, and the continuous conversation effect lottery process is performed. To finish.

  FIG. 71 shows a base data table when a continuous conversation production is performed. FIG. 71 (a) is a base data table for continuous conversation production, and FIG. 71 (b) is a base data table for the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Sound and light effects of continuous conversation production are performed based on FIG. 71 (a), and sound and light control at the time of fluctuation of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are performed based on FIG. 71 (b). Both of the two base data tables are stored in the sound-light side ROM 94, and are expanded in the sound-light side RAM 95 to produce an effect.

  71A, the start timing of the first conversation effect, the start timing of the second conversation effect, and the end timing of the answer time limit in each conversation effect are recorded. In FIG. 71 (b), the change start timing and the timing for displaying the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 in a reduced size are recorded. As shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the pointer is at the position of "0", the fluctuation of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started. When the pointer is at the position "a" as shown in FIG. 71 (a), the first conversation effect is started, and at the timing, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 are reduced and displayed. Timing. Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), the first conversation effect is started when the pointer is at the position "c", and at the timing, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are reduced. It will be displayed timing. After that, when the pointer is at the position of "d", it is the timing when the player's response time limit ends.

  The symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 are reduced in display during the continuous conversation effect, a notice is displayed at the timing when the player's answer is grasped in the second conversation effect, and then the game time is restored. Here, the timing at which the player's answer is grasped is indefinite. Two tables relating to the display for the continuous conversation effect and the table relating to the display for the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are read out to the sound-light side RAM 95, and during the continuous conversation effect, the base data table for the continuous conversation effect is referred to and the game time is played. At the return timing, by changing the reference destination to the table relating to the display for the symbol strings Z1 to Z3, no matter which timing within the response time limit the player's answer is finished, depending on the player's arbitrariness It is possible to perform continuous conversation production.

  The timer interrupt processing performed by the sound-light side MPU 93 of the present embodiment is different from the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment (FIG. 14) in step S510 and subsequent steps. Specifically, after step S509, the continuous conversation production process is performed, the imaging control process is performed, and the timer interrupt process ends. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the processing for continuous conversation production. The continuous conversation production process is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the continuous conversation effect flag is set to "1". Here, the continuous conversation effect flag is a flag indicating that the continuous conversation effect is being performed on the symbol display device 61, and is a flag set in step S3408 of the continuous conversation effect process.

  When "1" is not set in the continuous conversation effect flag (step S3401: NO), the start time of the conversation effect is determined by referring to the base data table loaded in the sound-light side RAM 95 in step S3402. Determine whether or not. When it is the start timing of the continuous conversation effect (step S3402: YES), it is determined in step S3403 whether or not the conversation effect is the first conversation effect. If it is the first conversation effect (step S3403: YES), in step S3404, a command for displaying the question, options, and answer time limit in the first conversation effect is displayed on the symbol display device 61. It is transmitted to the control device 96. On the other hand, if it is not the first conversation effect (step S3403: NO), it is determined in step S3405 whether or not the conversation failure flag is set to "1". Here, the conversation failure flag is a flag indicating that in the first conversation production, the voice emission control device 91 could not normally grasp the player's answer within the answer time limit, and the advice command transmission process. The flag is set in step S3802 of (FIG. 76). When "1" is not set in the conversation failure flag (step S3405: NO), in order to display the question, option, and answer time limit in the second conversation production on the symbol display device 61 in step S3406. Command is transmitted to the display control device 96.

  After the command transmission is completed in step S3404 or step S3406, the image capturing command flag is set to "1" in step S3407, the continuous conversation effect flag is set to "1" in step S3408, and the reply waiting flag is set. "1" is set and the continuous conversation production process is ended. Here, the reply waiting flag is a flag that indicates a state in which a question to the player is displayed on the symbol display device 61 and is waiting for the player's reply.

  If the conversation failure flag is set to "1" (step S3405: YES), the conversation failure flag is cleared to "0" in step S3410, and a process for returning to the game time is performed in step S3411. This completes the continuous conversation production process.

  When the continuous conversation effect flag is set to "1" (step S3401: YES), the answer grasping process is performed in step S3412, and the process for continuous conversation effect is ended. If it is not the start timing of the conversation effect (step S3402: NO), the process for continuous conversation effect is ended as it is.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the answer grasping process of step S3412 in the continuous conversation production process (FIG. 72). The answer grasping process is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the reply waiting flag is set to "1". When "1" is set in the reply waiting flag (step S3501: YES), it is determined in step S3502 whether or not it is within the reply time limit. If it is within the reply time limit (step S3502: YES), it is determined in step S3503 whether or not the image capturing completion flag is set to "1". When "1" is not set in the image capturing completion flag (step S3503: NO), this answer grasping process is ended as it is. If "1" is set in the image pickup flag (step S3503: YES), the image pickup completion flag is cleared to "0" in step S3504, and image determination processing is performed in step S3505.

  In the image determination process, the same process as the image determination process for conversation production (FIG. 49) is performed, but there are some differences because the words spoken by the player and the number of times the response is performed are different. .. Hereinafter, points different from the image determination processing (FIG. 49) of the conversation effect will be described.

  Specifically, the content of the answer recognition process performed in step S2116 of FIG. 49 is different. In the answer recognition process (FIG. 49) of the conversation production, “o” “u” corresponding to “think” and “o” “a” “i” corresponding to “do not think” are the identification targets, but the first time. In the conversation production, “a” corresponding to “red” and “i”, “o”, and “i” corresponding to “green” are set as identification targets, and “a” and “a” corresponding to “red” in the second conversation production. "I" and "o" corresponding to "yellow" are the identification targets.

  Further, the content of the character number recognition process executed in step S2511 of the answer recognition process (FIG. 53) is also different. In the character number recognition process (FIG. 54) of the conversation production, two characters “o” and “u” and three characters “o”, “a”, and “i” are targeted for identification. The characters and the three characters "i", "o", and "i" are the identification targets, and in the second conversation production, the one character "a" and the two characters "i" and "o" are the identification targets.

  Returning to the explanation of the answer grasping process in FIG. 73, in step S3506, it is determined whether or not the answer grasping end flag is set to "1". When the answer grasping end flag is set to "1" (step S3506: YES), it is determined in step S3507 whether or not the second conversation effect flag is set to "1". Here, the second conversation effect flag is a flag indicating that the conversation effect is the second conversation effect. The second conversation effect flag is set to "1" in step S3603 of the first conversation effect post-processing (FIG. 74) described later. When "1" is set in the second conversation effect flag (step S3507: YES), the first conversation effect post-process is performed in step S3508. On the other hand, if "1" is not set in the second conversation effect flag (step S3507: NO), the second conversation effect post-process is performed in step S3509.

  After the post-processing is performed in step S3508 or step S3509, the reply waiting flag is cleared to "0" in step S3510, the continuous conversation effect flag is cleared to "0" in step S3511, and the answer grasping process is ended. ..

  If "1" is not set in the answer grasp flag (step S3506: NO), a command for displaying the orientation of the player's face on the symbol display device 61 is displayed on the display control device 96 in step S3512. After transmitting, the image capturing command flag is set to "1" in step S3513, and the present answer grasping process ends.

  If the answer time limit has been exceeded (step S3502: NO), the advisory command transmission process is performed in step S3514, and this answer grasp process is terminated. If "1" has not been set in the reply waiting flag (step S3501: NO), post-processing for returning to the game number is performed in step S3515, and the present answer grasping processing ends.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the post-first conversation production process of step S3508 in the answer grasping process (FIG. 73). The post-processing for the first conversation effect is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S3601, it is determined whether the player's answer is red. When the player's answer is red (step S3601: YES), "1" is set to the first answer "red" flag in step S3602. When the player's answer is green (step S3601: NO) or after the first answer “red” flag is set to “1” in step S3602, the second conversation effect flag is set to “1” in step S3603. Set. Then, in step S3604, a command for displaying the image after successful imaging on the symbol display device 61 is transmitted to the display control device 96, and the first post-conversation effect post-process is ended. By the transmission of the command, the image after successful imaging is displayed on the symbol display device 61. Next, the command relating to the display of the symbol display device 61 is transmitted from the sound-light side MPU 93 to the display control device 96 in step S3406 of the continuous conversation production process (FIG. 72). The command transmitted at this timing relates to the display of questions, options, and answer time limits in the second conversation production. Therefore, in the symbol display device 61, the image after the successful conversation continues to be displayed until the second conversation effect is started after the player's answer is grasped in the first conversation effect.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the second conversation production post-processing of step S3509 in the answer grasping processing (FIG. 73). The second conversation effect post-processing is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S3701, it is determined whether the player's answer is red. If the player's answer is red, it is determined in step S3702 whether the first answer "red" flag is set to "1". When the first answer “red” flag is set to “1” (step S3702: YES), the player's answer is red for the first time and red for the second time. Therefore, in step S3703, the advance notice data corresponding to “red” and “red” is transmitted to the display control device 96 from the table loaded in the sound-light side RAM 95. Thereby, the notice corresponding to "red" and "red" is displayed on the symbol display device 61. Specifically, in the continuous conversation effect lottery process (FIG. 70), the advance notice is selected according to the table expanded from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95. If it is a table for confirmation notification, it will be an announcement in rainbow color, if it is a table for high-expectation performance, it will be an announcement in red, and if it is a table for low-expectation production, it will be an announcement in green and yellow. Then, in step S3704, the first answer "red" flag is cleared to "0". When "1" is not set in the first answer "red" flag (step S3702: NO), the player's answer is green for the first time and red for the second time. Therefore, in step S3705, the advance notice data corresponding to "green" and "red" is transmitted to the display control device 96 from the table expanded in the sound-light side RAM 95. Thereby, the notice corresponding to "green" and "red" is displayed on the symbol display device 61. Specifically, in the continuous conversation effect lottery process (FIG. 70), the advance notice is selected according to the table expanded from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95. If it is a table for confirmation notification, it will be an announcement in rainbow color, if it is a table for high expectation performance, it will be a notice in red, and if it is a table for a low expectation production, it will be in a yellow notice.

  When the player's answer is yellow (step S3701: NO), it is determined in step S3706 whether or not the first answer “red” flag is set to “1”. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3706, the player's answer will be red for the first time and yellow for the second time. Therefore, in step S3707, the advance notice data corresponding to “red” and “yellow” is transmitted to the display control device 96 from the table loaded in the sound-light side RAM 95. Thereby, the notice corresponding to "red" and "yellow" is displayed on the symbol display device 61. Specifically, in the continuous conversation effect lottery process (FIG. 70), the advance notice is selected according to the table expanded from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95. If it is a table for confirmation notification, it will be an announcement in rainbow color, if it is a table for high expectations, it will be in red, and if it is a table for low expectations, it will be an announcement in green. After that, in step S3708, the first answer “red” flag is cleared to “0”. When "1" is not set in the first answer "red" flag (step S3706: NO), the player's answer is green for the first time and yellow for the second time. Therefore, in step S3709, the notice data corresponding to “green” and “yellow” is transmitted to the display control device 96 from the table loaded in the sound-light side RAM 95. Thereby, the notice corresponding to "green" and "yellow" is displayed on the symbol display device 61. Specifically, in the continuous conversation effect lottery process (FIG. 71), the advance notice is selected according to the table expanded from the sound-light side ROM 94 to the sound-light side RAM 95. If it is a table for confirmation notification, it will be a notice in rainbow color, if it is a table for high-expectation performance, it will be noticed in green and yellow, and if it is a table for low-expectation performance, it will be notice in red.

  After performing step S3704, step S3705, step S3708, or step S3709, the second conversation effect flag is cleared to "0" in step S3710, and the game time return process is executed in step S3711 to execute the second conversation effect. The process ends.

  FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing the advisory command transmitting process of step S3514 in the answer grasping process (FIG. 73). The advice command transmission process is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S3801, it is determined whether the main conversation effect is the first conversation effect. If it is the first conversation effect (step S3801: YES), the conversation failure flag is set to "1" in step S3802.

  After making a negative determination in step S3801 and setting "1" in the conversation failure flag in step S3802, conversation failure cause identification processing is performed in step S3803. Using the conversation failure flag, it is determined in step S3405 of the above-described continuous conversation production process (FIG. 72) whether or not the player's answer is recognized by the pachinko machine 10 in the first conversation production. Similar to the first embodiment, the conversation failure cause identifying process determines that the player is facing the front if more than half of the captured images are facing the front. When a mouth change is recognized, "1" is set to the mouth change flag. In subsequent step S3804, it is determined whether or not the mouth change flag is set to "1". When the mouth change flag is set to "1" (step S3804: YES), the mouth change flag is cleared to "0" in step S3805, and the main conversation effect is the first time in step S3806. Or not. When this conversation production is the first time (step S3806: YES), "1" is set to the conversation participation flag in step S3807. The conversation participation flag is a flag indicating that the player has participated in the first conversation production. If this conversation production is not the first time (step S3806: NO) or after setting the conversation participation flag to "1" in step S3807, whether or not the front facing flag is set to "1" in step S3808. Judge about. If the front facing flag is set to "1" (step S3808: YES), the front facing flag is cleared to "0" in step S3809, and the player turns to the front in step S3810, The data for displaying the advice displayed when the change is confirmed on the symbol display device 61 is transmitted to the display control device 96. If "1" is not set in the front facing flag (step S3808: NO), the player is facing other than the front in step S3811, and the advice displayed when the mouth change is confirmed is a pattern. The data to be displayed on the display device 61 is transmitted to the display control device 96.

  If "1" is not set in the mouth change flag (step S3804: NO), it is determined in step S3812 whether the mouth change flag is "1". If the mouth unchanged flag is set to "1" (step S3812: YES), the mouth unchanged flag is cleared to "0" in step S3813, and the front facing flag is set to "1" in step S3814. It is determined whether or not it is set. When "1" is set in the front facing flag (step S3814: YES), the front facing flag is cleared to "0" in step S3815, and in step S3816, the player is facing the front, A command for displaying the advice displayed when the mouth change is not confirmed is transmitted to the display control device 96. In the case of making a negative determination in step S3814, in step S3817, for displaying the advice displayed when the player is looking sideways and no mouth change is confirmed on the symbol display device 61. The command is transmitted to the display controller 96.

  After transmitting the data to the display control device 96 in step S3810, step S3811, step S3816 or step S3817, in step S3818 the advice display flag is set to "1" and the reply waiting flag is cleared to "0". This advice command transmission processing ends. If "1" is not set in the mouth change flag (step S3812: NO), and if a negative determination is made, the present advisory command transmission processing is ended.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing post-processing for returning to the game time in step S3515 in the answer grasping processing (FIG. 73). Post-processing for the game time return is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not the advice display flag is set to "1". If "1" has been set in the advice display flag (step S3901: YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the advice display flag was set to "1" in step S3902. Specifically, it is determined whether or not 3 seconds for displaying the advice on the symbol display device 61 have elapsed. If 3 seconds have elapsed from the advice display (step S3902: YES), a game number return process is performed in step S3903. Specifically, the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3, which have been reduced and displayed on the symbol display device 61, are enlarged and displayed. In a succeeding step S3904, the advice display flag is cleared to "0", and it is determined whether or not the second conversation effect flag is set to "1" in a step S3905. When "1" is set in the second conversation effect flag (step S3905: YES), the second conversation effect flag is cleared to "0" in step S3906. If "1" is not set in the second conversation effect flag (step S3905: NO) and if the second conversation effect flag is cleared to "0" in step S3906, the continuous conversation effect flag is set to "in step S3907." "0" is cleared to end the post-processing for returning to the game.

  If "1" is not set in the advice display flag (step S3901: NO) or if 3 seconds have not elapsed (step S3902), if a negative determination is made, the game is returned after returning to this game time. The process ends.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

  In the continuous conversation production, when the exchange of words between the player and the pachinko machine 10 continues for a predetermined number of times, a notice production reflecting the result of the current game lottery and the answer of the player is performed. For this reason, the player can confirm that his or her own selection is reflected in the notice production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  When the player answers, a display regarding the orientation of the player's face is displayed on the symbol display device 61. This increases the possibility that the player's face can be imaged from the front, and increases the possibility that the continuous conversation effect will be successful.

  The options for the first conversation are "red" and "green". "Red" is recognized as "a", and "green" is recognized as "i", "o", and "i". Therefore, the two options have different numbers of characters. The options for the second conversation are "red" and "yellow". "Red" is recognized as "a", and "yellow" is recognized as "i" and "o". Therefore, the two options have different numbers of characters. Therefore, it is possible to increase the answer recognition rate while suppressing the possibility that the player's answer is erroneously detected.

  If no change in the mouth of the player can be confirmed within the first answer time limit, the second inquiry is not made. As a result, a persistent question is not made to the player who does not intend to participate in the conversation production. On the other hand, by providing the advice display after the conversation fails, the probability that the player who intends to participate in the conversation succeeds in the conversation in the subsequent continuous conversation production is increased.

  When the voice emission control device 91 recognizes the player's answer, the display of the symbol display device 61 is switched to the image after the successful conversation. The length of the image is variable, and the display time is long if the answer grasp timing is early, and the display time is short if the answer grasp timing is late. As a result, in the first conversation effect and the second conversation effect, it is possible to keep a constant time from the start of the effect to the end of the image after the conversation is successful.

<Third Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that only the timing is grasped and a comment is returned without grasping the verbal answer of the player. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 10, an estimated conversation effect is performed in which a word the player answers at the design stage is estimated and a comment for the estimated word is displayed. Hereinafter, the content of the effect and the control content for enabling execution of the effect will be described.

  Immediately after the start of fluctuation in the estimated conversation effect, the question to the player is displayed on the symbol display device 61 and the answer time limit is displayed. Then, the orientation of the player's face is imaged within the response time limit, and advice according to the orientation of the face is displayed on the display control device 96. When the player answers the question within the answer time limit, the sound emission control device 91 detects the movement of the mouth of the player, and after the movement of the mouth of the player is stopped, the sound light side RAM 95 is stored in advance. A comment paired with the stored question is displayed on the symbol display device 61. On the other hand, when the movement of the player's mouth does not stop within the response time limit or the player's mouth does not move within the response time limit, the advice to the player is displayed on the symbol display device 61. , This estimated conversation production ends. In this estimated conversation production, the sound emission control device 91 does not grasp the verbal answer of the player. However, since the comment is displayed when the player's mouth movement stops, the player can feel as if he / she is talking to the pachinko machine 10.

  First, the overall flow of the estimated conversation production will be described. After the fluctuation of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started, the estimated conversation effect is started, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are reduced and displayed. Then, after the estimated conversation effect is finished and the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 are enlarged and displayed, the symbol string Z1 is stopped. After that, after the symbol row Z3 is stopped, the symbol row Z2 is stopped.

  Next, the detailed flow of the estimated conversation effect will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 78. 78 (a) shows a period during which the estimated conversation effect is being performed, and FIG. 78 (b) shows a question corresponding to the player, a response time limit, and a display corresponding to the face orientation of the player on the symbol display device 61. The displayed period is shown, and FIG. 78 (c) shows the period during which imaging is performed to grasp the orientation of the player's face. Also, FIG. 78 (d) shows the timing when the voice emission control device 91 grasps the movement of the mouth of the player within the response time limit and then grasps that the movement of the mouth of the player has stopped. e) shows a period in which a comment for the player's answer is displayed on the symbol display device 61, and FIG. 78 (f) shows the answer when the voice emission control device 91 cannot normally grasp the movement of the player's mouth. The display period of the advice displayed on the symbol display device 61 after the time limit is shown.

  First, a case will be described in which the sound emission control device 91 normally grasps the movement of the player's mouth within the response time limit. At the timing of t1 when the estimated conversation effect is started as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the question to the player, the response time limit and the face of the player are displayed on the symbol display device 61 as shown in FIG. 78 (b). The display according to the direction is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 78 (c), imaging for grasping the orientation of the player's face is started at the same timing. As shown in FIG. 78 (d), when the sound emission control device 91 has normally grasped the movement of the player's mouth at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), the symbol display device at that timing. The display according to the question on 61, the answer time limit, and the orientation of the face ends, and the imaging of the player's face also ends as shown in FIG. 78 (c). Further, as shown in FIG. 78 (e), a comment corresponding to the question displayed to the player at the timing t2 is displayed on the symbol display device 61. As shown in FIG. 78 (e), the display of the comment ends at the timing of t3, and as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the estimated conversation effect ends at the timing.

  Next, a case will be described in which the sound emission control device 91 cannot normally grasp the movement of the player's mouth within the response time limit. At the timing of t1 when the estimated conversation effect is started as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the question to the player, the response time limit and the face of the player are displayed on the symbol display device 61 as shown in FIG. 78 (b). The display according to the direction is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 78 (c), imaging for grasping the orientation of the player's face is started at the same timing. When the voice emission control device 91 does not normally grasp the movement of the mouth of the player within the answer limit time and the answer limit time ends, the question on the symbol display device 61 at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 78 (b). , The display according to the response time limit and the face orientation is completed, and the imaging of the player's face is also completed as shown in FIG. 78 (c). Further, as shown in FIG. 78 (f), the advice to the player is displayed at the timing of t5. The advice is displayed for a predetermined time when the voice emission control device 91 cannot normally grasp the movement of the player's mouth within the reply time limit. Then, when the display of the advice to the player ends at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 78 (f), the estimated conversation effect also ends at the timing as shown in FIG. 78 (a).

  In the present embodiment, the estimated conversation effect is included in the notice display that can be selected in the notice lottery process in step S603 in the main command handling process (FIG. 15). When the estimated conversation effect is selected by lottery, the estimated conversation effect lottery process for determining the content of the estimated conversation effect is performed in the advance notice lottery process.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the estimated conversation effect lottery process. The estimated conversation production lottery process is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93. First, in step S4001, one question is selected by lottery from a plurality of questions recorded in the sound-light side ROM 94. In the following step S4002, one comment is selected by lottery from a plurality of comments stored for the selected question. The comment is displayed on the symbol display device 61 when the sound emission control device 91 normally grasps the movement of the player's mouth within the reply time limit. A plurality of comments are prepared for one question, and whichever comment is selected is set so that the player feels as if he / she is talking to the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in the table of FIG. 80, the question and comment for the estimated conversation effect are stored in the sound-light side ROM 94. Multiple questions are stored. Then, a plurality of comments are stored for each of the plurality of questions. Specifically, in response to the question "is this right?", The comments "What is that?", "Is the forecast correct?", And "It's the opposite of my expectation" are stored. When the player is asked a question about the result of the lottery, "is this a hit?", It is assumed that the player speaks words similar to "win" or "not hit". On the other hand, all of the three stored reply comments have neither the denial nor affirmation of the expectation for the winning / unwinning lottery result of the player "winning" or "not hitting". Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable regardless of whether the subsequent result is a big hit or a miss. Similarly, with regard to the questions such as "How are you feeling lately?", "What are you expecting this time?" And "What month are you born?", A reply comment that indicates the possibility of the result of this game time is displayed, and an affirmative reply is displayed. Comments are not displayed. Therefore, no matter whether the subsequent result is a big hit or a miss, it is consistent with the reply comment and does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

  FIG. 81 shows a base data table when the estimated conversation effect is performed. FIG. 81 (a) is a base data table for estimated conversation effect, and FIG. 81 (b) is a base data table for variation of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. 81 (a) is referred to control the sound and light relating to the estimated conversation effect, and FIG. 81 (b) is referenced to control the sound and light when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changed. Both of the two base data tables are stored in the sound-light side ROM 94, and are expanded in the sound-light side RAM 95 to produce an effect.

  81A, the start timing of the estimated conversation effect and the end timing of the answer time limit are recorded. In FIG. 81 (b), the start timing of the fluctuation and the timing at which the three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are reduced and displayed are recorded. As shown in FIG. 81 (b), when the pointer is at the position of "0", the variation of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 is started. The estimated conversation effect is started when the pointer is at the position "a" as shown in FIG. 81 (a), and the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 are reduced and displayed at the timing as shown in FIG. 81 (b). It becomes timing. After that, when the pointer is at the position of "b", it becomes the timing when the player's response time limit ends.

  The symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 are reduced and displayed during the estimated conversation effect, and a reply comment is displayed on the symbol display device 61 at the timing when the player's answer is grasped. Here, the timing at which the player's answer is grasped is indefinite. Two tables relating to the display for the estimated conversation effect and the table relating to the display for the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are read out to the sound-light side RAM 95. From the start of fluctuation to the start of the estimated conversation effect, the base data table of FIG. 81 (b) is referred to, and the reference destination is shown in FIG. 81 (a) at the timing when the pointer comes to the position of “a” and the estimated conversation effect starts. The table is changed and the reference destination is returned to the base data table of FIG. 81 (b) after the player has grasped the answer in the estimated conversation production, so that the answer of the player is grasped at any timing within the answer time limit. Even then, it is possible to produce an effect according to the player's independence.

  The timer interrupt processing performed by the sound-light side MPU 93 of the present embodiment is different from the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment (FIG. 14) in S510 and subsequent steps. Specifically, after S509, the estimated conversation effect process is performed, the imaging control process is performed, and the timer interrupt process ends. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the process for the estimated conversation effect. The estimated conversation production process is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S4101, it is determined whether the estimated conversation effect flag is set to "1". Here, the estimated conversation effect flag is a flag indicating that the estimated conversation effect is being performed on the symbol display device 61, and is a flag set in step S4105 of the present estimated conversation effect.

  When "1" is not set in the estimated conversation effect flag (step S4101: NO), the start timing of the estimated conversation effect is referred to with reference to the base data table developed in the sound-light side RAM 95 in step S4102. Or not. When it is the start timing of the estimated conversation effect (step S4102: YES), a command for displaying the question and the answer time limit is transmitted to the display control device 96 in step S4103. In a succeeding step S4104, "1" is set to the image capturing command flag for the purpose of capturing an image for grasping the orientation of the player's face. After setting the estimated conversation effect flag to "1" in step S4105, the answer waiting flag is set to "1" in step S4106 to end the estimated conversation effect.

  When the estimated conversation effect flag is set to "1" (step S4101: YES), it is determined in step S4107 whether or not the reply waiting flag is set to "1". If the reply waiting flag is set to "1" (step S4107: YES), it is within the reply time limit by referring to the base data table expanded in the sound / light side RAM 95 in step S4108. Determine whether or not. If it is within the reply time limit (step S4108: YES), it is determined in step S4109 whether or not "1" is set in the imaging completion flag. When "1" is not set in the image capturing completion flag (step S4109: NO), the estimated conversation presentation process is ended as it is. If the image capturing completion flag is set to "1" (step S4109: YES), the image capturing completion flag is cleared to "0" in step S4110, and the image determination process of the estimated conversation effect is performed in step S4111. In S4112, it is determined whether or not the answer grasping end flag is set to "1".

  Here, the image determination process of the estimated conversation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 83. First, in step S4201, feature points are extracted from the face image of the player imaged this time. Based on the extracted feature points, face orientation grasping processing (FIG. 50) is performed in step S4202. In step S4203, the lip region is extracted from the face image captured this time, and in step S4204, the feature points of the lip region are extracted. In step S4205, it is determined whether the current imaging is the second imaging or later. In the case of the second and subsequent imaging (step S4205: YES), in step S4206, the positional information of the current characteristic point is compared with the positional information of the previous characteristic point to determine the moving direction and the moving amount of the characteristic point. Find the vector to represent. In step S4207, it is determined whether the vector is small. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the change in the lip shape is so small that it cannot be recognized. If the vector is small (step S4207: YES), "1" is added to the same shape counter of the sound-light side RAM 95 in step S4208, and whether or not the same shape counter value is 600 in step S4209. Judge about. When the value of the same shape counter reaches 600 (step S4209: YES), the same shape counter is cleared to "0" in step S4210. This is because it is considered that the player has finished the answer because the change in the lip shape of the player can no longer be seen. After that, in step S4211, the answer grasp end flag indicating that the answer of the player has been recognized is set to "1", and in step S4212 the comparison target is deleted and the image determination process of the estimated conversation effect is ended. To do. When the current imaging is the first imaging (step S4205: NO), the vector obtained in step S4206 is not small (step S4207: NO), or the value of the same shape counter is not 600 ( In step S4209: NO), the position information of the current feature point is stored in the sound-light side RAM 95 as a comparison target in step S4213, and the image determination process of the estimated conversation effect is ended.

  Returning to the description of the estimated conversation production process (FIG. 82), if “1” is set in the answer grasping end flag (step S4112: YES), it is displayed on the symbol display device 61 in step S4113. It is a comment corresponding to a question, and grasps a comment predetermined in a lottery. In step S4114, a command for displaying the comment on the symbol display device 61 is transmitted to the display control device 96. Then, in step S4115, the reply waiting flag is cleared to "0", in step S4116 the estimated conversation effect flag is cleared to "0", and the present estimated conversation effect is ended.

  If "1" is not set in the answer grasp end flag (step S4112: NO), a command for displaying the display corresponding to the orientation of the player's face on the symbol display device 61 in step S4117. This is transmitted to the display control device 96, and in step S4118, "1" is set to the image capturing command flag to capture the player's face for the purpose of grasping the orientation of the player's face.

  If the answer time limit has been exceeded (step S4108: NO), a command for displaying the advice to the player on the symbol display device 61 is transmitted to the display control device 96 in step S4119. Then, in step S4120, the advice display flag is set to "1", the estimated conversation effect flag is cleared to "0" in step S4121, and the estimated conversation effect is finished. Here, the advice display flag is a flag indicating a state where the symbol display device 61 is displaying advice to the player.

  If "1" is not set in the reply waiting flag (step S4107: NO), it is determined in step S4122 whether or not the advice display flag is set to "1". When the advice display flag is set to "1" (step S4122: YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the advice display flag was set to "1" in step S4123. Specifically, it is determined whether or not 3 seconds have elapsed for displaying the advice to the player on the symbol display device 61. If 3 seconds have elapsed (step S4123: YES), a process for returning to the game number is performed in step S4124, the advice display flag is cleared to "0" in step S4125, and estimated in step S4126. The conversation effect flag is cleared to "0" and the estimated conversation effect is finished.

  When it is not the start timing of the estimated conversation effect (step S4102: NO), "1" is not set in the advice display flag (step S4122: NO), or when 3 seconds have not elapsed (step S4123). : NO) ends the estimated conversation effect as it is.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

  In the estimated conversation effect, after the question to the player is displayed on the symbol display device 61, the face of the player who answers is imaged. Then, when a change in the shape of the lip area of the player is recognized, a comment for the player's answer is displayed on the symbol display device 61. In this estimated conversation production, only the shape change of the player's lip area is detected. Therefore, it is not necessary to have a light receiving unit with high accuracy that can recognize the words or the number of characters spoken by the player.

  By reading the base data table for the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 separately from the effect-based base data table into the sound-light side RAM 95, at the timing when the player's answer is grasped, a reply comment to the answer is displayed in the symbol display device 61. It is possible to display in. Further, the question to the player is directly or indirectly related to the result of the lottery in the current game, but the reply comment to the player's answer does not affirm or deny the player's answer. In other words, no matter which of the three types of prepared reply comments is selected, no contradiction occurs even if the subsequent result is a big hit or a miss. Therefore, the player feels that the pachinko machine 10 actually grasps the player's answer and displays a comment, and can participate in the conversation production without a feeling of strangeness.

  A plurality of questions for the player are recorded in the table of the sound-light side ROM 94. In addition, a plurality of comments are stored for each of the plurality of questions. First, after a question is selected by lottery, one comment is selected by lottery from a plurality of comments paired with the question. Therefore, the pair of question and comment changes for each game. It is possible to make the player participate in the estimated conversation production over a plurality of game times without getting tired.

<Fourth Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a comment for the player's answer is displayed on the symbol display device 61 without grasping the content of the player's answer orally and the timing of ending the answer. .. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a predictive conversation effect in which a word the player answers at the design stage is predicted and a comment for the predicted word is displayed on the pattern display device 61 is performed. Hereinafter, the content of the effect and the control content for enabling execution of the effect will be described.

  In the predicted conversation effect, a question to the player is displayed on the symbol display device 61 to prompt the player to give a verbal answer. After the time determined in advance by the lottery has elapsed, the comment determined in advance by the lottery is displayed on the symbol display device 61. The sound emission control device 91 does not take an image to grasp the player's answer. Therefore, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the image pickup device 73 is not provided. Further, the interval from displaying the question on the symbol display device 61 to displaying the comment is randomly determined by lottery. Therefore, the interval from the start of the question display to the start of the comment display changes for each game, and the player can feel as if he / she is talking to the pachinko machine 10. Hereinafter, the content of the predicted conversation effect and the control content for enabling execution of the predicted conversation effect will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 80, questions and comments to the player are pre-recorded in the sound-light side ROM 94. Immediately after the predicted conversation effect starts changing, the question to the player is displayed on the symbol display device 61. Regardless of the player's answer, after the time limit determined by the lottery elapses, the symbol display device 61 displays the comment recorded in the sound-light side ROM 94 in pair with the question. Here, the comment recorded as a pair with the question is a word that makes the user feel that the conversation is established no matter what answer the player gives to the question. For example, in response to the question "I'm expecting this time?", A comment "If you expect, the result may change" is displayed. In addition, the interval from when the question is displayed on the symbol display device 61 to when the comment is displayed is determined by lottery, and the interval is set to be the shortest time or longer and the longest time or shorter in the expected answer time. .. The shortest time is set to the time required to give the shortest possible answer to a question in 0.5 seconds per character. The maximum time is set to the time required to give the longest possible answer to a question in 0.5 seconds per character. Specifically, if the shortest answer is "Yes" and the longest answer is "I'm really expecting" for the question "I'm expecting this time?", 1 to 5.5 seconds. Time limit lottery will be held within the range. In the lottery, one time limit is selected from four ways of 1 second, 2 seconds, 4 seconds and 5.5 seconds.

  The flow of the predicted conversation effect will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 84 (a) to (c) show the variable periods of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3, and FIG. 84 (d) shows the period of the predicted conversation effect. Further, FIG. 84 (e) shows a period for displaying a question, and FIG. 84 (f) shows a period for displaying a reply comment to the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 (a) to 84 (c), when the variation of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started at the timing of t1, the predicted conversation effect is started at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 84 (d). , The symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are reduced and displayed. Further, the question to the player is displayed on the symbol display device 61 at the timing of t2. However, the remaining period from the display of the question to the display of the reply comment is not displayed. That is, the time limit determined by the lottery is not displayed, and the time limit is not notified to the player.

  At the timing of t3, the display of the question is ended when the limited period elapses, and the reply comment is displayed on the symbol display device 61. Then, at the timing of t4, the predicted conversation effect ends, the display period of the reply comment also ends, and after the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are enlarged and displayed, the symbol row at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 84 (a). Z1 stops. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (c), the symbol row Z3 is stopped at the timing of t6, and as shown in FIG. 84 (d), the symbol row Z2 is stopped at the timing of t7.

  Since the time limit from the start of displaying the question in the predicted conversation effect to the start of displaying the reply comment is determined by lottery, the timing of t4 is different for each game. However, the timing of t5 at which the symbol row Z1 stops is set to be always behind the timing of t4.

  In the present embodiment, the predicted conversation effect is included in the notice display that can be selected in the notice lottery process in step S603 in the main command handling process (FIG. 15). When the predicted conversation effect is selected by lottery, the predicted conversation effect lottery process for determining the content of the predicted conversation effect is performed in the advance notice lottery process.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the lottery process for predictive conversation effect. The various production lottery processes are performed by the sound-light side MPU 93. First, in step S4301, one question is selected by lottery from a plurality of questions recorded in the sound-light side ROM 94. In subsequent step S4302, one comment is selected by lottery from the comments stored in plural for the selected question. The comment is displayed on the symbol display device 61 after the elapse of the time limit, regardless of whether or not the player verbally answers. In step S4303, the lottery for the time limit from the start of displaying the question to the start of displaying the comment on the symbol display device 61 is performed, and the lottery process for various effects is finished.

  The timer interrupt processing performed by the sound-light side MPU 93 of the present embodiment is different from the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment (FIG. 14) in S510 and subsequent steps. Specifically, after S509, the process for predictive conversation effect is performed, the imaging control process is performed, and the timer interrupt process ends. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the process for predictive conversation effect. The predicted conversation effect process is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S4401, it is determined whether the comment display flag is set to "1". Here, the comment display flag is a flag indicating that a comment is displayed on the symbol display device 61, and "1" is set in step S4412 of the predicted conversation effect process. If the comment display flag is not set to "1" (step S4401: NO), it is determined in step S4402 whether the question display flag is set to "1". Here, the question display flag is a flag indicating that the question is displayed on the symbol display device 61, and is set to "1" in step S4408 of the predicted conversation effect process. When the question display flag is not set to "1" (step S4402: NO), the predicted conversation effect is started by referring to the base data table loaded in the sound-light side RAM 95 in step S4403. It is determined whether it is timing.

  If it is the start timing of the predicted conversation effect (step S4403: YES), the question displayed on the symbol display device 61 this time is grasped at step S4404. The content of the question grasped here is the content determined in step S4301 in the lottery process for predictive conversation effect (FIG. 85). After that, the time limit is grasped in step S4405. The content of the time limit grasped here is the content determined in step S4303 in the predicted conversation effect lottery processing (FIG. 85). Then, in step S4406, the comment displayed on the symbol display device 61 is grasped. The content of the comment grasped here is the content determined in step S4302 in the predicted conversation effect lottery process (FIG. 85).

  After that, in step S4407, a command for displaying the question corresponding to the content grasped in step S4404 on the symbol display device 61 is transmitted to the display control device 96. As a result, the display of the question is started on the symbol display device 61. However, the time limit information grasped in step S4405 is not set in the command. Therefore, the time limit determined by the lottery is not displayed on the symbol display device 61. In addition, including the notification on the symbol display device 61, the player is not notified of the time limit. Then, in step S4408, the question display flag is set to "1", and the predicted conversation effect process is terminated.

  If the question display flag is set to "1" (step S4402: YES), it is determined whether the time limit grasped in step S4405 has elapsed (step S4409). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4409, a command for displaying the comment on the symbol display device 61 is transmitted to the display control device 96 in step S4410. The contents grasped in step S4406 are set in this command. Thereby, the comment corresponding to the content grasped in step S4406, that is, the comment determined in step S4302 of the predicted conversation effect lottery process (FIG. 85) is displayed on the symbol display device 61. Then, in step S4411, the question display flag is cleared to "0", and in step S4412, the comment display flag is set to "1" and the predicted conversation effect process is ended.

  When "1" is set in the comment display flag (step S4401), it is determined in step S4413 whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the comment display flag was set to "1". Specifically, it is determined whether or not 3 seconds, which is a period for displaying a comment on the symbol display device 61, has elapsed. If 3 seconds have elapsed (step S4413: YES), a process for returning to the game time is performed in step S4414, and the comment display flag is cleared to "0" in step S4415 to perform the predicted conversation effect. Processing ends.

  If it is not the start timing of the predicted conversation effect (step S4403: NO), the time limit is exceeded (step S4409: NO), or if 3 seconds have not elapsed (step S4413: NO), the book is left as it is. The predicted conversation production process is ended.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

  In the predicted conversation effect, a time limit is set as a waiting period in a period before a question to the player is displayed on the symbol display device 61 and before a comment corresponding to the question is displayed. During this time limit, the player can give an answer corresponding to the question. However, the player's answer to this question is not grasped by the pachinko machine 10. Then, as the time limit elapses, a comment corresponding to the question is displayed on the symbol display device 61. This makes it possible to give the player the impression that he or she is talking to the pachinko machine 10, even though the player's answer is not actually grasped by the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game content.

  The time limit from the start of displaying the question to the start of displaying the comment is determined from a plurality of types of time. As a result, the time from the question display to the comment display is shortened or lengthened within the time period in which the expected answer can be performed, and the player has a sensor for grasping the player's answer as if it were a pachinko machine 10. You can have a conversation as if you were attached to.

  In addition, the time limit is randomly determined by lottery, so the time limit becomes irregular. Thus, even if a comment is displayed earlier or later than the player's answer, it is possible to cause the player to erroneously recognize that it is a problem of detection accuracy. Therefore, if the pachinko machine 10 has a sensor for grasping the answer of the player, it is easy for the player to think.

  The time limit determined by the lottery is not notified to the player. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 does not actually recognize the timing at which the player responds, the impression that the comment may have been displayed at the timing at which the player responded was given. It is easy to give to.

  By assuming the answer to the question to the player in advance and displaying a comment that does not deny or affirm the expected player's answer, even if it is a jackpot result in the subsequent game times, it will be a misplaced result Even in, there is no contradiction. As a result, the player can have a conversation as if the pachinko machine 10 grasps the answer.

<Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a comment is inserted in the reach display according to the degree to which the player pays attention to the reach display. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a comment insertion effect is performed in which a comment is inserted during the reach display according to the degree of attention of the player. Hereinafter, the content of the effect and the control content for enabling execution of the effect will be described.

  In the comment insertion effect, the reach effect is executed on the symbol display device 61 after the reach effect is started, and the player's image is periodically executed a predetermined number of times. From the face image of the player obtained by the image capturing, the player's attention to the reach effect is grasped. When it is determined that the player is not paying much attention to the reach effect in the case where the winning / winning lottery result is a big hit, a comment for expecting the player is inserted to raise the degree of attention to the reach effect. Further, when it is determined that the player is paying too much attention to the reach effect, a comment urging the player to regain his composure is inserted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the degree of discouragement of the player when the result of the current game comes off.

  Specifically, in the game time in which the reach effect is performed, the image pickup of the player is started after the start of the variation, and the face image of the player in normal times is acquired. Then, the reach effect in which bubbles appear on the symbol display device 61 is executed. Immediately after the start of the reach effect, the face image of the player is captured multiple times. From the face image obtained by imaging, the orientation of the player's face, the degree of opening of the eyes, and changes in the distance between the eyes and the eyebrows are understood. If the image of the player facing the front of the pachinko machine 10 is less than 70% of the whole, the player is discouraged and looks down from the symbol display device 61 and looks up at the sky. Judged as having deviated. Further, when the image of the player facing the front of the pachinko machine 10 is 80% or more of the whole, it is determined whether or not the player is paying excessive attention to the reach effect. The size of the eyes is 1.1 times or more, or the distance between the eyes and the eyebrows of the player is 1.1 times or more, as compared with the face image of the player in normal times acquired after the start of fluctuation. When it is confirmed that the player has opened the eyes, it is determined that the player has opened his eyes and paid excessive attention to the reach effect.

  With reference to FIGS. 87A to 87D, the manner in which the comment insertion effect progresses will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 87 (a), at the start of variation, the symbol display device 61 displays three varying symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this state, the face image of the player is captured, and the degree of opening of the eyes and the distance between the eyes and the eyebrows during normal times are measured. As shown in FIG. 87 (b), the reach effect is started after the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3 are stopped and only the symbol row Z2 is changed. Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (c), a comment to the player is inserted in the middle of the reach production depending on the degree of attention of the player to the reach production. Finally, as shown in FIG. 87 (d), the symbol row Z2 is stopped and the game time is ended.

  The comment insertion effect flow will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 88. 88 (a) to (c) show the variable periods of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, FIG. 88 (d) shows the reach production period, FIG. 88 (e) shows the comment insertion timing, and FIG. f) shows a period during which the player's face is imaged.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 (a) to 88 (c), when the variation of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started at the timing of t1, the image pickup of the player is started at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 88 (f). Then, the imaging ends at the timing of t3. A normal face image of the player is acquired by the imaging. The symbol row Z1 stops at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 88 (a), and the symbol row Z3 stops at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 88 (c). Further, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), the reach effect is started at the timing of t5. Further, at the timing of t5, which is the same as the start of the reach effect, imaging of the player's face is started. Imaging of the player's face is performed until timing t6. After the player's face has been captured as shown in FIG. 88 (d), a comment is inserted at the timing of t7, and the symbol row Z2 is stopped at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 88 (b). And the game time is over.

  The timer interrupt processing performed by the sound-light side MPU 93 of the present embodiment is different from the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment (FIG. 14) in step S510 and subsequent steps. Specifically, after step S509, the comment insertion effect process is performed, the imaging control process is performed, and the timer interrupt process ends. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the comment insertion effect processing. The comment insertion effect process is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93. Hereinafter, the comment insertion effect process will be described.

  In this comment insertion effect processing, the degree of normal eye opening and the distance between the eyes and the eyebrows that are used when determining whether or not the player is paying attention to the symbol display device 61 in the comment insertion effect are grasped. The degree of opening of the eyes and the distance between the eyes and the eyebrows during normal times are obtained by capturing the face image of the player immediately after the start of the game, and averaging the positional information of the feature points in the 20 face images captured in the front direction. Be done.

  First, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not the effect performed in the current game is a comment insertion effect. If the effect this time is not the comment insertion effect (step S4501: NO), this comment insertion effect processing is ended as it is. When the effect this time is the comment insertion effect (step S4501: YES), it is determined in step S4502 whether or not it is the change start timing. If it is the change start timing (step S4502: YES), the image capturing command flag is set to "1" in step S4503, and the comment insertion effect process is ended.

  When it is not the fluctuation start timing (step S4502: NO), it is determined in step S4504 whether or not "1" is set in the average calculation end flag. Here, the average calculation end flag is a flag indicating that the average value of the positional information regarding the opening degree of the player's eyes and the distance between the eyes and the eyebrows has been calculated from 20 face images. The average calculation end flag is set to "1" in step S4511 of this comment insertion effect processing. If "1" is not set in the average calculation end flag (step S4504: NO), it is determined whether or not 0.1 seconds has elapsed since the last time the imaging command flag was set to "1" in step S4505. Judge about. If 0.1 seconds has not elapsed (step S4505: NO), the comment insertion effect process is ended as it is. When 0.1 seconds has elapsed (step S4505: YES), it is determined in step S4506 whether or not the image capturing completion flag is set to "1". When "1" is not set in the image capturing completion flag (step S4506: NO), the comment insertion effect process is completed as it is. If the image capturing completion flag is set to "1" (step S4506: YES), the image capturing completion flag is cleared to "0" in step S4507, and then position information storage processing is performed in step S4508.

  Here, the position information storage process executed in step S4508 of the comment insertion effect process (FIG. 89) will be described with reference to FIG. The position information storage process is a process executed by the sound-light side MPU 93, and is a process of calculating the average value of the position information regarding the degree of eye opening and the distance between the eye and the eyebrow of the player in normal times.

  First, in step S4601, a front facing confirmation process is performed to confirm whether or not the face image obtained by this imaging is a front facing face image. Here, the front facing confirmation process executed in step S4601 of the position information storage process (FIG. 90) will be described with reference to FIG. 91. The front facing confirmation process is a process executed by the sound-light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S4701, feature points are extracted from the face image obtained by this imaging. The extraction of the feature points is similar to the extraction of the feature points performed in step S2101 of the image determination processing (FIG. 48) in the first embodiment, and the 19 features T1 to T19 shown in the table of FIG. 43. Points are extracted. In a succeeding step S4702, it is determined whether or not the feature points (T3, T4) of both ears exist. When the feature points (T3, T4) of both ears are present (step S4702: YES), a process of grasping the vertical direction of the face is performed in step S4703. Specifically, as described with reference to FIGS. 44 (a) to 44 (c) in the first embodiment, whether or not the symbol display device 61 or the adjustment areas 61a, 61b exist ahead of the player's line of sight. Figure out what. Then, in step S4704, it is determined whether or not the symbol display device 61 or the adjustment areas 61a and 61b exist in front of the line of sight of the player. When it is determined that the player is looking at the symbol display device 61 (step S4704: NO), a process for grasping the direction of the face in the left-right direction is performed in step S4705. Specifically, as described in FIGS. 44 (d) to 44 (f) in the first embodiment, it is grasped whether or not the symbol display device 61 exists ahead of the player's line of sight. Then, in step S4706, it is determined whether or not the symbol display device 61 exists ahead of the player's line of sight. When it is considered that the player is looking at the symbol display device 61 (step S4706: NO), the player's face image obtained by the current imaging in step S4707 is a face image facing forward. Then, the front facing confirmation processing is ended.

  If the feature points (T3, T4) of both ears do not exist (step S4702: NO), it is determined that the player's face is tilted in the left-right direction (step S4704: YES), or the player's face is up and down. When it is determined that the player's face is not facing the front (step S4706: YES), it is considered that the player's face is not facing the front, and the front facing confirmation process is ended as it is.

  Returning to the description of the position information storage processing (FIG. 90), after performing the front facing confirmation processing (FIG. 91) in step S4601, it is determined in step S4602 whether the player's face is facing front. When the face image obtained by this imaging is facing forward (step S4602: YES), a process of grasping the degree of eye opening is performed in step S4603. Here, the degree of opening of the eyes is obtained from the average value of the distance between the two feature points T6 and T7 (FIG. 43) and the distance between the two feature points T10 and T11 (FIG. 43). In other words, the degree of eye opening is grasped from the average size of the right and left eyes. The average calculation process regarding the degree of eye opening is performed on 20 front-facing images, and the value obtained by dividing the sum of the average values of 20 images by 20 will be described later as an index regarding the degree of eye opening in normal times. It is used for the determination (step S4817) of the comment insertion process (FIG. 92) to be performed. In step S4604, the process of grasping the distance between the eye and the eyebrow is performed. Here, the distance between the eye and the eyebrow is obtained from the average value of the distance between the two feature points T1 and T8 (FIG. 43) and the distance between the two feature points T2 and T12 (FIG. 43). That is, the distance between the eye and the eyebrow is grasped from the average of the distance between the eye and the eyebrow for the right eye and the left eye. The average calculation process regarding the distance between the eye and the eyebrow is performed on 20 front-facing images, and the value obtained by dividing the sum of the average values of the 20 images by 20 is an index related to the distance between the eye and the eyebrow in normal times. Is used for the determination (step S4818) of the comment insertion processing (FIG. 92) described later. In step S4605, "1" is added to the average counter, and this position information storage processing ends. If it is determined in step S4602 that it is not facing the front, the position information storage process ends. Regarding the degree of opening of the eyes and the distance between the eyes and the eyebrows, the average value of a plurality of sheets is used as an index only in the front-facing image, so that the normal value can be accurately obtained.

  Returning to the description of the comment insertion effect processing (FIG. 89), after performing the position information storage processing (FIG. 90) in step S4508, it is determined in step S4509 whether the value of the average counter is 20 or not. When the value of the average counter is not 20 (step S4508: NO), the image capturing command flag is set to "1" in step S4510 and the comment insertion effect process is ended. If the value of the average counter is 20 (step S4509: YES), the average calculation end flag is set to "1" and the comment insertion effect process is ended. When "1" is set to the average calculation end flag in step S4504 (step S4504: YES), the comment insertion process is performed in step S4512 and the comment insertion effect process is ended.

  Next, the comment insertion process executed in step S4512 of the comment insertion effect process (FIG. 89) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the comment insertion process. The comment insertion process is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S4801, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the reach effect by referring to the base data table loaded in the sound-light side RAM 95. In the base data table, the image capturing start timing, the image capturing end timing, the reach production start timing, the image capture end timing during the reach production, and the comment insertion timing for acquiring the face image of the player in normal times are recorded. ing. If it is the start timing of the reach effect (step S4801: YES), the command for reach effect is transmitted to the display control device 96 in step S4802, and the processing for inserting the comment ends. As a result, the reach effect is started in the symbol display device 61.

  If it is not the start timing of the reach effect (step S4801: NO), it is determined in step S4803 whether or not the reach effect is being performed. If the reach effect is not being performed (step S4803: NO), the process for inserting the comment is directly terminated. When the reach effect is being produced (step S4803: YES), it is determined in step S4804 whether or not the value of the distribution end counter is “10”. Here, the distribution end counter is a counter to which "1" is added every time the distribution counter is cleared to "0". The distribution counter is a counter to which "1" is added every 0.1 seconds after the reach effect command transmission process of step S4802 is performed. As will be described later in steps S4812 to S4822, when the value of the distribution counter is “1 to 3”, when the value of the distribution counter is “4”, and when the value of the distribution counter is “5”. And, the subsequent processing contents are different. The distribution counter is cleared to "0" when it is "5". That is, the distribution counter is a counter that is cleared to "0" every 0.5 seconds. As will be described later, in the comment insertion process, three imagings are performed every 0.1 seconds, and 0.1 seconds after the third imaging, three imagings are performed again every 0.1 seconds. The processing of the 0.5 second cycle is repeated 10 times for 5 seconds. The distribution counter is a counter for enabling processing of this 0.5 second cycle.

  If the value of the sorting end counter is not "10" (step S4804: NO), it is 0 after the reach effect command transmission process of step S4802 or the process of adding "1" to the sorting counter of step S4811 is performed. . Determine whether 1 second has elapsed. If 0.1 second has not elapsed (step S4805: NO), this comment insertion processing is ended as it is. If 0.1 seconds has elapsed, it is determined in step S4806 whether or not the image capturing completion flag is set to "1". When "1" is not set in the image capturing completion flag (step S4806: NO), the process for inserting the comment is directly terminated. When "1" is set to the image capturing completion flag (step S4806: YES), the image capturing completion flag is cleared to "0" in step S4807, and front facing confirmation processing (FIG. 91) is performed in step S4808. . The front facing confirmation process has the same contents as the process described with reference to FIG. 91. In step S4809, the result of the front facing confirmation process (step S4808) is received, and it is determined whether or not the player's face image captured this time is facing forward. When the face image is facing forward (step S4809: YES), “1” is added to the front facing counter in step S4810. The front-facing counter is a counter to which “1” is added when the captured face image of the player is facing forward, and is a counter that counts the number of times the player is determined to be facing front. is there.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4809 or after step S4810 is performed, "1" is added to the distribution counter in step S4811, and the value of the distribution counter is "1 to 3" in step S4812. Or not. If the value of the distribution counter is "1 to 3" (step S4812: YES), the image capturing command flag is set to "1" in step S4813, and the processing for inserting the comment ends.

  When the value of the distribution counter is not "1 to 3" (step S4812: NO), it is determined in step S4814 whether the value of the distribution counter is "4". When the value of the distribution counter is "4" (step S4814: YES), it is determined in step S4815 whether the value of the front facing counter is "3". The front facing counter is "3" when the player's face image is facing forward three times consecutively in the latest three times of imaging. In the process for inserting this comment, it is determined that the player has turned to the front once when the face image of the player is directed to the front three times consecutively in three times of imaging performed at intervals of 0.1 seconds. , Count the number of times with the front facing confirmation counter. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4815, "1" is added to the front facing confirmation counter in step S4816, and the degree of opening of the player's eyes is 1.1 times the normal state in step S4817. Or not. Specifically, the average value of the indexes regarding the degree of eye opening obtained from the face images obtained by the latest three times of imaging is the degree of eye opening calculated in step S4603 of the position information storage processing (FIG. 90). It is determined whether or not the average value of the index is 1.1 times or more. If the average value of the latest three times is less than 1.1 times (step S4817: NO), it is determined in step S4818 whether the distance between the player's eyes and eyebrows is 1.1 times the normal time. To do. Specifically, the average value of the index regarding the distance between the eye and the eyebrow obtained from the face images obtained by the latest three times of imaging is calculated in step S4604 of the position information storage process (FIG. 90). It is determined whether or not the average value of the index regarding the condition is 1.1 times or more. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4817 or step S4818, it is determined that the player is paying attention to the reach effect on the symbol display device 61, and "1" is added to the attention counter in step S4819. .. Here, the attention counter is a counter that counts the number of times the player is determined to be in the attention state for the reach effect. After making a negative determination in step S4818 or adding "1" to the attention counter in step S4819, the front facing counter is cleared to "0" in step S4820 and the processing for inserting this comment ends. The front-facing counter is determined as to whether or not the value has become “3” after three times of imaging, and “0” is cleared immediately after that. Therefore, in step S4816, "1" is added to the front facing determination counter only when it is determined that the player has been facing the front for 0.3 seconds or more.

  If the value of the distribution counter is not "4" (step S4814: NO), it means that the value of the distribution counter is "5". In this case, the distribution counter is set to "4" in step S4821. "0" is cleared, "1" is added to the distribution end counter in step S4822, and this comment insertion processing is ended.

  If the distribution end counter is "10" (step S4804: YES), the distribution end counter is cleared to "0" in step S4823, and the comment insertion processing is performed in step S4824 to perform the main comment insertion processing. To finish. The comment insertion process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The comment insertion processing is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93. First, in step S4901, the average calculation end flag is cleared to "0". The average calculation end flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the average value of 10 times is calculated for the index L1 regarding the opening degree of the player's eyes and the index L2 regarding the distance between the eyes and the eyebrows. Specifically, "1" is set in step S4611 of the comment insertion effect processing of FIG.

  In step S4902, it is determined whether or not the winning / winning lottery result in this game time is a big hit. When the winning / winning lottery result is a big hit (step S4902: YES), it is determined in step S4903 whether or not the value of the front facing determination counter is 7 or less. If the result of the lottery is wrong (step S4902: NO), it is determined in step S4904 whether the value of the front facing confirmation counter is 4 or less. When the result of the lottery is a big hit (step S4902: YES), when the value of the front facing confirmation counter is 7 or less (step S4903: YES), a comment of encouragement is given to the symbol display device 61 in step S4905. The command for inserting is transmitted to the display control device 96, and the comment inserting process is ended. This is to urge the player who is not attracting a lot of attention in spite of the winning / winning lottery result to be a big hit, to pay more attention to the symbol display device 61. When the result of the lottery is wrong (step S4902: NO), when the value of the front facing confirmation counter is 4 or less (step S4904: YES), a comment of encouragement to the symbol display device 61 is given in step S4905. The command for inserting is transmitted to the display control device 96, and the comment inserting process is ended. This is to urge the player with a low degree of attention to the symbol display device 61 to pay more attention to the symbol display device 61. By the transmission of the command, a comment “Don't give up yet!” Is inserted in the symbol display device 61 during the reach production. The conditions for inserting the comment differ depending on whether the winning / winning lottery result is a big hit or not. When the win / win lottery result is a big hit, the criterion is set to a relatively high number of 7, whereas when the win / win lottery result is out of order, the criterion is set to a relatively low number of 4 There is. The comment is inserted to encourage the player to pay attention to the reach effect. If the result of the lottery is wrong, the comment insertion target is limited to only the player who is not paying attention to the reach effect, so that the player who is interested in the reach effect to some extent is not expected excessively. On the other hand, if the winning / winning lottery result is a big hit, the target of comment insertion is extended to players who are interested in reach production to some extent, and attention is paid to the reach production so that the moment when the jackpot is won is not missed. Can be

  When a negative determination is made in step S4903 or step S4904, it is determined in step S4906 whether the value of the attention counter is 3 or more. When the value of the attention counter is 3 or more (step S4906: YES), a comment lottery process is performed in step S4907, and a command for inserting the conservative comment determined by the comment lottery process in step S4908. Is transmitted to the display control device 96, and this comment insertion processing is ended. Comment The lottery table used for the lottery process has a comment "It's hot. It looks like you can expect it." The appearance rates of the two comments differ depending on the result of the lottery. Specifically, in the lottery table used when the result of the lottery is a big hit, the appearance rate of the comment "I'm hot. I can expect it." Is 70%, and the comment "It's not so hot." The appearance rate of 30% is 30%, and in the lottery table used when the result of the lottery is unacceptable, the appearance rate of the comment “Don't get so hot.” Is 70%, which is “hot. However, the appearance rate of the comment is 30%. By transmitting the command, the comment selected by the comment lottery process is inserted in the symbol display device 61 during the reach effect. When the value of the attention counter is not 3 or more (step S4906: NO), this comment insertion processing is ended as it is.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

  When it is determined that the player is not paying much attention to the reach production in the case where the result of the lottery is a big hit, it is possible to increase the attention to the reach production by inserting a comment that expects the player. . Further, when it is determined that the player is paying too much attention to the reach effect, a comment urging the player to regain his composure is inserted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the degree of discouragement of the player when the result of the current game comes off.

  The image is not picked up with the player facing the front of the pachinko machine 10, but a plurality of times the image is taken, and the number of times the player faces the front is counted. Therefore, it is not necessary to correct the orientation of the player's face, and the player can naturally participate in the reach change production.

  The degree of attention to the player's effect is judged by the direction of the face, the degree of opening of the eyes, and the distance between the eyes and the eyebrows. Imaging is performed 10 times at 0.5 second intervals. When the player turns his / her eyes down or looks up at the heavens and diverts his line of sight from the symbol display device 61, it can be determined that he does not show much interest in the reach display. Further, when the player opens his / her eyes while facing the front, it can be determined that the player is excessively expecting the reach display.

  The face image for determining the degree of attention of the player to the reach effect is captured immediately after the start of the reach effect. It is highly possible that the player opens his eyes and pays attention, looks down, or looks up at the sky immediately after the start of the reach production. The largest reaction immediately after the start of the reach effect can be captured and used for determination without missing.

  The normal face image used as a comparison target when determining the degree of attention to the reach effect by the player is captured immediately after the start of the game time in which the reach effect is performed. By capturing the face image of the comparison target before the reach effect is started, it is possible to accurately evaluate the change from immediately after the start of the reach effect.

<Sixth Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that there are two types of notice effects, and the appearance frequency of the notice effect with a high player's attention is high. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the present embodiment, two types of notice effects are selected and executed by lottery. Whichever of the notice effects is selected, the player is imaged while the notice effect is displayed on the symbol display device 61. From the face image of the player obtained by the image pickup, the attention degree to the notice effect of the player is grasped. The attention level is grasped for each of the two types of notice effects, and the lottery table used for the lottery of the two types of notice effects is changed according to the attention degree of the player.

  Specifically, while the notice effect is displayed on the symbol display device 61, a face image of the player is captured. Imaging is periodically performed a predetermined number of times. The orientation of the player's face is grasped from the face image obtained by imaging. If the number of images in which the player faces the front of the pachinko machine 10 is less than or equal to a predetermined number, it is determined that the player's attention is low. If the number of images in which the player faces the front of the pachinko machine 10 is equal to or more than a predetermined number, it is determined that the player's attention is high.

  The sound-light side ROM 94 stores a plurality of lottery tables in which two types of notice effects are arranged at various ratios. The attention degree of the player is checked over a plurality of game times, and two types of notice effects are selected while switching to a lottery table that includes many notice effects determined to have high attention. As a result, many notice effects suitable for the player's preference are displayed, and the notice effect can be increased.

  It is conceivable that the player first pays attention to one of the notice effects, and as a result of many notice effects being executed, the player gets tired of the notice effect and starts to pay attention to the other notice effect. Even in this case, since the lottery table for the notice effect is switched according to the attention level of the player at that time, it is possible to flexibly respond to the preference of the player.

  The timer interrupt processing performed by the sound-light side MPU 93 of the present embodiment is different from the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment (FIG. 14) in step S510 and subsequent steps. Specifically, after step S509, the attention degree determination process is performed, the player confirmation process is performed, the imaging control process is performed, and the timer interrupt process ends.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the player confirmation processing. The confirmation process of the player is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S5001, it is determined whether the image capturing completion flag is set to "1". If "1" is not set in the image capturing completion flag (step S5001: NO), it is determined in step S5002 whether the image capturing command flag is set to "1" and the image capturing command flag is set to "1". If "NO" is set (step S5002: NO), the image pickup command flag is set to "1" in step S5003, and the confirmation process of the player is completed. The purpose is to capture the face image of the player. If "1" is set in the image capturing command flag (step S5002: YES), the player confirmation process is ended.

  When "1" is set in the image capturing completion flag (step S5001: YES), the image capturing completion flag is cleared to "0" in step S5003. In the subsequent step S5004, the feature points of the face are extracted from the face image captured this time, and it is determined in step S5005 whether or not the face image captured this time is facing forward. If the face image is facing forward (step S5005: YES), it is determined in step S5006 whether or not there is a face image to be compared. If there is a face image to be compared (step S5006: YES), the face image captured this time is compared with the feature points of the face image to be compared in step S5007, and the two face images are compared in step S5008. It is determined whether the face images belong to the same person. If the two face images do not match (step S5008: NO), the notice flag set to "1" in step S5009 is cleared to "0", and the A counter and the B counter are also set to " 0 ”is cleared. Thereafter, in step S5010, the base notice flag is set to "1". As a result, when the players are switched, the appearance rates of the two types of notice effects are initialized. After a positive determination is made in step S5008 or after step S5010, the face image captured this time is overwritten and saved as a face image for comparison in step S5011, and the confirmation process of the player is finished. When the face image captured this time is not facing the front (step S5005: NO), the image capturing command flag is set to "1" in step S5012, and the confirmation process of the player ends. As a result, when the face image captured this time is not facing forward, the face image to be compared is not overwritten and the image is captured again.

  When the player is replaced, the effect of the player's liking also changes, so it is necessary to initialize and increase the frequency of the effect to suit the liking of the new player. By performing the player confirmation processing, it is possible to confirm whether or not the players have been replaced.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the attention level determination processing. The attention level determination process is performed by the sound light side MPU 93. First, in step S5101, a reference is made to the base data table developed in the sound-light side RAM 95 to determine whether or not it is the start timing of the advance notice effect. In the base data table, the start timing of the advance notice and the imaging completion timing are recorded. If it is the start timing of the notice effect (step S 5101: YES), a corresponding notice effect command is transmitted to the display control device 96 in step S 5102, and the attention degree determination process ends. Thereby, the notice effect is started on the symbol display device 61.

  When it is not the start timing of the advance notice effect (step S5101: NO), it is determined in step S5103 whether or not the advance notice effect is in progress. If the notice production is not in progress (step S5103: NO), this attention level determination processing is ended as it is. If the advance notice is being produced (step S5103: YES), the base data table is referenced to determine whether or not it is the image capture completion timing. The image capturing completion timing is set 0.1 seconds or more before the end of the notice effect.

  If it is not the timing of image capturing completion (step S5104: NO), has 0.1 seconds passed since the advance notice command transmission process of step S5102 or the process of adding “1” to the sorting counter of step S5110 is performed? Determine whether or not. When 0.1 second has not elapsed (step S5105: NO), this attention level determination processing is ended as it is. If 0.1 seconds has elapsed (step S5105: YES), it is determined in step S5106 whether or not "1" is set in the imaging completion flag. The image capturing completion flag is set to "1" in step S915 of the image capturing process (FIG. 21). When "1" is not set in the image capturing completion flag (step S5106: NO), this attention level determination processing is ended as it is. When the image capturing completion flag is set to "1" (step S5106: YES), the image capturing completion flag is cleared to "0" in step S5107, and front facing confirmation processing (FIG. 91) is performed in step S5108. .. The front facing confirmation process is the same as the front facing confirmation process (FIG. 91) described in the fifth embodiment. In step S5109, in response to the result of the front facing confirmation process (step S5108), it is determined whether or not the face image of the player imaged this time is facing forward. When the face image is facing forward (step S5109: YES), "1" is added to the front facing counter in step S5110. The front-facing counter is a counter to which “1” is added when the captured face image of the player is facing forward, and is a counter that counts the number of times the player is determined to be facing front. is there.

  When a negative determination is made in step S5109 or after step S5110, “1” is added to the distribution counter in step S5111. Here, the distribution counter is a counter to which "1" is added every 0.1 seconds after the advance notice effect command transmission process in step S5102 is performed. As will be described later in steps S5112-S5119, when the value of the distribution counter is "1 to 3", when the value of the distribution counter is "4", and when the value of the distribution counter is "5 to 9". And the case where the value of the distribution counter is “10”, the subsequent processing contents are different. Further, the distribution counter is cleared to "0" in the case of "10" or at the image capturing completion timing. That is, the distribution counter is a counter that is cleared to "0" every one second except when it is cleared to "0" at the image capturing completion timing. As will be described later, in the attention level determination process, three imagings are performed every 0.1 seconds, and 0.1 second imaging is performed three times again 0.8 seconds after the third imaging. The processing of the 1-second cycle is repeatedly executed from the start of the notice effect until the image capturing completion timing. The distribution counter is a counter for enabling processing of the 1-second cycle. In step S5112, it is determined whether or not the value of the distribution counter is "1 to 3". When the value of the distribution counter is "1 to 3" (step S5112: YES), the imaging command flag is set to "1" in step 5213, and this attention level determination processing is ended.

  When the value of the distribution counter is not "1 to 3" (step S5112: NO), it is determined in step S5114 whether the value of the distribution counter is "4". When the value of the distribution counter is "4" (step S5114: YES), it is determined in step S5115 whether or not the value of the front facing counter is "3". The front facing counter is "3" when the player's face image is facing forward three times consecutively in the latest three times of imaging. In this attention level determination processing, it is determined that the player has turned to the front once when the face image of the player has faced to the front three times consecutively in three times of imaging performed at 0.1 second intervals. , Count the number of times with the attention counter. When an affirmative determination is made in step S5115, "1" is added to the attention counter in step S5116. After making a negative determination in step S5115 or adding "1" to the attention counter in step S5116, the front facing counter is cleared to "0" in step S5117 and the attention degree determination processing ends. The front-facing counter is determined as to whether or not the value has become “3” after three times of imaging, and “0” is cleared immediately after that. Therefore, in step S5116, "1" is added to the attention counter only when it is determined that the player is facing the front for 0.3 seconds or more.

  When the value of the distribution counter is not "4" (step S5114: NO), it is determined in step S5118 whether the value of the distribution counter is "5 to 9" and the distribution counter When the value is "5 to 9" (step S5118: YES), this attention level determination processing is ended as it is. When the value of the distribution counter is not "5 to 9" (step S5118: NO), it means that the value of the distribution counter is "10". In this case, the distribution is performed in step S5119. The counter is cleared to "0" and this attention level determination processing is ended.

  If it is the image capturing completion timing (step S5105: YES), the sorting counter, the front facing counter, and the image capturing completion flag are cleared to "0" in step S5120. In step S5121, it is determined whether or not the value of the attention counter is 70% or more of the number of times the player's face image has been captured this time. If an affirmative determination is made, "1" is set to the interest flag in step S5122. set. This is because it is determined that the player was paying attention to the notice production. If the value of the attention counter is less than 70% of the number of times the player's face image is captured this time (step S5121: NO), the value of the attention counter captures the player's face image this time in step S5123. It is determined whether the number of times is 30% or less, and if the determination is affirmative, "1" is set to the no interest flag in step S5124. This is because it is determined that the player did not pay attention to the notice production. After the flag is set to "1" in step S5122 or step S5124, the notice table selection process is performed in step S5125, and the attention degree determination process ends. Also, when the value of the attention level counter is larger than 30% of the number of times of imaging and smaller than 70% (step S5123: NO), the notice table selection process is performed in step S5125 and the attention level determination process is ended. To do.

  FIG. 96 shows a flowchart showing the notice table selection processing. The notice table selection process is executed in step S5125 of the attention level determination process (FIG. 95). The notice table selection process is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93. In the notice effect of this embodiment, either notice effect A or notice effect B is displayed. Therefore, when the player shows an interest in the notice effect A or does not show an interest in the notice effect B, the table is selected so as to increase the appearance frequency of the notice effect A. When the player does not show interest in the notice effect A and when the player shows interest in the notice effect B, the table is selected so that the appearance frequency of the notice effect B is increased.

  First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the type of the notice effect performed this time is the notice effect A. When the notice production A is performed this time (step S5201: YES), it is determined in step S5202 whether or not the interest flag is set to "1". When "1" is set in the interest flag (step S5202: YES), "1" is added to the A counter in step S5203. Here, when the notice effect A is performed and it is determined that the player has shown interest in the notice effect A, “1” is added to the A counter.

  In a succeeding step S5204, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for A is 5. When the value of the counter for A is 5 (step S5204: YES), the counter for A is cleared to “0” in step S5205, the counter for B is cleared to “0” in step S5206, and step S5207. Then, the flag changing process A is executed and the notice table selecting process is ended. If the value of the counter for A is less than 5 (step S5204: NO), this advance notice table selection processing is ended.

  If "1" is not set in the interested flag (step S5202: NO), it is determined in step S5208 whether or not the uninteresting flag is set to "1". When an affirmative determination is made in step S5208, "1" is added to the B counter in step S5209. Here, when the notice production A is performed and it is determined that the player did not show interest in the notice production A, “1” is added to the B counter.

  In a succeeding step S5210, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for B is 5. When the value of the B counter is 5 (step S5210: YES), the A counter is cleared to "0" in step S5211, the B counter is cleared to "0" in step S5212, and step S5213. Then, the flag changing process B is performed and the notice table selecting process is ended. If "1" is not set in the no interest flag (step S5208: NO) or the value of the B counter is less than 5 (step S5210: NO), the notice table selecting process is ended as it is.

  If the notice effect performed this time is the notice effect B (step S5201: NO), it is determined in step S5214 whether or not the interest flag is set to "1". When "1" is set in the interest flag (step S5214: YES), "1" is added to the B counter in step S5215. Here, when the notice production B is performed and it is determined that the player is interested in the notice production B, “1” is added to the B counter.

  In a succeeding step S5216, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for B is 5. When the value of the B counter is 5 (step S5216: YES), the A counter is cleared to "0" in step S5217, the B counter is cleared to "0" in step S5218, and step S5219 is performed. Then, the flag changing process B is executed, and the notice table selecting process is ended. If the value of the counter for B is less than 5 (step S5216: NO), the notice table selecting process is ended as it is.

  If "1" is not set in the interest flag (step S5214: NO), it is determined in step S5220 whether "1" is set in the no interest flag. When "1" is set to the no interest flag (step S5220: YES), "1" is added to the A counter in step S5221. Here, when the notice production B is performed and it is determined that the player is not interested in the notice production B, “1” is added to the counter for A.

  In the following step S5222, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for A is 5. When the value of the counter for A is 5 (step S5222: YES), the counter for A is cleared to “0” in step S5223, the counter for B is cleared to “0” in step S5224, and step S5225. Then, the flag changing process A is performed and the notice table selecting process is ended. If "1" is not set in the no interest flag (step S5220: NO) or the value of the counter for A is less than 5 (step S5222: NO), the notice table selecting process is ended as it is.

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the flag changing process A executed in steps S5207 and S5225 of the advance notice table selection process (FIG. 96). The flag changing process A is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93. In the notice effect of this embodiment, either notice effect A or notice effect B is displayed. Which of the two types of notice effects is displayed is determined by a lottery. There are five lottery tables used for the lottery. Specifically, the advance notice A and the advance notice B are selected with a probability of 50%, respectively, the base notice lottery table, the notice lottery A1 notice table with a high appearance frequency, and the notice effect A have a very high appearance frequency. There are five types: an A2 notice lottery table, a B1 notice lottery table with a high appearance frequency of notice production B, and a B2 notice lottery table with a very high appearance frequency of notice production B. The probability that the notice effect A appears in the A1 notice lottery table and the probability that the notice effect B appears in the B1 notice lottery table are both 70%. Further, the probability that the notice effect A appears in the A2 notice lottery table and the probability that the notice effect B appears in the B2 notice lottery table are both 90%. The base announcement lottery table is expanded to the sound-light RAM 95 when the base announcement flag is set to "1", and the A1 announcement lottery table is created to the sound-light RAM 95 when the A1 announcement flag is set to "1". The A2 notice lottery table is expanded to the sound and light side RAM 95 when the A2 notice flag is set to "1", and the B1 notice lottery table is set to the B1 notice flag when "1" is set. The sound-light side RBM 95 is expanded, and the B2 notice lottery table is expanded to the sound-light side RBM 95 when the B2 notice flag is set to "1".

  When a new player takes a seat, the base notice flag is set to "1". Thereafter, when the player pays attention to the notice effect A, the appearance frequency of the notice effect A increases, and when the player pays attention to the notice effect B, the appearance frequency of the notice effect B increases. In this way, by changing the appearance frequency of the two types of advance notice effects in accordance with the degree of attention of the player, it is possible to perform advance notice effects that match the preference of the player.

  First, in step S5301, it is determined whether the B2 advance notice flag is set to "1". If the B2 notice flag is set to "1" (step S5301: YES), the B2 notice flag is cleared to "0" and the B1 notice flag is set to "1" in step S5302. The change process A is completed.

  If "1" is not set in the B2 notice flag (step S5301: NO), it is determined in step S5304 whether or not the B1 notice flag is set to "1". If the B1 notice flag is set to "1" (step S5304: YES), the B1 notice flag is cleared to "0" in step S5305, and the base notice flag is set to "1" in step S5306. Then, this flag change processing A is ended.

  If "1" is not set in the B1 notice flag (step S5304: NO), it is determined in step S5307 whether or not the base notice flag is set to "1". If the base announcement flag is set to "1" (step S5307: YES), the base announcement flag is cleared to "0" in step S5308, and the A1 announcement flag is set to "1" in step S5309. Then, this flag change processing A is finished.

  If "1" is not set in the base announcement flag (step S5307: NO), it is determined in step S5310 whether the A1 announcement flag is set at "1". When an affirmative determination is made when "1" is set in the A1 notice flag (step S5310: YES), the A1 notice flag is cleared to "0" in step S5311, and A2 is set in step S5312. The notice flag is set to "1" and this flag change processing A is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S5310, this flag changing process A is ended as it is.

  FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the flag changing process B executed in steps S5313 and S5319 of the advance notice table selection process (FIG. 96). The flag changing process B is performed by the sound-light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the A2 notice flag. If the A2 notice flag is set to "1" (step S5401: YES), the A2 notice flag is cleared to "0" in step S5402, and the A1 notice flag is set to "1". The change process B is ended.

  If the A2 notice flag is not set to "1" (step S5401: NO), it is determined in step S5404 whether the A1 notice flag is set to "1". If the A1 notice flag is set to "1", the A1 notice flag is cleared to "0" in step S5405, and the base notice flag is set to "1" in step S5406 to change the flag. Finish B.

  When "1" is not set in the A1 notice flag (step S5404: NO), it is determined in step S5407 whether or not the base notice flag is set to "1". If the base announcement flag is set to "1" (step S5407: YES), the base announcement flag is cleared to "0" in step S5408, and the B1 announcement flag is set to "1" in step S5409. Then, this flag change processing B is ended.

  If "1" is not set in the base announcement flag (step S5407: NO), it is determined in step S5410 whether the B1 announcement flag is set at "1". If the B1 notice flag is set to "1" (step S5410: YES), the B1 notice flag is cleared to "0" in step S5411, and the B2 notice flag is set to "1" in step S5412. Then, this flag change processing B is ended. If "1" is not set in the B1 notice flag (step S5410: NO), this flag changing process B is directly terminated.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

  One kind of effect is selected and executed from the two kinds of effects recorded in the sound-light side ROM 94. In addition, lottery of production is performed every game. Then, the degree of attention of the player to the effect selected and executed by the lottery is evaluated. The player's attention to the effect is examined a plurality of times, and the appearance frequency of the effect evaluated as high attention increases, and the appearance frequency of the effect evaluated as low attention decreases. For this reason, an effect suitable for the player's preference is executed.

  If attention is not paid to the notice A, it is considered that the notice B is interested. As a result, it is possible to determine which one the player is paying attention to, even when one notice is selected in large numbers in the base lottery table.

  When the player is changed by performing the player confirmation process, the original base lottery table is used. Thereby, even when the previous player is paying attention to one of the notices, the two notices can be redisplayed with equal probability to the new player.

  It is possible that the appearance frequency of each effect changes according to the player's preference and one type of effect is intensively selected, so that the player gets tired of the effect. In this case as well, if the player's attention to the effect decreases, the appearance frequency of each effect gradually changes, and the appearance frequency of other effects increases. That is, it is possible to deal with a change in the player's preference.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. By the way, the configurations of the following different modes may be applied individually or in combination with the configurations of the above-described embodiments.

  (1) In the first embodiment, when the player's answer is grasped within the time limit in the selection effect, the story part of the super reach effect is started immediately after and the reverberation part is provided after the story is completed. It was composed. This makes it possible to maintain a constant time from the start of the selective effect to the end of the reverberation part, even if the answer grasp timing is different. However, the method of keeping the time from the start of the selective effect to the end of the super reach effect constant is not limited to this. Immediately after the answer is grasped, a video showing that the answer is successfully grasped may be displayed, and then the super reach effect may be displayed. In this case, the length of the image showing that the answer is successfully grasped is changed according to the timing of grasping the answer, and the super reach effect for a prescribed time is displayed at a prescribed timing. This makes it possible to keep the time from the start of the selection effect to the end of the super reach effect constant.

  (2) In the first embodiment, the amount of displacement of the feature points in the lip region is obtained, and when the period in which the amount of displacement is small continues for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that the player has completed the answer. As a result, after the player finishes answering, it is possible to promptly proceed to the next effect or the like. However, the method of determining the player's answer end timing is not limited to this. When the amount of displacement of the feature points in the lip region continues for a predetermined time or more, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the flag of the first character, and if "1" is set, It may be considered as the end timing of the answer. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the gaming machine determines that it is the time to finish answering before the player starts answering, if the player has been worried for a long time before starting to answer. Become. This is because "1" is not set in the flag of the first character while the player is worried.

  (3) In the first embodiment, the amount of displacement of the feature points in the lip region is obtained, and when the amount of displacement is small, it is determined that the player is uttering a word, and character recognition processing (FIG. 47) is performed. Although it is configured to start, the timing for starting the process for grasping the word being pronounced by the player is not limited to this. For example, when the position information of the feature points corresponding to “a”, “i”, “u”, “e”, and “o” is detected, a process for grasping the word pronounced by the player is performed. It may be configured to start. This makes it possible to deal with the case where the player answers quickly.

  (4) In the first embodiment, the answer recognition process (FIG. 53) and the character number recognition process (FIG. 54) are performed as a method of recognizing the verbal answer of the player. However, the method of recognizing the verbal answer of the player is not limited to this. For example, the player's answer may be grasped based on the last lip shape of the player giving the answer. Specifically, in the case of conversation production, when the last lip shape corresponds to “u”, it is determined that the player's answer is “think”, and when the last lip shape is “i”. It is determined that the player's answer is "I don't think". Also, in the case of selective rendering, it is determined that the player's answer is “red” when the last lip shape is “a”, and the player is determined when the last lip shape is “i”. Answer is "green". In this way, by making the vowels of the final letters of the options presented when the player verbally answers different among the options, it is possible to grasp the answer based on the last lip shape of the player making the answer. Become.

  In this case, one vowel sound recognized from the lip shape may be sequentially overwritten and stored. For example, when the player answers "I think, I don't think after all", "i" is stored as the last character. This makes it possible to recognize the answer "I don't think" regardless of the process in the middle. As described above, by grasping only the last one sound, it is possible to deal with the case where a rewording is made.

  Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which both the answer recognition process (FIG. 53) and the character number recognition process (FIG. 54) are performed, and only one of these processes may be performed. For example, the answer recognition process may be executed but the character number recognition process may not be executed, or the character number recognition process may be executed but the answer recognition process may not be executed.

  (5) In the first embodiment, the game machine provides a question, and the player verbally answers the provided question. Then, the gaming machine grasps the player's answer and provides a reply comment. In this case, the reply comment is associated with the degree of expectation that the result of the lottery will be a jackpot result. Therefore, the player can know the degree of expectation that the result of the winning / winning lottery will be a jackpot result from the reply comment provided by the gaming machine. However, the information associated with the reply comment is not limited to the degree of expectation that the result of the win / loss lot will be a big hit result. In a gaming machine in which small hits and latent probability changes occur, reply comments may be associated with the degree of expectation that latent latency changes are occurring. As a result, the player can know the degree of expectation that the latent probability is changing by participating in the effect of verbally answering the question provided by the gaming machine. Here, in the case of a small hit, short opening occurs a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 or 3 times) in the opening / closing execution mode, and long opening does not occur. Further, in the case of a small hit, the support mode and the win / loss lottery mode do not change before and after the opening / closing execution mode. When the latent probability changes, the same number of short openings as in the case of a small hit occurs in the opening / closing execution mode, and long opening does not occur. In addition, when the latent probability changes, the support mode does not change before and after the opening / closing execution mode, but the winning / winning lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode. When an opening / closing execution mode occurs in which short opening is performed a predetermined number of times and ends, it is not possible to visually determine the latent probability change and the small hit. For this reason, when the expectation that the latent probability is changing is not notified, the player has no choice but to predict whether or not the single release is in the high-probability mode.

  Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an effect regarding the degree of expectation that the latent probability is being changed may be executed. For example, in the case of latency probability change, if a reach effect occurs for a predetermined time or more and a deviation result is generated, a comment is displayed to inform that the latency effect is in progress in the conversation effect in the next game time. Is also good.

  (6) In the first embodiment, a part of the reply comment is common when the pachinko machine 10 recognizes "I think" and "I do not think" the player's answer in the conversation production. The table (FIG. 35) is used. However, the structure of the reply comment to the player is not limited to this. A configuration may be used in which the response comments are all different when the pachinko machine 10 recognizes the player's answer as “think” and “not think”. As a result, the degree of expectation that the winning / winning lottery result is a big hit is associated with the reply comment on a one-to-one basis, and it is possible to show the expectation degree of the big hit to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  (7) In the first embodiment, in the reply comment displayed on the symbol display device 61 when the pachinko machine 10 recognizes the player's answer in the conversation production as "thinking", the result of the current game is true or false. Of the reply comments with a 100% expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot result and the reply comments displayed on the symbol display device 61 when the pachinko machine 10 recognizes that the player's answer is "I do not think", The result of winning / winning lottery in the game times is a big hit result. Similarly, of the reply comments displayed on the symbol display device 61 when the pachinko machine 10 recognizes the player's answer as "don't think", the expectation that the win / loss lottery result will be a jackpot result is 100%. Of the reply comment and the reply comment displayed on the symbol display device 61 when the pachinko machine 10 recognizes the player's answer as "think", the expectation that the winning / winning lottery result is a jackpot result is not 100%. However, the configuration is not common. This is because the pachinko machine 10 erroneously recognizes the player's answer and displays a comment with a 100% expected degree of a jackpot result, but eliminates the possibility of a miss result. However, when the color of the cut-in image is different, the reply comment associated with the answer "I think" is associated with the reply comment with a 100% expected degree of a jackpot result and the answer "I don't think". Among the response comments that have been given, it is possible to have common response comments that do not have a 100% expectation of a jackpot result. This is because, in this case, the player can identify the combination with the cut-in image. This increases the player's attention to the color of the cut-in image.

  (8) In the first embodiment, in the conversation production, the player is urged to clearly indicate the two options "I think" and "Do not think", and the player selects one of them to answer. With the configuration, the words that the pachinko machine 10 identifies are limited to two kinds, "I think" and "I do not think." However, the method of recognizing the player's answer is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the player is only asked "Is this variation hot?" And no options are presented. In this case, at the designing stage, a processing configuration is adopted in which the words that the player can answer are predicted and all the predicted words are identified. Specifically, whether or not the answer understood by the pachinko machine 10 applies to the words such as "I think", "I don't think", "Yes", "No", "Atsui", and "Samui". The processing configuration is to determine. This allows the player to reply freely.

  (9) In the first embodiment, in the conversation production, the player is clearly instructed to select two options "I think" and "Do not think", and the player is guided to select and answer one of them. With the configuration, the words that the pachinko machine 10 identifies are limited to two kinds, "I think" and "I do not think." However, the method of recognizing the player's answer is not limited to this. For example, even when the options are presented, the answer may be identified by including words other than the options. By adopting a configuration in which words that are close to the options and that are expected to be answered by the player at the design stage are also identified, the answer recognition rate of the player can be increased.

  (10) In the first embodiment, the closed state is not recorded, and up to the fourth vowel is recorded to grasp the player's answer. On the other hand, the closed state may be recorded to grasp the player's answer. Specifically, when the closed state is represented by “n”, “think” is recognized as “onou”, and “do not think” is recognized as “onoi”. By recognizing "n" indicating the closed state, the player's answer can be grasped more accurately. In this case, it is necessary to provide at least the flag of the fifth character. As described above, the number of flags corresponding to the sum of the number of vowels included in the answer and the number of times of the closed state when answering is required.

  (11) In the first embodiment, the player recognizes the words selected by the five vowels. However, the method of grasping the words of the player is not limited to this. The answer may be grasped by recognizing the consonant. For example, it is also possible to grasp the number of consonants, such as "m" or "p", that always accompanies the closed state at the time of pronunciation to grasp the player's answer. This is realized by displaying on the symbol display device 61 questions with different numbers of “m” or “p” included in the expected answers.

  Furthermore, by grasping the player's answers by combining vowels and consonants, it is possible to deal with a wider variety of answers. For example, “think” and “not think” include the consonant “m”, whereas “yes” and “no” do not include “m” or “p”. Therefore, first, it is determined whether or not the closed state is included, if the closed state is included, it is identified as “think” or “not think”, and if the closed state is not included, It can be configured to identify “yes” or “no”. This makes it possible to identify the last vowel "i" of "don't think" and the last vowel "i" of "yes" by the combination with the consonant.

  (12) In the first embodiment, the player is imaged, the mouth feature points (T13 to T18) are extracted from the imaged result, and the words pronounced by the player from the position information of the feature points. It is configured to grasp. However, the configuration in which the player recognizes the words being pronounced is not limited to this. You may collect the player's words with a microphone. In this case, even if the orientation of the player's face is oblique with respect to the imaging device 73, it is possible to identify the answer as long as the sound can reach.

  (13) In the first embodiment, whether or not the jackpot is confirmed depending on the type of comment displayed on the symbol display device 61 when the conversation effect is performed and the player's answer is grasped. Was notified. However, the condition for the player to be notified of confirmation is not limited to this. The player may be imaged when the winning / winning lottery result is a big hit, and the confirmation may be notified when the state in which the player's eyes are closed for a predetermined time or more is detected. By setting the condition of the confirmation notification to the state in which the eyes are closed for a predetermined time or more, it is possible to distinguish from the state in which the eyes are closed in the blink.

  (14) In the first embodiment, the question is displayed to the player to prompt the player to give a verbal answer. Then, the player is imaged, the mouth feature points (T13 to T18) are extracted from the imaged result, and the words pronounced by the player are grasped from the position information of the feature points. As a result, the player can obtain the feeling of communicating with the gaming machine. However, the method of giving the player the feeling of communicating with the gaming machine is not limited to this. Even when the game machine grasps a gesture or the like performed by the player and executes processing associated with the grasped result, it is possible to give the player a feeling of communicating with the game machine. For example, the player may ask a question, the player may express “O” or “×” using a finger or an arm, and the situation may be imaged to grasp the answer of the player. In addition, a question with a plurality of options that is associated with the number in a one-to-one correspondence is asked, and the player answers by pointing his / her finger at the number of the corresponding number. It may be configured to grasp.

  (15) In the first embodiment, when the player verbally answers, a plurality of characters are grasped at once. However, the method of grasping the verbal answer of the player is not limited to this. For example, a method of grasping character by character may be used. In this case, the words "Please answer the first letter" and "Please answer the second letter" are sequentially displayed on the symbol display device 61. As a result, even when characters with similar lip shapes continue in succession, the answer can be grasped more accurately.

  (16) In the first embodiment, the player grasps a plurality of characters when making an oral response. However, the method of grasping the verbal answer of the player is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be used in which options are displayed and only the last lip shape of the player's answer is grasped. By displaying the options on the symbol display device 61, the player's answer is limited to the number of options. The last one character of the options to be stored in the sound-light side ROM 94 should not be overlapped with each other in advance. Thereby, when the player answers one of the options at a regular conversation interval, the player's answer can be grasped only from the last lip shape.

  (17) In the third embodiment, the comment of the player is grasped by displaying the comment by lottery from the comment group stored in advance as a pair with the question without grasping the answer of the player. In this configuration, there is no need for a highly accurate image pickup means for performing. However, the method of performing an effect without using a highly accurate image pickup means is not limited to this. For example, the line of sight is detected or the feature points of the face are extracted so that only the direction of the face can be grasped, and the options for answers displayed on the symbol display device 61 are moved in different directions over time. Specifically, there are two options, and one option is moved in the left-right direction of the symbol display device 61, and the other option is moved in the up-down direction. Since the player is likely to follow the options when answering, the player can infer the answer selected by the change in the direction of the face in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction.

  (18) In the third embodiment described above, when the movement of the player's mouth stops within the answer time limit, the comment that is paired with the question is displayed on the symbol display device 61, but this is not the only option. Instead, the comment may be displayed on the symbol display device 61 when the player's mouth moves within the response time limit. In this case, if the player's mouth moves within the answer time limit, the comment is not displayed immediately, but if the player's mouth movement continues within the answer time limit, the answer time limit Wait for the comment to be displayed within the limit of elapsed time. If the player's mouth stops moving within the response time limit, the comment display will start without waiting for the response time limit to elapse, and if the player's mouth movement does not stop within the response time limit. May be configured to start displaying a comment when the response time limit has elapsed.

  (19) In the third embodiment, when the movement of the mouth of the player stops within the response time limit, a comment paired with the question is displayed on the symbol display device 61. The comment is selected regardless of the movement of the player's mouth. However, the method of selecting the comment displayed on the symbol display device 61 is not limited to this. The comment displayed on the symbol display device 61 may correspond to the type of the mouth movement of the player. In this case, the type of movement of the player's mouth is grasped instead of grasping the sound uttered by the player one by one from the movement of the player's mouth. Then, it is determined whether the recognized type of mouth movement corresponds to any one of a plurality of types of mouth movements stored in advance. Then, if there is a corresponding mouth movement type, a comment corresponding to the mouth movement type is selected. The image pickup device 73 used in this case has only to have an accuracy with which the type of movement of the mouth of the player can be identified. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the process corresponding to the movement of the mouth of the player has been executed while simplifying the configuration of the game machine. Further, in a gaming machine equipped with a highly accurate image pickup device 73 capable of grasping each sound produced by the player based on the movement of the mouth of the player, the resolution of the image pickup result obtained by the image pickup, etc. The same process may be performed when the sound becomes lower depending on the condition and it is not possible to grasp each sound produced by the player. In this case, even if the imaging condition is poor and the player cannot grasp the words pronounced one by one, it is possible to display a comment on the symbol display device 61 according to the type of the mouth movement of the player. ..

  (20) In the above-described first to fourth embodiments, a question to the player, a reply comment to the player, and the like are displayed on the symbol display device 61 and transmitted to the player. However, the method of transmitting the question and the reply comment to the player is not limited to this. For example, a question and a reply comment may be transmitted to the player using voice. Further, both the voice and the pattern display device 61 may be used. By using the voice, it is possible for the player to participate in the production with a feeling closer to an actual conversation.

  (21) In the first to fourth embodiments described above, in the case of a jackpot confirmation, the player is notified of the confirmation by using the comment displayed on the symbol display device 61 for the content verbally answered by the player. .. However, the method of notifying the player of the confirmation is not limited to this. In the "I think" or "I don't think" effect, when a girl first appears on the pattern display device 61 and a balloon "Look at me and answer" is displayed, a voice is played at the same time to give a final notice. May be. Since there are a plurality of confirmation notification timings, it is possible to diversify the effect.

  (22) In the fourth embodiment, the time from displaying the question on the symbol display device to displaying the comment to the player's answer is randomly selected by lottery so that the conversation is not unnatural. It was decided to be. However, the method of preventing unnaturalness during the conversation with the player is not limited to this. After displaying the question on the pattern display device 61, the content "Please touch the screen when the answer is decided and then answer" is displayed, and a few seconds after the player touches the screen, the comment for the player's answer is displayed. You may. The point is that the player may detect the timing at which he / she starts the response, and reply after the time required for the response has elapsed from the timing.

  (23) In the fourth embodiment, the game machine provides a question to the player, and there are a plurality of types of periods from the question providing timing to the comment providing timing corresponding to the question. . Then, the plurality of types of periods are randomly determined by lottery. As a result, even in the same presentation, the period from the question providing timing to the comment providing timing corresponding to the question is different, so that the player has a feeling close to an actual conversation. However, the randomly determined period is not limited to the period from the question providing timing to the comment providing timing corresponding to the question. For example, in a configuration in which different effects are performed depending on whether the player's hand enters the detection range of the detection means or not, the detection period of the detection means is determined from a plurality of types of detection periods by lottery or sequential change. You may. Further, in a configuration in which the operation means is present and different effects are performed depending on the operation mode of the operation means, the detection period by the detection means may be determined from a plurality of types of detection periods by lottery or sequential change. In this way, in a configuration in which a predetermined action performed by the player is detected and processing based on the detection result is executed, the detection period is determined from a plurality of types of detection periods, so that different conditions are set even in the same effect. As a result, it is possible to give the production a wide range.

  Further, in the case of a configuration in which the detection period is determined from a plurality of types of detection periods, a configuration in which the determination period of the detection period is different depending on whether a privilege such as the occurrence of a jackpot result is given to the player or not. Good. For example, in a situation where the privilege is granted, a longer period may be selected as the detection period than in the situation where the privilege is not granted, and in the situation where the privilege is granted, the detection period is shorter than the situation where the privilege is not granted. The period may be easily selected. Further, in the situation where the privilege is granted, the detection period that is not selected in the situation where the privilege is not granted may be selected. In this case, the detection period that is selected in the situation where the privilege is granted and is not selected in the situation where the privilege is not granted may be a detection period longer than the longest detection period that can be selected in the situation where the privilege is not granted. The detection period may be shorter than the shortest detection period that can be selected in the situation where the privilege is not granted. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the degree of expectation of award of privilege through the length of the detection period.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the detection period is determined in association with the privilege-giving expectation degree, the detection period may be notified to the player. This makes it possible for the player to clearly understand the detection period related to the degree of expectation of award.

  (24) In the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine provides a question to the player, and there are a plurality of types of periods from the question providing timing to the comment providing timing corresponding to the question. . Then, the plurality of types of periods are randomly determined by lottery. As a result, even in the same presentation, the period from the question providing timing to the comment providing timing corresponding to the question is different, so that the player has a feeling close to an actual conversation. However, the random decision is not limited to the length of the period. The start timing of the detection period by the detection means may be randomly determined. Even when the same effect is performed, the effect can be widened because the detection start timing is different. Specifically, in a configuration in which an effect is produced according to the facial expression of the player, the facial expression of the player is highly likely to change depending on whether the timing of the detection is the early stage or the final stage of the production.

  (25) In the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine provides the player with a question, and there are a plurality of types of periods from the question providing timing to the comment providing timing corresponding to the question. . Then, the plurality of types of periods are randomly determined by lottery. However, the means for selecting one period from a plurality of types of periods is not limited to this. For example, the degree of expectation of a jackpot may be associated with the length of the detection period by the detection means. Specifically, the higher the expectation of the big hit, the longer the detection period may be, and the lower the expectation of the big hit, the shorter the detection period may be. The length of the detection period makes it possible to inform the player of the degree of expectation of a jackpot.

  (26) In the fifth embodiment, the face of the player is imaged immediately after the start of the reach production, the orientation of the player's face and changes in facial expressions are grasped, and the player's attention to the reach production is determined. A corresponding comment is inserted into the symbol display device 61. However, the timing of capturing the face of the player is not limited to immediately after the start of the reach effect. After the reach effect has progressed to some extent, the player's face may be imaged for the purpose of grasping the reaction of the player. As a result, the reaction of the player after watching the reach effect for a predetermined time can be grasped.

  (27) In the fifth embodiment, the face of the player is imaged immediately after the reach effect, the direction of the player's face and changes in facial expression are grasped, and the player's attention to the reach effect is determined. The comment is inserted in the symbol display device 61. However, the method of inserting a comment in the symbol display device 61 according to the degree of attention of the player is not limited to this. For example, the face of the player may be constantly imaged during the reach production, and the comment may be constantly displayed on the symbol display device 61. Then, the comment may be constantly updated according to the change of the player. Specifically, the comment is updated according to the attention level for the last 3 seconds. The type of comment changes depending on the degree of attention of the player. In this case, the comment selection table may be changed according to the degree of attention of the player. Further, the comment selection table may be different between the beginning and the end of the reach production. As a result, when it is determined that the player is paying too much attention in the early stage of the reach production, a comment that calms the player, such as "still more", is inserted. When it is determined that the player is not paying much attention to the final stage of the reach, a comment that attracts the player's attention, such as “now is the moment of the game!” Is inserted.

  (28) In the fifth and sixth embodiments, whether or not the player is paying attention to the effect is determined by the player's face orientation, and the face orientation is extracted from the captured face image. The configuration is obtained from the position information of the feature points. However, the method of determining whether or not the player is paying attention to the effect is not limited to this. It may be determined that the player's line of sight is detected and if the player's line of sight is within the range of the symbol display device 61, the player is paying attention to the effect.

  (29) In the sixth embodiment, the degree of attention of the player regarding two types of notice effects is grasped, and the appearance frequency of notice effects having a high degree of attention is increased. The method of changing the effect using the player's attention is not limited to this. For example, two types of two-part notice productions are stored, only the first half of the two types of notice productions are stored in the base notice lottery table, and the second half of the notice lottery table other than the base is also stored. It can be configured to be stored. As a result, when the player pays attention to a certain effect, not only the appearance frequency of the effect increases, but also a sequel to the effect appears, which can attract the player's attention.

  (30) In the sixth embodiment, the image pickup for the purpose of checking whether or not the player has been replaced and the image pickup for the purpose of checking whether or not the player is interested in the effect are separately performed. . However, it is possible to omit the imaging for the purpose of checking whether or not the players have been replaced. In this case, the feature points of the player's face in the current game round and the face of the player in the previous game round are used by using the result of imaging performed for the purpose of checking whether or not the player is interested in the production. By comparing the characteristic points, it is possible to determine whether or not the player is replaced.

  (31) In the sixth embodiment, the notice effect A or the notice effect B is alternatively performed as the notice effect. Then, when the player does not show interest in the notice production A, the appearance frequency of the notice production B is increased, and when the player does not show interest in the notice production B, the appearance frequency of the notice production A is increased. did. However, the method of performing the notice production according to the player's preference is not limited to this. It is also possible to increase the appearance rate of the notice effect that the player showed interest in and decrease the appearance rate of the effect that the player did not show interest. In this case, the appearance rate of the notice effect that the player did not show an interest in is reduced within a range that does not become negative.

  Specifically, when there are three notice effects A to C as notice effects, and when there are three counters A to C that have a larger value as the player's interest is higher, the player gives notice effects. When interested in A, the counter for A is incremented by "1". When the player does not show interest in the notice effect A, "1" is subtracted within the range in which the A counter does not become negative.

  (32) In the sixth embodiment, the notice effect A or the notice effect B is alternatively performed as the notice effect. Then, when the player does not show interest in the notice production A, the appearance frequency of the notice production B is increased, and when the player does not show interest in the notice production B, the appearance frequency of the notice production A is increased. did. However, the method of performing the notice production according to the player's preference is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the notice production A and the notice production B each have a sequel. In this case, if the player continues to pay attention to a certain notice effect, the appearance frequency of the notice effect gradually increases. Further, when the notice production is continuously focused, a sequel to the notice production may appear. The player pays attention to the notice production that he / she is interested in, and the appearance rate of the notice production that attracts attention increases. As a result, the player may get tired of seeing the desired performance. On the other hand, by adopting a configuration in which the sequel appears when the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to perform a production which is of great interest to the player for a long period of time, and the player is not bored.

  (33) In the sixth embodiment, the appearance probabilities of the two types of notice effects are changed according to the degree of attention of the player. However, it is not limited to the appearance probability of the notice effect that changes depending on the degree of attention of the player. For example, the type of the main character in the effect may be changed. Specifically, an effect in which a plurality of types of characters are sequentially displayed during a big hit is performed, and the character with the highest attention degree of the player is selected by determination. By providing the effect in which the character appears as the main character preferentially in the game times after the jackpot is over, it is possible to perform an effect that is of great interest to the player.

  (34) In the sixth embodiment, the appearance probabilities of the two types of notice effects are changed according to the degree of attention of the player. However, the method of changing the content of the effect according to the degree of attention of the player is not limited to this. For example, the type of the main character in the effect may be changed. Specifically, a plurality of types of characters are simultaneously displayed during a big hit, and the player's line of sight is detected to determine the character the player is paying attention to. By using the character as the main character to be displayed, it is possible to perform an effect that is of high interest to the player.

  (35) In the sixth embodiment, the effect is determined by displaying the effect on the symbol display device 61 in the entire screen and determining the degree of attention of the player for each game. However, the method of determining the player's attention level is not limited to this. For example, the screen is divided into nine parts, and nine types of effects are simultaneously executed. Then, the player's line of sight is detected during the performance to analyze which range of the screen divided by 9 the player is paying attention to. In the next game time, the screen is divided into four, and four types of effects that attracted a lot of attention are executed at the same time. Then, the player's line of sight is detected during the performance to analyze which range of the screen divided into four parts by the player. Specifically, it is detected how long the player's line of sight is focused on each area of the screen, and the player's eyes are ranked in descending order of time. Then, it is configured such that only the productions that are higher in the ranking are left. In this way, by gradually narrowing down the effects of high interest to the player in the order of 9-division, 4-division, 2-division, and full-screen display, the player's interest is attracted over a plurality of game times. It becomes possible to attach.

  (36) In the sixth embodiment, the appearance probabilities of two types of notice effects are changed according to the degree of attention of the player. However, it is not limited to the appearance probability of the notice effect that changes depending on the degree of attention of the player. For example, in the production in which a plurality of types of characters fight, the position change of each character is minimized, the player's line of sight is detected in the first half of the production, and the characters are ranked in the order in which the player is paying attention. Then, in the latter half of the effect, an effect is selected according to the ranking the player has paid attention to. Specifically, an effect is given in which the character that the player's attention level is low is sequentially lost. The effect may be performed over a plurality of game times. As a result, the time that the character supported by the player is displayed becomes the longest, and it is possible to perform an effect according to the player's interest.

  (37) In the first and second embodiments described above, a sound collecting microphone is provided instead of the configuration in which the player's mouth is grasped based on the imaging result of the imaging device 73 and the words spoken by the player are grasped. The word may be grasped by collecting the word spoken by the player with the sound collecting microphone. Further, based on the image pickup result of the image pickup device 73, the word spoken by the player is grasped from the movement of the mouth of the player, and the word is grasped by collecting the word spoken by the player by the sound collecting microphone. It may be configured to. In this case, it is possible to use the respective grasped results, and it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the words spoken by the player.

  (38) Display control based on a command output from the main control device 81 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 96 is controlled by the sound emission control device 91 based on the command output from the main control device 81. The device 06 may control the audio emission control device 91. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 91 and the display control device 96 are separately provided, both control devices may be provided as one control device, and the function of one of the both control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 81, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 81. The configuration of the command output from the main control device 81 to the sound emission control device 91 and the configuration of the command output from the sound emission control device 91 to the display control device 96 are also arbitrary.

  (39) The device for executing the game use effect is not limited to the symbol display device 61, and the movable use effect member is operated to execute the game use effect. Alternatively, it may be configured such that a game light effect is executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or a game time effect may be executed by a combination of all or some of the above-described aspects. Good.

  (40) In the above-described embodiment, the special result display units 62a and 62b are configured to display the stop results corresponding to the respective game results, but instead of this, the special character display units 62a and 62b may be omitted. Well, it may be configured such that the common stop result is displayed on the special figure display parts 62a and 62b regardless of the game result, and the stop result is randomly displayed on the special figure display parts 62a and 62b. As a result, it may be configured such that the game result cannot be identified from the display of the special figure display portions 62a and 62b.

  (41) Another type of pachinko machine different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a big hit upon entering, a pachinko machine provided with other accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, or the like.

  Further, a non-ball-ball type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols in the circumferential direction is provided, the reel is started to rotate by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels stop after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can be applied to a slot machine.

  Further, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame to be openable and closable is provided with a storage part and a loading device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage part are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined so that the reel starts to rotate.

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above-described embodiment>
The features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above-described embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses, etc., but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses, etc.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Grasping means (a function of executing signal processing in the image pickup device 73 and the signal processing circuit 75, an image determination processing in the sound-light side MPU 93) for grasping a grasped object that is at least one of a word spoken by the player and a movement of the player's mouth. Function to execute)
Process executing means for executing a process corresponding to the grasped result by the grasping means (step S2012, step S2015, step S2017, step S3113, step S3604, step S3703, step S3705, step S3707, step S3709, step in the sound-light side MPU 93). A function of executing the processing of S4111, step S4119, step S4512 and step S5125),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic A1, it is configured to execute a process corresponding to at least one of a word spoken by the player and a movement of the player's mouth. This makes it possible to execute processing corresponding to the words of the player, processing corresponding to the movement of the player's mouth, and processing corresponding to both the words and movement of the player's mouth. In the configuration capable of processing corresponding to the player's words, it is possible to grasp the player's words and perform an effect corresponding to the player's words. As a result, the player can feel as if he / she is talking to the gaming machine. Further, in the configuration capable of processing corresponding to the movement of the player's mouth, it is possible to obtain the feeling of having a smooth conversation with the game machine even in a place where words are difficult to hear like a normal game hall. it can. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game content.

Feature A2. Grasping means for grasping the state of the detection range different from the phenomenon of whether or not the detection target is present in the detection range (image pickup device 73, function of executing signal processing in signal processing circuit 75, image in sound-light side MPU 93) Determination function, position information storage processing, and the function of executing the processing of step S4815 to step S4819),
Process executing means for executing the process corresponding to the grasping result of the grasping means (step S2012, step S2015, step S2017, step S3113, step S3604, step S3703, step S3705, step S3707, step S3709, step in the sound-light side MPU 93). A function of executing the processing of S4111, step S4119, step S4512 and step S5125),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the feature A2, it becomes possible to execute an effect corresponding to the state of the detection range different from the phenomenon of whether or not the detection target exists in the detection range, and it is possible to provide a novel game content. Becomes

Features A3. Image pickup means for picking up an image of the player (a function of executing signal processing in the image pickup device 73 and the signal processing circuit 75, a function of executing image pickup control processing in the sound-light side MPU 93),
A grasping unit that grasps the position information of the predetermined part of the player based on the image pickup result of the image pickup unit (a function of executing the image determination process, the position information storage process, and the processes of step S4815 to step S4819 in the sound-light side MPU 93). ,
Processing execution means for executing processing corresponding to the grasping result of the grasping means (step S2012, step S2015, step S2017, step S3113, step S3604, step S3703, step S3705, step S3707, step S3709, step in the sound-light side MPU 93). A function of executing the processing of S4111, step S4119, step S4512 and step S5125),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic A3, since the position information of the predetermined part of the player is grasped based on the image pickup result by the image pickup means, the process corresponding to the operation of the player on the operation unit such as the operation button is executed. Compared with the above, it becomes possible to increase the arbitrariness of the movement of the predetermined part of the player to be grasped, and it is possible to provide a novel game content.

  Features A4. The gaming machine according to Feature A3, wherein the grasping unit grasps, as the position information of the predetermined region, position information of a predetermined region on the player's face.

  According to the feature A4, it is possible to execute processing corresponding to the facial expression of the player, the movement of the mouth, the target of interest, and the like. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game different from the configuration in which the process corresponding to the operation of the player on the operation unit such as the operation button is executed. Furthermore, even when the player is allowed to move a predetermined part, the player does not need to perform a manual operation simply by changing the facial movement. It is possible to move a predetermined part to.

  Features A5. The processing execution means provides correspondence information corresponding to the grasping result of the grasping means (corresponding information providing means (step S2012, step S2015, step S2017, step S3113 in the pattern display device 61, sound-light side MPU 93). , A function of executing the processing of step S3604, step S3703, step S3705, step S3707, step S3709, step S4114, step S4119, and step S4512), the gaming machine according to characteristic A3 or A4.

  According to the characteristic A5, since the information corresponding to the movement of the predetermined portion of the player is provided from the gaming machine, it becomes possible to make a meaning to move the predetermined portion, and the player can set the predetermined portion. It becomes possible to actively move.

Features A6. The grasping means is
As the position information of the predetermined part, a mouth grasping means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2101 to S2104 in the sound-light side MPU 93) for grasping the movement of the mouth of the player,
Word information grasping means for grasping the word information from the player side based on the grasping result of the mouth grasping means (function of performing character recognition processing by the sound-light side MPU 93 and processing of steps S2502 to S2509),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to Feature A5, wherein the correspondence information providing unit provides, as the correspondence information, information on a word corresponding to the word information grasped by the word information grasping unit.

  According to the characteristic A6, the word information from the player side is grasped and the information of the word corresponding to the word information is provided to the player, so that it seems as if the player is talking with the game machine. It is possible to give an impression. As a result, it is possible to give a surprising effect to the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the configuration is such that word information from the player side is grasped by grasping the movement of the mouth instead of collecting the voice of the player, it is an environment where various sounds are overflowing in the game hall. Even so, it is possible to grasp the word information from the player side.

Features A7. The correspondence information is word information,
The correspondence information providing means,
When the grasping result of the grasping unit is the first grasping result, the first providing unit (a function of executing the process of step S2012 in the sound-light side MPU 93) that provides the correspondence information in a corresponding mode When,
When the grasping result of the grasping unit is the second grasping result, the second providing unit (a function of executing the process of step S2015 in the sound-light side MPU 93) that provides the correspondence information in a corresponding mode When,
Equipped with
At least the corresponding information provided by the first providing means in a predetermined situation, the first side giving correspondence information that is selected when a privilege is granted to the player and is not selected when the privilege is not granted, At least the first side unknown correspondence information selected when the privilege is not granted is set,
At least the second side grant correspondence information which is selected when the privilege is granted and is not selected when the privilege is not granted to at least the benefit information provided by the second providing means in at least the predetermined situation, and at least the benefit. The second side unknown correspondence information selected when is not given is set,
The words of the first side assignment correspondence information and the words of the second side unknown correspondence information are different, and the words of the first side unknown correspondence information and the words of the second side assignment correspondence information are different. The gaming machine described in the feature A5 or A6.

  According to the characteristic A7, since the correspondence information that clearly indicates that the privilege is given can be provided, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the correspondence information, and to move the predetermined part with respect to the player. It is possible to make it actively. In this case, the words of the first side assigned correspondence information and the words of the second side unknown correspondence information are different, and the words of the first side unknown correspondence information and the words of the second side assigned correspondence information are different. As a result, even if an erroneous recognition occurs between the first grasping result and the second grasping result in the grasping means, the player recognizes that the provision corresponding information is provided despite the situation that the privilege is not offered. This makes it possible to prevent the provision of corresponding information that would otherwise occur.

  Feature A8. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A7, characterized in that the correspondence information providing means provides, as the correspondence information, information on a degree of expectation of award of a bonus to a player.

  According to the characteristic A8, since information regarding the degree of expectation of award is provided according to the grasping result of the grasping means, it becomes possible to make a meaning to move the predetermined portion, and the player can determine the predetermined portion. It becomes possible to actively move.

Feature A9. The grasping means executes information identifying means (an answer recognition process in the sound-light side MPU 93 and an image determining process of an estimated conversation effect) that identifies information provided by the player based on a result of grasping the position information of the predetermined part. Function),
The processing execution means executes corresponding processing when the identification of the information provided by the player by the information identification means is completed,
The game machine according to any one of features A3 to A8, characterized in that the content specified by the information specifying means is not notified to the player.

  According to the characteristic A9, even if the player's answer or the like is grasped by the gaming machine as being different from the player's intention, the grasping result is not notified to the player, so that the player feels uncomfortable or distrustful. You can avoid hugging.

  Feature A10. The gaming machine according to feature A9, characterized in that it is informed that the information provided by the player has been identified by the information identifying means.

  According to the characteristic A10, even if the content specified as the information provided by the player is not notified to the player, the player is made to recognize that the identification of the information provided by the player is completed. Is possible. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the process executed thereafter corresponds to the information provided by the player.

Features A11. When the grasping result of the grasping means is a predetermined grasping result in a specific period, the process executing means executes a process corresponding to the grasping result.
The gaming machine provides period information providing means (step S1902 in the sound-light side MPU 93, step in the sound-light side MPU 93) that provides period corresponding information corresponding to the specific period before and / or during the specific period. S1904, step S2020, step S3103, step S3104, step S3208, step S3404, step S3406, step S3512, step S4103 and step S4115)). The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the characteristic A11, the player is made aware that the specific period is started or is the specific period by providing the period corresponding information before and / or during the specific period. It becomes possible.

  Feature A12. The period information providing means provides, as the period correspondence information, reference information for making the position information of the predetermined region correspond to the predetermined grasping result, in the characteristic A11. Amusement machine.

  According to the characteristic A12, it is considered that the player moves the predetermined portion while referring to the reference information by providing the reference information, and the movement of the predetermined portion such that the grasping result of the grasping means becomes the predetermined grasping result. It is possible to increase the possibility that the player will perform. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the grasping result of the grasping means becomes the predetermined grasping result even when the player who is the grasping target has a high degree of arbitrariness in the movement of the predetermined region.

Feature A13. The processing execution means,
When the grasping result of the grasping means is the first grasping result, the first processing executing means for executing the processing corresponding to the grasping result (the processing of step S2012, step S3203, and step S3703 in the sound-light side MPU 93 is executed). Function),
When the grasping result of the grasping means is the second grasping result, the second processing executing means for executing the processing corresponding to the grasping result (the processing of step S2015, step S3204 and step S3705 in the sound-light side MPU 93 is executed). Function),
Equipped with
The period information providing means includes, as the reference information, first reference information for making the position information of the predetermined part correspond to the first grasping result and the position information of the predetermined part. 2 The second reference information for providing the information corresponding to the grasped result, and the gaming machine according to the characteristic A12.

  According to the characteristic A13, the first reference information and the second reference information are different in the configuration in which the processing executed is different depending on whether the grasping result of the grasping means is the first grasping result or the second grasping result. By simultaneously providing and, even if the player's selection range is expanded in a situation where the movement of the predetermined region of the player to be grasped is highly arbitrary, the grasping result of the grasping means is the first grasping result or It is possible to increase the possibility of becoming the second grasp result.

  Feature A14. The gaming machine according to any one of features A11 to A13, wherein the period information providing means provides question information as the period correspondence information.

  According to the characteristic A14, the player moves a predetermined part as an answer to the question information, and the corresponding process is executed so as to respond to the movement of the predetermined part. As a result, the player has the impression that he is exchanging information with the gaming machine, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

  In particular, when the feature A6 or the feature A28 described later is provided, the player verbally answers the question information being provided, and the verbal information is provided to the verbal answer. Therefore, the player has the impression that he or she is talking to the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A15. The processing execution means executes processing corresponding to the grasping result of the grasping means when the grasping result is a predetermined grasping result,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A14, wherein a plurality of types of position information of the predetermined part corresponding to the predetermined grasping result are set.

  If the movement of the predetermined portion of the player to be grasped is highly arbitrary, a plurality of types of movements may occur as the movement of the predetermined portion to obtain one grasped result. In this case, according to the characteristic A15, a plurality of types of positional information of the predetermined region for specifying the predetermined grasping result are set, so that the movement of the predetermined region of the player to be grasped is arbitrary. It becomes possible to deal with the gender appropriately.

Feature A16. The processing execution means,
When the grasping result of the grasping means is the first grasping result, the first processing executing means for executing the processing corresponding to the grasping result (the processing of step S2012, step S3203, and step S3703 in the sound-light side MPU 93 is executed). Function),
When the grasping result of the grasping means is the second grasping result, the second processing executing means for executing the processing corresponding to the grasping result (the processing of step S2015, step S3204 and step S3705 in the sound-light side MPU 93 is executed). Function),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A3 to A15, which is characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic A16, it is possible to perform different modes of processing according to the movement of the predetermined part of the player, and it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the processing corresponding to the movement of the predetermined part.

Feature A17. The grasping means is
As the position information of the predetermined part, a mouth grasping unit that grasps the movement of the mouth of the player (a function of executing steps S2101 to S2104 in the sound-light side MPU 93),
Word information grasping means for grasping the word information from the player side based on the grasping result of the mouth grasping means (a function for executing the character recognition processing by the sound-light side MPU 93 and the processing of step S2502 to step S2509),
Equipped with
When the word information grasped by the word information grasping means is the first word information, the first processing execution means determines that the grasping result of the grasping means is the first grasping result, and performs the corresponding process. Run and
When the word information grasped by the word information grasping means is the second word information, the second processing execution means determines that the grasping result of the grasping means is the second grasping result, and performs the corresponding process. Run and
The game machine according to feature A16, wherein the first word information and the second word information have different numbers of characters grasped by the word information grasping means.

  According to the characteristic A17, at least the first word information and the second word information in a predetermined situation differ in the number of characters grasped by the word information grasping means, so that one of the first word information and the second word information is obtained. The possibility of erroneously recognizing the other as the other is reduced.

Features A18. The grasping means executes information identifying means (an answer recognition process in the sound-light side MPU 93 and an image determining process of the estimated conversation effect) that identifies the information provided by the player based on the grasping result of the position information of the predetermined part. Function),
The processing execution means executes corresponding processing when the identification of the information provided by the player by the information identification means is completed in a specific period, and the information identification means of the information provided by the player is executed by the information identification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A17, wherein when the identification is completed in the middle of the specific period, the corresponding process is started even in the middle of the specific period.

  According to the characteristic A18, in the configuration in which the corresponding process corresponding to the position information of the predetermined part of the player grasped based on the image pickup result of the image pickup means is executed, when the player completes the movement of the predetermined part In response to this, it is possible to immediately execute the corresponding processing. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the corresponding process corresponding to the movement of the predetermined portion has been executed.

  Features A19. The game machine according to feature A18, wherein an execution mode of an effect to be performed subsequently changes according to the timing when the information provided by the player is identified by the information identifying means.

  According to the characteristic A19, the execution mode of the effect executed thereafter changes according to the timing when the movement of the predetermined portion is completed, so even if the completion of the movement of the predetermined portion occurs at any timing, it corresponds to that timing. It is possible to provide the effect in the form.

Feature A20. First storage means (sound-light side ROM 94) for storing in advance a control information group in which time-series information for performing execution control of the effect is determined;
By referring to the control information group read out from the first storage means to the second storage means (sound-light side RAM 95), the effect control means (sound that causes the effect corresponding to the control information group to be executed A function of executing the processing of steps S503 and S504 in the light side MPU 93, a display control device 96),
Equipped with
In the configuration, a corresponding effect period during which the grasping unit grasps the positional information of the predetermined portion and the process execution unit executes the process corresponding to the grasping result of the grasping unit occurs in the execution period of the predetermined effect. ,
In the first storage means, the control information group corresponding to the corresponding effect period and the control information group corresponding to the execution period of the predetermined effect are individually stored. A game machine described in A19.

  According to the characteristic A20, the control information group corresponding to the corresponding effect period and the control information group corresponding to the execution period of the predetermined effect are individually stored, so that even if the corresponding effect period ends at an arbitrary timing. The predetermined effect can be executed in a mode corresponding to the end timing.

  Feature A21. When the processing execution means cannot grasp the contents enabling the execution of the processing corresponding to the grasping result of the grasping means, the imperfection providing means (the sound-light side) which provides the imperfection information corresponding to the contents. A game according to any one of features A3 to A20, which is provided with a process at the time of a conversation failure in the MPU 93, a step S3114 to step S3115, a command executing process for advice, and a function of executing the process of step S4117). Machine.

  According to the characteristic A21, when the content that enables the execution of the corresponding process cannot be grasped, the non-availability information corresponding thereto is provided, so that when the positional information of the predetermined part is grasped next time. It is possible to prompt the player to appropriately move the predetermined part.

  Feature A22. The non-availability providing means includes, as the non-availability information, information corresponding to the reason why the grasping means is unable to grasp the content that enables the process executing means to execute the process corresponding to the grasping result of the grasping means. A gaming machine according to Feature A21, which is provided.

  According to the characteristic A22, the information corresponding to the reason why the position information of the predetermined part cannot be grasped is provided to the player, so that the reason is eliminated when the position information of the predetermined part is grasped next time. It is possible to prompt the player to move a predetermined part.

  Feature A23. The processing execution means may be configured to, in a period in which the grasping means grasps the positional information of the predetermined region, when the predetermined region is not included in the imaging range of the imaging device in a manner that the grasping device can grasp. , Means for providing advice information so that the predetermined part is included in a manner that can be grasped by the grasping means (function of executing steps S2204, S2208, S2210, S2213, and S2215 in the sound-light side MPU 93) ) The gaming machine according to any one of the features A3 to A22.

  According to the characteristic A23, since the advice information is provided to the player, the player may act in response to the advice information and take a posture included in the imaging range in a manner in which the predetermined portion can be grasped by the grasping means. Increase. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the grasping means accurately grasps the position information of the predetermined portion.

Feature A24. The process executing means executes a process corresponding to a grasping result of the grasping device when the grasping result is a predetermined grasping result in a specific period, and does not execute a process corresponding to the grasping result when the grasping result is not the predetermined grasping result. Configuration,
Even if the occurrence possibility of the specific period occurs, at least one condition is that the grasping result of the grasping unit does not reach the predetermined grasping result in the previous specific period, and the occurrence possibility trigger of this time is dealt with. A feature A3 to a feature A3, which is provided with generation regulation means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3005 and S3405 in the sound-light side MPU 93) that executes regulation processing for preventing the generation of the specific period. The gaming machine according to any one of A23.

  According to the characteristic A24, it is possible to prevent the player who does not intend to participate in the effect that the process corresponding to the movement of the predetermined portion is executed, from moving the predetermined portion. ..

  Feature A25. The generation regulation means is not able to grasp the fact that the positional information of the predetermined part has changed when the grasping result of the grasping means does not reach the predetermined grasping result in the previous specific period. In this case, the regulation processing is executed, and even if the grasping result of the grasping means does not reach the predetermined grasping result in the previous specific period, the grasping means grasps that the positional information of the predetermined portion has changed. The gaming machine according to Feature A24, characterized in that the regulation process is not executed in the case of the above.

  According to the characteristic A25, the grasping unit cannot grasp the position information of the predetermined region accurately even though there is the intention to participate in the effect that the process corresponding to the movement of the predetermined region is executed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a specific period after that from being stopped until the grasping result of (1) reaches a predetermined grasping result.

Feature A26. The grasping means identifies the information provided by the player based on the grasping result of the position information of the predetermined part in one specific period (image of answer recognition processing in the sound-light side MPU 93, and estimated conversation effect). Function to execute judgment processing),
The processing execution means executes processing corresponding to each combination of information identified by the information identification means in each of the plurality of specific periods, according to any one of features A3 to A25. Amusement machine.

  According to the characteristic A26, when the player makes a plurality of movements of the predetermined part, it is possible to execute the processing corresponding to the plurality of movements. This makes it possible to diversify the pattern of movement of the predetermined part by the player, and diversify the execution mode of the processing.

Feature A27. The grasping means is
As the position information of the predetermined part, a mouth grasping means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2101 to S2104 in the sound-light side MPU 93) for grasping the movement of the mouth of the player,
Based on the grasping result of the mouth grasping means, the word information grasping means that grasps the word information from the player side and derives the information corresponding to the grasping result (character recognition processing by the sound-light side MPU 93 and step S2502 to step S2509). Function that executes the processing of
Equipped with
The processing execution means executes processing corresponding to each combination of information derived by the word information grasping means in each of the plurality of specific periods,
The gaming machine provides the question information when the specific period starts, and the question information for each specific period when the specific period occurs a plurality of times (sound-light side The game machine according to feature A26, which is provided with a function of executing the processes of steps S1902, S3404, and S3406 in the MPU 93.

  According to the characteristic A27, a process corresponding to the conversation is executed as a result of a plurality of conversations being exchanged between the player and the gaming machine, so that the result of the conversation with the gaming machine is This makes it easier for the player to have the impression that the corresponding process has been executed.

Feature A28. The grasping means is
As the position information of the predetermined part, a mouth grasping means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2101 to S2104 in the sound-light side MPU 93) for grasping the movement of the mouth of the player,
Based on the grasping result of the mouth grasping means, the word information grasping means that grasps the word information from the player side and derives the information corresponding to the grasping result (character recognition processing by the sound-light side MPU 93 and step S2502 to step S2509). Function that executes the processing of
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of features A3 to A27, wherein the process executing means executes a process corresponding to the information derived by the word information grasping means.

  According to the characteristic A28, since the process corresponding to the words spoken by the player is executed, it is possible to give the game a surprise, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the configuration is such that word information from the player side is grasped by grasping the movement of the mouth instead of collecting the voice of the player, it is an environment where various sounds are overflowing in the game hall. Even so, it is possible to grasp the word information from the player side.

Feature A29. The word information grasping means,
Character information deriving means for deriving character correspondence information based on the grasping result of the mouth grasping means (function for executing character recognition processing in the sound-light side MPU 93);
Using the character correspondence information derived by the character information deriving means, recognition word information deriving means for deriving recognition word information as information corresponding to the grasping result (steps S2502 to S2509 in the sound-light side MPU 93). Function to execute processing),
A gaming machine according to feature A28, which is provided with.

  According to the characteristic A29, the words uttered by the player are individually distinguished as the character corresponding information, and the recognized word information is derived by using the distinguished character corresponding information. It becomes easy to derive the recognized word information corresponding to the word.

  Feature A30. The gaming machine according to Feature A29, wherein the character information deriving unit derives at least information on the type of vowel as the character information based on the grasping result of the mouth grasping unit.

  According to the characteristic A30, at least the type of the vowel is grasped from the movement of the player's mouth, so that the words uttered by the player can be roughly classified by using the type of the vowel. This makes it possible to prevent the judgment from becoming too severe when judging whether or not a predetermined word has been uttered.

  Features A31. The gaming machine according to Feature A30, wherein the character information deriving unit does not derive information about a consonant type.

  Grasping consonants is more difficult than grasping vowels, and if you try to grasp consonants while preventing the sound actually pronounced by the player and the sound grasped by the gaming machine from becoming different, It is necessary to make the processing configuration accordingly. On the other hand, according to the feature A31, the recognition word information is derived by using the vowel type information while not deriving the consonant type information, thereby simplifying the character recognition process. However, it is possible to derive the recognized word information corresponding to the word issued by the player.

  Feature A32. The recognition word information derivation unit derives the recognition word information by storing the character correspondence information derived by the character information derivation unit in a time series in a character information storage unit (sound-light side RAM 95). The gaming machine according to any one of features A29 to A31.

  According to the characteristic A32, the character correspondence information derived by the character information deriving means is sequentially stored in the character information storage means in time series, and the recognized word information is derived from the character correspondence information stored in the character information storage means. Because of the configuration, it is possible to derive the recognized word information in a certain processing manner in any situation.

  Feature A33. When the character correspondence information derived by the character information deriving means is the same as the character correspondence information derived immediately before by the character information deriving means, the recognized word information deriving means sets the character correspondence information to one. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A29 to A32 characterized by being recognized as character correspondence information.

  According to the characteristic A33, when the same mouth shape continues, the sound is uniquely recognized as one sound, so that it is possible to avoid failing to recognize a word due to individual differences of the player. Specifically, the length of "a" when pronounced "aka" varies depending on the player. Some players sound in 0.5 seconds, while others sound in 1 second. In this case, when the mouth shape is the same, it is possible to recognize “a” for 0.5 seconds and “a” for 1 second as the same one sound by uniquely grasping as one sound. It will be possible.

Feature A34. The grasping unit includes a calculating unit (a function of executing the process of step S2106 in the sound-light side MPU 93) that calculates the displacement amount of the movement of the mouth of the player based on the image capturing result of the image capturing unit,
The game according to any one of features A29 to A33, wherein the character information derivation unit derives the character correspondence information when the displacement amount calculated by the calculation unit is equal to or less than a predetermined displacement amount. Machine.

  Considering a case where a player pronounces a two-letter word, the first note is pronounced through a transition state in which the mouth state is changed to the mouth shape of the first note, and the second note is formed from the mouth shape of the first note. The second note is pronounced through a transitional state that transitions to the mouth shape. When a predetermined sound is emitted, it stops in the shape of a predetermined mouth, so the displacement of the mouth movement is small. On the other hand, in the transition state, the amount of movement of the mouth is large because the shape of the mouth is changed. In such a circumstance, according to the characteristic A34, the displacement amount of the movement of the player's mouth is calculated by the calculation means, and the character correspondence information is derived when the displacement amount becomes equal to or less than the predetermined displacement amount. This makes it possible to avoid deriving the character correspondence information in the transition state, and it becomes easy to derive the recognition word information corresponding to the words uttered by the player.

  Feature A35. The grasping means is means for identifying that the player's answer is completed when the displacement calculated by the calculating means is equal to or less than the predetermined displacement for a predetermined period (the process of step S2112 in the sound-light side MPU 93). The game machine according to feature A34, which is provided with a function for executing.

  According to the characteristic A35, it is possible to specify the ending timing of the answer of the player while using the configuration for preventing the character correspondence information from being derived in the mouth transition state.

  Feature A36. The word information grasping means identifies information corresponding to the number of characters of a word issued by the player based on the grasping result of the mouth grasping means, and information corresponding to the word information from the player side based on the identified information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A28 to A35, which is provided with a number correspondence derivation unit (a function of executing a character number recognition process in the sound-light side MPU 93).

  According to the characteristic A36, the character number information corresponding to the words spoken by the player is derived as information corresponding to the words spoken by the player, so that the characters of the words spoken by the player are individually recognized. It is possible to execute the process corresponding to the word spoken by the player without the need.

  Feature A37. The gaming machine according to Feature A36, wherein the number correspondence deriving unit derives different information even when the information corresponding to the specified number of characters is the same when the situation in which the word information is grasped is different. ..

  According to the characteristic A37, even if the number of recognized characters is the same, different information is derived if the situation is different, so that it is possible to select the same word information between different situations. Therefore, it becomes possible to widen the range of selection of word information in the design stage of the game machine.

Feature A38. The word information grasping means,
Character information deriving means for deriving character correspondence information based on the grasping result of the mouth grasping means (function for executing character recognition processing in the sound-light side MPU 93);
Using the character correspondence information derived by the character information deriving means, recognition word information deriving means for deriving recognition word information as information corresponding to the grasping result (steps S2502 to S2509 in the sound-light side MPU 93). Function to execute processing),
When the recognition word information deriving unit cannot derive the recognition word information, the switching unit causes the information to be derived by the number correspondence deriving unit (steps S2502 and S2510 in the sound-light side MPU 93). Function to execute)
A gaming machine according to feature A37, which is provided with:

  According to the characteristic A38, the character count information is derived when the recognized word information cannot be derived, so that the words uttered by the player can be grasped basically correctly, If that is not possible, the recognition rate can be increased although the accuracy is reduced. As a result, basically, it is possible to increase the recognition rate while increasing the recognition accuracy.

  Feature A39. The switching means derives the recognition word information by the recognition word information deriving means when the recognition result of the mouth recognition means is a recognition result that the character corresponding information cannot be derived by the character information deriving means. The gaming machine according to feature A38, characterized in that the state is switched to a state in which information is derived by the number correspondence deriving means.

  According to the characteristic A39, the character count information is derived on the condition that the character correspondence information cannot be accurately derived. Therefore, basically, the recognition word information is derived while the character correspondence information is derived. It is possible to derive the character number information only when the character cannot be accurately calculated.

  Feature A40. The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A39, wherein the position information of the predetermined portion grasped by the grasping means is position information of a part of the predetermined portion.

  According to the characteristic A40, the number of portions to be grasped is reduced and the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case of collectively grasping the positional information of the entire predetermined region.

  Feature A41. The process execution means is a process corresponding to the fact that the position information of the predetermined region has changed in a predetermined manner is grasped by the grasping device and does not correspond to the content of the movement of the predetermined region. The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A40, characterized in that

  According to the characteristic A41, when it is known that the positional information of the predetermined part has changed, the corresponding process is executed, so that the player recognizes that the process corresponding to the movement of the predetermined part of the player has been executed. It becomes possible. In this case, since the process corresponding to the content of the movement of the predetermined part is not executed, it is not necessary to perform the high-resolution image capturing means capable of grasping the content of the motion of the predetermined part or the high-level processing. .. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the process corresponding to the movement of the predetermined portion has been executed, while simplifying the configuration.

Feature A42. The processing executing means provides corresponding information based on the fact that the grasping means has grasped that the positional information of the predetermined part has changed (corresponding information providing means (symbol display device 61, sound light). The function of executing the process of step S4111 in the side MPU 93),
A plurality of types of the correspondence information provided by the correspondence information providing means are set,
The gaming machine according to Feature A41, wherein the correspondence information providing unit determines the type of the correspondence information to be provided regardless of the content of the movement of the predetermined portion.

  According to the characteristic A42, since the information corresponding to the movement of the predetermined portion of the player is provided from the gaming machine, it becomes possible to make the movement of the predetermined portion meaningful, and the player can move the predetermined portion. It becomes possible to actively move. In this case, since a plurality of types of correspondence information are set, it is possible to diversify the correspondence information to be provided, even if the correspondence information is provided regardless of the content of the movement of the predetermined part.

Feature A43. When the grasping means grasps that the position information of the predetermined part has changed in the predetermined manner in a specific period, the process executing means executes a process corresponding thereto,
A question information providing unit (a function for executing the process of step S4103 in the sound-light side MPU 93) for providing question information when the specific period is started,
The gaming machine according to feature A42, wherein the correspondence information is set in correspondence with the question information provided by the question information providing means.

  According to the characteristic A43, since the correspondence information is set in association with the question information, even if the correspondence information is provided irrespective of the content of the movement of the predetermined portion, it is possible to provide the player with the gaming machine. It is possible to give the impression that you are participating in a conversation.

  Feature A44. The gaming machine according to feature A43, wherein a plurality of types of the correspondence information are set in association with one piece of the question information.

  According to the characteristic A44, a plurality of types of correspondence information are set in association with one question information, so that the correspondence information provided for one question information is diversified. As a result, even if the correspondence information is provided regardless of the content of the movement of the predetermined portion of the player, the impression that the correspondence information corresponding to the content of the movement of the predetermined portion is provided may be given to the player. Can be given to.

Feature A45. The predetermined part is a player's mouth,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A41 to A44, wherein the grasping device grasps that the positional information of the mouth of the player has changed.

  According to the characteristic A45, since the process corresponding to the word is uttered by the player, even if the process is executed regardless of the content of the word, the player feels confident. It is possible to give the player the impression that the process corresponding to the word has been executed.

Feature A46. The grasping means grasps the degree of attention of the player with respect to the predetermined event based on the grasping result of the position information of the predetermined portion (at step S4815 to step S4819 and step S51115 to step S5124 in the sound-light side MPU 93). Function to execute processing),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A45, characterized in that the processing executing means executes processing corresponding to the attention degree grasped by the attention degree grasping means.

  According to the characteristic A46, since the processing according to the degree of attention of the player is executed, the processing can be executed according to the situation of the player and the taste of the player.

  Feature A47. The processing executing means is provided with an information providing means (a function of executing a comment inserting process in the sound-light side MPU 93) for providing information corresponding to the attention degree grasped by the attention degree grasping means. The gaming machine described in Feature A46.

  According to the feature A47, it is possible to provide information that raises the player's attention degree or information that lowers the player's attention degree according to the player's attention degree.

  Feature A48. A feature A47 characterized in that the information providing unit changes the content of the information to be provided according to the magnitude relation with respect to the attention degree which is the reference of the attention degree grasped by the attention degree grasping unit. Amusement machine.

  According to the characteristic A48, since the content of the information provided is different in relation to the reference degree of attention, it is possible to provide appropriate information corresponding to the degree of attention of the player.

Feature A49. The predetermined event is a predetermined effect executed with a content corresponding to the degree of expectation of granting a privilege to the player,
The gaming machine according to feature A48, wherein the reference attention level changes according to whether or not the privilege is granted.

  According to the feature A49, it is determined that the reference level of the player's attention is determined to be relatively high or the player's attention is relatively low depending on whether or not the privilege is granted. Standards are changed. As a result, it is possible to provide the information corresponding to the degree of attention of the player in a mode that considers whether or not the privilege is granted.

Feature A50. The predetermined event is a predetermined performance,
The information providing means provides information for urging attention to the predetermined effect when the attention degree grasped by the attention degree grasping means is a relatively low attention degree. The gaming machine according to any one of A49.

  According to the characteristic A50, when the player's attention to the predetermined effect is relatively low, information for prompting the attention to the effect is provided, so that the player's attention to the predetermined effect is increased. Is possible.

Feature A51. The predetermined effect is executed with the content corresponding to the degree of expectation of granting a privilege to the player,
It is determined that the attention degree grasped by the attention degree grasping unit is the relatively low attention degree in the situation in which the privilege is awarded, rather than in the situation in which the privilege is not awarded. The game machine according to feature A50, which is characterized by being easy.

  According to the characteristic A51, in the situation where the privilege is awarded, it is easy to provide information for making the player pay attention to the predetermined effect. Therefore, for the predetermined effect executed in the situation where the privilege is awarded. It becomes easier to get the player's attention.

Feature A52. The predetermined event is a predetermined performance,
The information providing means may provide information for reducing the degree of attention to the predetermined effect when the degree of attention grasped by the attention degree grasping means is a relatively high attention degree. The gaming machine according to any one of A47 to A51.

  According to the characteristic A52, when the degree of attention to the predetermined effect is relatively high, information that reduces the degree of attention to the effect is provided, so that it is possible to prevent the player from expecting excessively. ..

Feature A53. The predetermined effect is executed with the content corresponding to the degree of expectation of granting a privilege to the player,
It is determined that the attention degree grasped by the attention degree grasping means is the relatively high attention degree in the situation in which the privilege is not given, as compared to the situation in which the privilege is given. The game machine according to feature A52, which is characterized by being easy.

  According to the characteristic A53, it is easy to provide information for lowering the degree of attention to the predetermined effect in the situation where the privilege is not given, so that the player's response to the predetermined effect executed in the situation where the privilege is not given It is possible to prevent the attention level from becoming too high.

Feature A54. The predetermined event is a predetermined performance,
When the attention degree grasped by the attention degree grasping means is changed in the middle of the predetermined effect, the information providing means changes the information to be provided to the content corresponding to the changed attention degree. The gaming machine according to any one of features A47 to A53.

  According to the characteristic A54, the information to be provided is changed according to the degree of attention of the player even during the predetermined effect, so that the player's attention is increased within the range in which the predetermined effect is executed. It is possible to bring the degree close to an appropriate range.

  Feature A55. The gaming machine according to any one of features A46 to A54, wherein the attention level grasping unit grasps the attention level by using position information of a plurality of types of regions as the position information of the predetermined region. ..

  According to the feature A55, it is possible to grasp the degree of attention of the player in detail.

  Feature A56. The processing execution means changes the execution frequency of a specific effect executed thereafter according to the attention degree grasped by the attention degree grasping means (step S5303, step S5306 in the sound-light side MPU 93, step S5306, The gaming machine according to any one of features A46 to A55, which is provided with a function of executing the processes of step S5309, step S5312, step S5403, step S5406, step S5409, and step S5412.

  According to the characteristic A56, by increasing the appearance frequency of the effects that the player's attention is high and decreasing the appearance frequency of the effects the player's attention is low, the effects according to the player's preference are provided with high frequency. It becomes possible.

Feature A57. Change specifying means for specifying whether or not the player has been changed (function of executing the processing of steps S5007 to S5009 in the sound-light side MPU 93),
When it is specified by the change specifying means that the player has been changed, means for initializing the execution frequency changed by the frequency changing means (the processing of steps S5010 to S5011 in the sound-light side MPU 93 is executed). Function),
A gaming machine according to feature A56, which is provided with.

  According to the characteristic A57, the preference of the previous player and the preference of the new player are considered to be different. Therefore, by initializing the execution frequency when the player is changed, the preference of the new player can be improved. It is possible to set the appearance frequency of a suitable presentation early.

  For any one of the features A1 to A57, any one or more of the features A1 to A57, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D12, and the features E1 to E12 may be used. You may apply. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Image pickup means for picking up an image of the player (a function of executing signal processing in the image pickup device 73 and the signal processing circuit 75, a function of executing image pickup control processing in the sound-light side MPU 93),
A grasping means (a function of executing image determination processing in the sound-light side MPU 93) for grasping that the positional information of the predetermined part of the player has changed based on the image pickup result of the image pickup means;
Based on the fact that the grasping means has grasped that the position information of the predetermined region has changed in a predetermined manner, a predetermined process which is a process corresponding thereto and a process which does not correspond to the content of movement of the predetermined region, or A process execution unit (sound light) that executes a predetermined process that is commonly executed regardless of whether the content of the movement of the predetermined portion is the first content or the second content including the change in the predetermined mode. Function of executing the processing of step S4111 and step S4119 in the side MPU 93),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic B1, the positional information of the predetermined part of the player is grasped on the basis of the image pickup result by the image pickup means, so that the process corresponding to the operation of the player on the operation section such as the operation button is executed. Compared with, it becomes possible to increase the arbitrariness of the movement of the predetermined part of the player to be grasped, and it is possible to provide a novel game content.

  In addition, since it is possible to make the player recognize that the process corresponding to the movement of the predetermined part of the player has been executed, since the process corresponding to the change in the position information of the predetermined part is recognized. Becomes In this case, since the processing corresponding to the content of the movement of the predetermined portion is not executed or one kind of processing is executed for the plurality of kinds of movement of the predetermined portion, the accuracy of the predetermined portion is high. There is no need to perform high-resolution image capturing means capable of grasping the content of motion or sophisticated processing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the process corresponding to the movement of the predetermined part of the player has been executed while simplifying the configuration.

Feature B2. The processing executing means provides corresponding information based on the fact that the grasping means has grasped that the positional information of the predetermined part has changed (corresponding information providing means (symbol display device 61, sound light). The function of executing the processing of step S4114 and step S4119 in the side MPU 93),
A plurality of types of the correspondence information provided by the correspondence information providing means are set,
The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the correspondence information providing unit determines the type of the correspondence information to be provided regardless of the content of the movement of the predetermined portion.

  According to the feature B2, the information corresponding to the movement of the predetermined portion of the player is provided from the gaming machine, so that it becomes possible to make a meaning to move the predetermined portion, and the player can set the predetermined portion. It becomes possible to actively move. In this case, since a plurality of types of correspondence information are set, it is possible to diversify the correspondence information to be provided, even if the correspondence information is provided regardless of the content of the movement of the predetermined part.

Feature B3. The processing executing means, when the grasping means grasps that the positional information of the prescribed portion has changed in the prescribed manner in a specific period, executes the prescribed processing corresponding to the positional information.
A question information providing unit (a function for executing the process of step S4103 in the sound-light side MPU 93) for providing question information when the specific period is started,
The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the correspondence information is set in correspondence with the question information provided by the question information providing means.

  According to the feature B3, since the correspondence information is set in correspondence with the question information, even if the correspondence information is provided regardless of the content of the movement of the predetermined part, the player can be provided with the gaming machine. It is possible to give the impression that you are participating in a conversation.

  Feature B4. The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein a plurality of types of the correspondence information are set in association with one question information.

  According to the feature B4, a plurality of types of correspondence information are set in association with one question information, so that the correspondence information provided for one question information is diversified. As a result, even if the correspondence information is provided regardless of the content of the movement of the predetermined portion of the player, the impression that the correspondence information corresponding to the content of the movement of the predetermined portion is provided may be given to the player. Can be given to.

Feature B5. The predetermined part is a player's mouth,
The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the grasping unit grasps that the positional information of the mouth of the player has changed.

  According to the characteristic B5, since the process corresponding to the word is triggered by the player's utterance, even if the process is performed irrespective of the content of the word, the player feels confident. It is possible to give the player the impression that the process corresponding to the word has been executed.

  Feature B6. The processing execution means executes corresponding processing when the grasping means has completed the grasping that the position information of the predetermined portion has changed in a predetermined manner in a specific period, and the position information of the predetermined portion is predetermined. Any one of the features B1 to B5 characterized in that, when the grasping means grasps the change in the mode in the middle of the specific period, the corresponding process is started even in the middle of the specific period. Gaming machine described in.

  According to the characteristic B6, in the configuration in which the corresponding process corresponding to the change of the position information of the predetermined part in the predetermined mode is executed, the player selects the predetermined part so that the position information of the predetermined part changes in the predetermined mode. When it is moved, it is possible to immediately execute the corresponding process. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the corresponding process corresponding to the movement of the predetermined portion has been executed.

  Feature B7. The feature B6 is characterized in that an execution mode of an effect executed thereafter is changed according to a timing at which the grasping unit grasps that the position information of the predetermined region has changed in a predetermined mode. Amusement machine.

  According to the feature B7, the execution mode of the effect to be subsequently executed changes according to the timing when the position information of the predetermined part changes in the predetermined mode, so that even if the movement of the predetermined part occurs at any timing It is possible to provide an effect in a mode corresponding to.

Feature B8. First storage means (sound-light side ROM 94) for storing in advance a control information group in which time-series information for performing execution control of the effect is determined;
By referring to the control information group read out from the first storage means to the second storage means (sound-light side RAM 95), the effect control means (sound that causes the effect corresponding to the control information group to be executed A function of executing the processing of steps S503 and S504 in the light side MPU 93, a display control device 96),
Equipped with
In the configuration, a corresponding effect period during which the grasping unit grasps the positional information of the predetermined portion and the process execution unit executes the process corresponding to the grasping result of the grasping unit occurs in the execution period of the predetermined effect. ,
In the first storage means, the control information group corresponding to the corresponding effect period and the control information group corresponding to the execution period of the predetermined effect are individually stored. Feature B6 or A gaming machine described in B7.

  According to the feature B8, the control information group corresponding to the corresponding effect period and the control information group corresponding to the execution period of the predetermined effect are individually stored, so that even if the corresponding effect period ends at an arbitrary timing. The predetermined effect can be executed in a mode corresponding to the end timing.

  For any one of the features B1 to B8, any one or more of the features A1 to A57, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D12, and the features E1 to E12 may be provided. You may apply. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Specific information providing means for providing specific information to the player (function of executing the process of step S4407 in the sound-light side MPU 93),
A process executing means for executing a corresponding process corresponding to at least one of the specific information and the reaction of the player to the specific information (a function of executing the process of step S4410 in the sound-light side MPU 93);
Setting means (in the sound-light side MPU 93) for setting a waiting possible period that allows the player to perform the reaction corresponding to the specific information after the specific information is provided and before the corresponding process is executed. A function of executing the processing of steps S4405 and S4409),
Period determining means (a function of executing the process of step S4303 in the sound-light side MPU 93) that determines the waiting period from a plurality of types of periods;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic C1, by providing the specific information to the player, it is possible to urge the player to move a predetermined part, for example. Further, since the corresponding process corresponding to at least one of the specific information and the reaction of the player to the specific information is executed, it becomes possible to focus on the game content after the specific information is provided. In this case, the waitable period from the provision of the specific information to the execution of the corresponding process varies, so that the waitable period can be varied. By diversifying the waitable period, it is possible to give a wide range of execution modes of the effect using the waitable period, and it is possible to appropriately perform the effect.

  Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the period determination means determines one period as the standby possible period by lottery from a plurality of types of periods.

  According to the characteristic C2, the waiting possible period becomes irregular, and it is possible to prevent the production execution mode using the waiting possible period from becoming uniform.

  Feature C3. The processing execution means executes processing for providing additional information corresponding to at least one of the specific information and the reaction of the player to the specific information, as the corresponding processing. C1 or C2 Gaming machine described in.

  According to the characteristic C3, the additional information corresponding to at least one of the specific information and the reaction of the player to the specific information is provided to the player, so that the player can obtain the additional information. In this case, the waitable period from the provision of the specific information to the provision of the additional information varies, so that the waitable period can be varied. By diversifying the waitable period, it is possible to give a wide range of execution modes of the effect using the waitable period, and it is possible to appropriately perform the effect.

Feature C4. The specific information is information that presents a question to the player,
The game according to Feature C3, wherein the additional information is information that is irrelevant to the reaction of the player after the specific information is provided and is set corresponding to the content of the specific information. Machine.

  According to the characteristic C4, the question information is provided, and after that, the information corresponding to the question information is additionally provided after the waiting period has elapsed, so that the word actually spoken by the player is displayed on the gaming machine. It is possible to give the player the impression that he or she is talking to the gaming machine, even if he / she does not recognize it. In particular, due to the fluctuation of the waiting period, the period from the provision of the specific information to the provision of the additional information is not uniform, and in reality, the timing at which the player speaks is determined by the game machine. Even if the player does not recognize it, it is possible to give the player the impression that the additional information is provided at the timing when the player speaks a word.

  Feature C5. The game machine according to feature C4, wherein the player is not notified of the waiting period.

  According to the characteristic C5, since the waiting period is not notified to the player, even if the player does not actually recognize the timing when the player speaks the word, the addition is made at the timing when the player speaks the word. This makes it easier for the player to feel that information has been provided.

Feature C6. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that the period determination means makes a determination mode of the standby possible period different depending on whether the privilege is granted or not. ..

  According to the characteristic C6, the player can know the degree of expectation of award of the privilege depending on the waiting period, so that it is possible to increase the attention degree to the waiting period and improve the interest of the game.

  Feature C7. The gaming machine according to feature C6, characterized in that a notification is made to let the player recognize the waiting period determined by the period determining means.

  According to the characteristic C7, the player can be made to clearly recognize the waiting period, so that it is possible to appropriately increase the expectation for granting the privilege corresponding to the waiting period.

  For any one of the features C1 to C7, any one or more of the features A1 to A57, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D12, and the features E1 to E12 may be used. You may apply. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Image pickup means for picking up an image of a player (a function of executing signal processing in the image pickup device 73 and the signal processing circuit 75, a function of executing image pickup control processing in the sound-light side MPU 93),
A mouth grasping means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2101 to S2104 in the sound-light side MPU 93) for grasping the movement of the mouth of the player based on the imaging result of the imaging means.
Based on the grasping result of the mouth grasping means, the word information grasping means that grasps the word information from the player side and derives the information corresponding to the grasping result (character recognition processing by the sound-light side MPU 93 and step S2502 to step S2509). Function that executes the process of
A process executing unit that executes a process corresponding to the information derived by the word information grasping unit (step S2012, step S2015, step S2017, step S3113, step S3604, step S3703, step S3705, step S3707, and step S3707 in the sound-light side MPU 93). A function of executing the processing of step S3709),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic D1, since the process corresponding to the word spoken by the player is executed, it is possible to give the game a surprising effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the configuration is such that word information from the player side is grasped by grasping the movement of the mouth instead of collecting the voice of the player, it is an environment where various sounds are overflowing in the game hall. Even so, it is possible to grasp the word information from the player side.

Feature D2. The word information grasping means,
Character information deriving means for deriving character correspondence information based on the grasping result of the mouth grasping means (function for executing character recognition processing in the sound-light side MPU 93);
Using the character correspondence information derived by the character information deriving means, recognition word information deriving means for deriving recognition word information as information corresponding to the grasping result (steps S2502 to S2509 in the sound-light side MPU 93). Function to execute processing),
The gaming machine described in the feature D1 characterized by being provided with.

  According to the feature D2, the words uttered by the player are individually distinguished as the character corresponding information, and the recognized word information is derived by using the distinguished character corresponding information. It becomes easy to derive the recognized word information corresponding to the word.

  Feature D3. The gaming machine according to Feature D2, wherein the character information deriving unit derives at least information on the type of vowel as the character information based on the grasping result of the mouth grasping unit.

  According to the feature D3, at least the type of the vowel is grasped from the movement of the player's mouth, so that the words uttered by the player can be roughly classified by using the type of the vowel. This makes it possible to prevent the judgment from becoming too severe when judging whether or not a predetermined word has been uttered.

  Feature D4. The gaming machine according to Feature D3, wherein the character information deriving unit does not derive information about a consonant type.

  Grasping consonants is more difficult than grasping vowels, and if you try to grasp consonants while preventing the sound actually pronounced by the player and the sound grasped by the gaming machine from becoming different, It is necessary to make the processing configuration accordingly. On the other hand, according to the feature D4, the recognition word information is derived by using the vowel type information while not deriving the consonant type information, thereby simplifying the character recognition process. However, it is possible to derive the recognized word information corresponding to the word issued by the player.

  Feature D5. The recognition word information derivation unit derives the recognition word information by storing the character correspondence information derived by the character information derivation unit in a time series in a character information storage unit (sound-light side RAM 95). The gaming machine according to any one of the features D2 to D4.

  According to the feature D5, the character correspondence information derived by the character information deriving means is sequentially stored in the character information storage means in time series, and the recognition word information is derived from the character correspondence information stored in the character information storage means. Because of the configuration, it is possible to derive the recognized word information in a certain processing manner in any situation.

  Feature D6. When the character correspondence information derived by the character information deriving means is the same as the character correspondence information derived immediately before by the character information deriving means, the recognized word information deriving means sets the character correspondence information to one. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D2 to D5 characterized by being recognized as character correspondence information.

  According to the feature D6, when the same mouth shape continues, it is possible to avoid unsuccessful grasping of words due to individual differences of the player by uniquely grasping as one sound. Specifically, the length of "a" when pronounced "aka" varies depending on the player. Some players sound in 0.5 seconds, while others sound in 1 second. In this case, when the mouth shape is the same, it is possible to recognize “a” for 0.5 seconds and “a” for 1 second as the same one sound by uniquely grasping as one sound. It will be possible.

Feature D7. A calculation unit (a function for executing the process of step S2106 in the sound-light side MPU 93) for calculating the displacement amount of the movement of the player's mouth based on the image pickup result of the image pickup unit
The game according to any one of features D2 to D6, wherein the character information derivation unit derives the character correspondence information when the displacement amount calculated by the calculation unit is equal to or less than a predetermined displacement amount. Machine.

  Considering a case where a player pronounces a two-letter word, the first note is pronounced through a transition state in which the mouth state is changed to the mouth shape of the first note, and the second note is formed from the mouth shape of the first note. The second note is pronounced through a transitional state that transitions to the mouth shape. When a predetermined sound is emitted, it stops in the shape of a predetermined mouth, so the displacement of the mouth movement is small. On the other hand, in the transition state, the amount of movement of the mouth is large because the shape of the mouth is changed. Under such circumstances, according to the feature D7, the displacement amount of the movement of the player's mouth is calculated by the calculation means, and the character correspondence information is derived when the displacement amount becomes equal to or less than the predetermined displacement amount. This makes it possible to avoid deriving the character correspondence information in the transition state, and it becomes easy to derive the recognition word information corresponding to the words uttered by the player.

  Feature D8. The grasping means is means for identifying that the player's answer is completed when the displacement calculated by the calculating means is equal to or less than the predetermined displacement for a predetermined period (the process of step S2112 in the sound-light side MPU 93). The game machine according to Feature D7, which is provided with a function of executing

  According to the feature D8, it is possible to specify the end timing of the answer of the player while using the configuration for preventing the character correspondence information from being derived in the transitional state of the mouth.

  Feature D9. The word information grasping means identifies information corresponding to the number of characters of a word issued by the player based on the grasping result of the mouth grasping means, and information corresponding to the word information from the player side based on the identified information. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D8, which is provided with a number correspondence derivation unit (a function of performing a character number recognition process in the sound-light side MPU 93).

  According to the feature D9, the number-of-characters information corresponding to the words spoken by the player is derived as information corresponding to the words spoken by the player, so that the characters of the words spoken by the player are individually recognized. It is possible to execute the process corresponding to the word spoken by the player without the need.

  Feature D10. The game machine according to Feature D9, wherein the number correspondence derivation unit derives different information even if the information corresponding to the specified number of characters is the same when the situation in which the word information is grasped is different. ..

  According to the characteristic D10, even if the number of recognized characters is the same, different information is derived if the situation is different, so that the same word information can be selected between different situations. Therefore, it becomes possible to widen the range of selection of word information in the design stage of the game machine.

Feature D11. The word information grasping means,
Character information deriving means for deriving character correspondence information based on the grasping result of the mouth grasping means (function for executing character recognition processing in the sound-light side MPU 93);
Using the character correspondence information derived by the character information deriving means, recognition word information deriving means for deriving recognition word information as information corresponding to the grasping result (steps S2502 to S2509 in the sound-light side MPU 93). Function to execute processing),
When the recognition word information deriving unit cannot derive the recognition word information, the switching unit causes the information to be derived by the number correspondence deriving unit (steps S2502 and S2510 in the sound-light side MPU 93). Function to execute)
A gaming machine according to Feature D10, which is characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D11, when the recognition word information cannot be derived, the character number information is derived, so that the words uttered by the player can be grasped basically correctly, If that is not possible, the recognition rate can be increased although the accuracy is reduced. As a result, basically, it is possible to increase the recognition rate while increasing the recognition accuracy.

  Feature D12. The switching means derives the recognition word information by the recognition word information deriving means when the recognition result of the mouth recognition means is a recognition result that the character corresponding information cannot be derived by the character information deriving means. The gaming machine according to feature D11, wherein the state is switched to a state in which information is derived by the number correspondence deriving means.

  According to the feature D12, the character number information is derived on the condition that the character correspondence information cannot be accurately derived. Therefore, basically, the recognition word information is derived while the character correspondence information is derived. It is possible to derive the character number information only when the character cannot be accurately calculated.

  For any one of the features D1 to D12, any one or more of the features A1 to A57, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D12, and the features E1 to E12 may be provided. You may apply. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Image pickup means for picking up an image of the player (a function of executing signal processing in the image pickup device 73 and the signal processing circuit 75, a function of executing image pickup control processing in the sound-light side MPU 93),
Position information grasping means for grasping the position information of a predetermined part of the player based on the image pickup result of the image pickup means (function of executing position information storage processing in the sound-light side MPU 93 and processing of steps S5108 to S5110),
An attention degree grasping means (steps S4815 to S4819 and steps S51115 to S5124 in the sound-light side MPU 93) for grasping the degree of attention of the player with respect to a predetermined event based on the result of grasping the position information of the predetermined part by the position information grasping means. Function that executes the processing of
A process execution unit that executes a process corresponding to the degree of attention grasped by the attention degree grasping unit (a function of executing steps S4512 and S5125 in the sound-light side MPU 93);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic E1, the position information of the predetermined part of the player is grasped on the basis of the image pickup result by the image pickup means, so that the process corresponding to the operation of the player on the operation unit such as the operation button is executed. Compared with, it is possible to increase the arbitrariness of the movement of the predetermined part of the player as the grasp target. In this case, the degree of attention of the player with respect to the predetermined event is grasped based on the position information of the predetermined portion, and the processing corresponding to the grasped degree of attention is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to execute processing in accordance with the situation of the player and the taste of the player.

  Feature E2. The processing executing means is provided with an information providing means (a function of executing a comment inserting process in the sound-light side MPU 93) for providing information corresponding to the attention degree grasped by the attention degree grasping means. The gaming machine described in the feature E1.

  According to the feature E2, it is possible to provide information that raises the player's attention degree or information that lowers the player's attention degree according to the player's attention degree.

  Feature E3. The feature E2 is characterized in that the information providing unit changes the content of the information to be provided in accordance with the magnitude relation with respect to the attention degree which is the reference of the attention degree grasped by the attention degree grasping unit. Amusement machine.

  According to the characteristic E3, since the content of the information provided is different in relation to the reference degree of attention, it is possible to provide appropriate information corresponding to the degree of attention of the player.

Feature E4. The predetermined event is a predetermined effect executed with a content corresponding to the degree of expectation of granting a privilege to the player,
The gaming machine according to feature E3, wherein the reference attention level changes depending on whether or not the privilege is granted.

  According to the feature E4, it is determined that the reference level of the player's attention is determined to be relatively high or the player's attention is relatively low depending on whether or not the privilege is granted. Standards are changed. As a result, it is possible to provide the information corresponding to the degree of attention of the player in a mode that considers whether or not the privilege is granted.

Feature E5. The predetermined event is a predetermined performance,
Characteristic E2 to Feature, wherein the information providing means provides information for urging attention to the predetermined effect when the attention degree grasped by the attention degree grasping means is a relatively low attention degree. The gaming machine according to any one of E4.

  According to the feature E5, when the player's attention to the predetermined effect is relatively low, information for prompting the attention to the effect is provided, so that the player's attention to the predetermined effect is increased. Is possible.

Feature E6. The predetermined effect is executed with the content corresponding to the degree of expectation of granting a privilege to the player,
It is determined that the attention degree grasped by the attention degree grasping unit is the relatively low attention degree in the situation in which the privilege is awarded, rather than in the situation in which the privilege is not awarded. The gaming machine according to feature E5, which is characterized by being easy.

  According to the characteristic E6, in the situation where the privilege is awarded, it is easy to provide the information for attracting the player's attention to the predetermined effect, and therefore, for the predetermined effect executed in the situation where the privilege is awarded. It becomes easier to get the player's attention.

Feature E7. The predetermined event is a predetermined performance,
The information providing means may provide information for reducing the degree of attention to the predetermined effect when the degree of attention grasped by the attention degree grasping means is a relatively high attention degree. The gaming machine according to any one of E2 to E6.

  According to the feature E7, when the degree of attention to the predetermined effect is relatively high, information that reduces the degree of attention to the effect is provided, so that it is possible to prevent the player from expecting excessively. ..

Feature E8. The predetermined effect is executed with the content corresponding to the degree of expectation of granting a privilege to the player,
It is determined that the attention degree grasped by the attention degree grasping means is the relatively high attention degree in the situation in which the privilege is not given, as compared to the situation in which the privilege is given. The game machine according to feature E7, which is characterized by being easy.

  According to the feature E8, information for lowering the degree of attention to the predetermined effect is easily provided in the situation where the privilege is not given, so that the player's response to the predetermined effect executed in the situation where the privilege is not given It is possible to prevent the attention level from becoming too high.

Feature E9. The predetermined event is a predetermined performance,
When the attention degree grasped by the attention degree grasping means is changed in the middle of the predetermined effect, the information providing means changes the information to be provided to the content corresponding to the changed attention degree. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E2 to E8.

  According to the feature E9, the information to be provided is changed according to the degree of attention of the player even during the predetermined effect, so that the player's attention is increased within the range in which the predetermined effect is executed. It is possible to bring the degree close to an appropriate range.

  Feature E10. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, wherein the attention level grasping unit grasps the attention level by using position information of a plurality of types of regions as the position information of the predetermined region. ..

  According to the characteristic E10, it is possible to grasp the degree of attention of the player in detail.

  Feature E11. The processing execution means changes the execution frequency of a specific effect executed thereafter according to the attention degree grasped by the attention degree grasping means (step S5303, step S5306 in the sound-light side MPU 93, step S5306, A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, which is provided with a function of executing the processes of step S5309, step S5312, step S5403, step S5406, step S5409, and step S5412.

  According to the feature E11, by increasing the frequency of appearance of effects that attract the player's attention and decreasing the frequency of appearance of effects that attract the player's low attention, the effects according to the player's preference are provided with high frequency. It becomes possible.

Feature E12. Change specifying means for specifying whether or not the player has been changed (function of executing the processing of steps S5007 to S5009 in the sound-light side MPU 93),
When it is specified by the change specifying means that the player has been changed, means for initializing the execution frequency changed by the frequency changing means (the processing of steps S5010 to S5011 in the sound-light side MPU 93 is executed). Function),
A gaming machine according to feature E11, which is provided with.

  According to the characteristic E12, the preference of the previous player and the preference of the new player are considered to be different. Therefore, by initializing the execution frequency when the player is changed, the preference of the new player can be set. It is possible to set the appearance frequency of a suitable presentation early.

  For any one of the features E1 to E12, any one or more of the features A1 to A57, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D12, and the features E1 to E12 may be provided. You may apply. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  The inventions of the characteristics A group to E group can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, a configuration is generally used in which an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  Specifically, for the pachinko machine, for example, lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered a ball entry portion provided in the game area, and the variable display of the pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed. It is known that, when the winning result is obtained, the combination of the specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and the special game state advantageous to the player is entered. When the special game state is entered, for example, opening and closing of a ball entrance device or the like provided in the game area is started, and a game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entrance device. ing.

  Here, novel game contents are required in the game machines as illustrated above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The following is a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in the area, and gives a bonus to the player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

  Spinning machine such as slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means In addition, or after a lapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped, and a gaming machine which gives a privilege to the player according to the stopped patterns.

  10 ... Pachinko machine, 61 ... Symbol display device, 73 ... Imaging device, 75 ... Signal processing circuit, 83 ... Main side MPU, 93 ... Sound light side MPU, 94 ... Sound light side ROM, 95 ... Sound light side RAM, T1 ~ T19 ... Characteristic point.

Claims (1)

Specific information providing means for providing specific information to the player,
Process execution means for executing a corresponding process corresponding to at least one of the specific information and the reaction of the player to the specific information;
Setting means for setting a waiting possible period that allows the player to perform a reaction corresponding to the specific information after the specific information is provided and before the corresponding processing is executed,
Period determining means for determining the waiting period from a plurality of types of periods,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Images